From 217bd854a745eab9aa3fd3d4c55f72e215e44afd Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Karl Berry Date: Wed, 4 Jul 2018 21:26:44 +0000 Subject: latex2e-help-texinfo (4jul18) git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@48135 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751 --- .../doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/ChangeLog | 600 +- .../doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/Makefile | 4 +- .../texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/NEWS | 20 + .../doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/aspell.en.pws | 189 +- .../doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/common.texi | 4 +- .../doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/graphics/README | 10 +- .../latex2e-help-texinfo/graphics/asy/list.asy | 2 +- .../latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e-figures/list.eps | 1302 + .../latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e-figures/list.pdf | Bin 10128 -> 10128 bytes .../latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e-figures/list.png | Bin 74651 -> 74651 bytes .../doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.dbk | 11102 +++++-- .../doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.html | 28916 +++++++++++-------- .../doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.pdf | Bin 976231 -> 1074707 bytes .../doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.texi | 14584 +++++++--- .../doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt | 14033 ++++++--- .../doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.xml | 23531 +++++++++------ 16 files changed, 61511 insertions(+), 32786 deletions(-) create mode 100644 Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e-figures/list.eps (limited to 'Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo') diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/ChangeLog b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/ChangeLog index 49ec6a9f6de..5045fa5a6df 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/ChangeLog +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/ChangeLog @@ -1,3 +1,313 @@ +2018-07-03 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi Do a CTAN release following the checklist in the + file CTAN. Zip file contents from "make dist" looks OK to me. + +2018-07-02 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi: typos, underfull boxes, mirror wording. + +2018-07-02 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi: Finished checking entries against + latex2e-reference. Removed that item from xx list. + (CTAN) Added section. + +2018-07-02 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi:Check entries against + latex2e-reference. Through "Modes". + +2018-07-01 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi:Check entries against + latex2e-reference. Through the \t's. + +2018-07-01 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi:Check entries against + latex2e-reference. Through the \m's. + +2018-06-30 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi (Index): Merge General Index and Concept Index. + + * latex2e.texi (\bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip): one + anchor for each. + +2018-06-30 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi:Try adding anchors that have URL's that + are easy to figure out. Add them in a couple of places, notably + in lists of parameters. + (Predefined lengths) Delete, moving contents to \mbox & \makebox. + +2018-06-29 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi: Put @noindent's following + @end examples where they are needed in PDF. + +2018-06-29 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi (Command line options) <-interaction>: + use @var{mode} to avoid overfull box in index. Use - for printed + output, and no @ftable. + (common.texi): minimize url. + +2018-06-28 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi (Command line): both - and -- work in TL, + and, I hope, in MiKTeX. + +2018-06-29 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi: Under- and underfull lines in PDF + are gone. + +2018-06-29 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi: Fix over- and underfull lines in PDF. + Through page 100. + +2018-06-28 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi (Command line) Fix synopsis calling syntax. Added + examples of putting commands on the command line, + and of recovering from errors. This finishes latex-info; I have + removed it from the todo's. + +2018-06-27 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi (Terminal input/output) Added synopsis, examples. + (Command line) Give synopsis calling syntax. Expanded + into sections the command options, including a discussion of shell + escape. Put in stub for putting commands on the command line, + and for recovering from errors. + +2018-06-26 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi (Front/back matter) Expanded the entries for the + table of contents, for the index, and for the glossaries. Added + many examples, adjusted wording. Added description of options for + .isty files. + +2018-06-21 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi (Special insertions) Rearranged the lists so that + the examples come first. That eases finding things for readers, since + all examples are in the same place vertically. Added Unicode for + HTML where available. + +2018-06-20 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi (\sbox & \savebox) Combined the two. Added examples, + adjusted wording + (lrbox) Adjust wording. + (\usebox) Adjust wording, add error messages. + +2018-06-19 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi (\strut) Added. + (\mbox & \makebox) Add examples, cross-references, adjust wording. + (\fbox & \framebox) Change name, add examples, adjust wording. + +2018-06-18 Karl Berry + + * latex2e.texi: let's make "uppercase" and "lowercase" one word? + Break some long (>=80 chars) lines, though many remain. + +2018-06-17 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi (Spaces) Do vertical spacing commands. + Add subsections for \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip, and the + \bigbreak, etc. Add examples, particularly tricky was \addvspace. + +2018-06-16 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi (Spaces) Did horizontal spacing commands. + Add subsections for \hss and for tie, ~. Change the two subsections + on \(SPACE) to one, giving \@ its own subsection. Add examples, adjust + wording, add error messages. + (\mbox & \makebox) Combine the two sections into one. This needs more + work, including examples and error messages. + +2018-06-12 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi (Sectioning) Add subsections for \appendix and for + \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter. List the sectioning + parameters secnumdepth and tocdepth. Add Larger book template in + part as example of frontmatter, appendix, etc. Also add article + template. Adjust wording of some other sections, such as Tables + of Contents, to fit changes. Add examples. Adjust wording of main + Sectioning section. + +2018-06-11 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi (Sectioning) Make subsections for \part, \chapter, + \section, etc. Add examples. Adjust wording of main section. + +2018-06-09 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi (Math miscellany) Move dots to separate subsection + under Math symbols. Move \overline, etc. to separate subsection + after Math accents. Move \imath and \jmath to Math symbols. + Change rest to a menu, with synopses and examples, and error + messages where appropriate. Adjust wording. + +2018-06-07 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi (\pagestyle) Add description of mechanism, + with example. Modify description of \makeboth, \makeright. + * graphics/Makefile Add. Make the graphics. + (list.eps) Have it generated by Asymptote, to make it smaller + and vector. + +2018-06-07 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi (\pagenumbering) Add gobble, examples, refs to + page styles and counters. + (\maketitle) Improve example to contain all four declarations. + +2018-06-06 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi (Math spacing) Adjust wording. + (Page styles) Add example, adjust wording. + +2018-06-06 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi (Math functions) Make the @math{...} stuff not + appear in the HTML. Add comment about amsmath allowing users to + create their own. + (Math accents) Make the @math{...} stuff not + appear in the HTML. + +2018-06-05 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi (Math formulas) Adjust wording, including a suggestion + that new math docs should use the AMS packages. Add subsection to + symbols for Caligraphic, \boldmath, and blackboard bold. + +2018-06-04 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi (Modes) Include all six modes, with the vertical ones. + Adjust wording. + (Making paragraphs) Add \par. Combine \noindent and \indent. + Add \parindent to \parskip. + +2018-06-01 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi (Page breaking) Next in latex-info. Adjust wording. + Add examples and a few error messages. + (\clearpage & \cleardoublepage) Combine the two into one. + +2018-06-01 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi (Line breaking) Next in latex-info (split with + page breaking). Adjust wording. Add examples and a few error + messages. Adjust wording. + (sloppypar) Add. + +2018-06-01 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi (Letters) Next in latex-info. Adjust wording. + (\mlabel) Brought text from fr on customization of label + printing, added example. + +2018-05-31 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi (Lengths) Next in latex-info is Lengths. + Adjust entries, adding examples and error messages. + (Definitions) \newlength adjusted, examples added. Make + synopses fit pattern elsewhere, including adding case of + no square brackets. Adjust wording of optargdefault in both + \newcommand and \newenvironment. + +2018-05-30 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi (footnote) Next in latex-info is Footnotes. + Fold examples together into Footnotes in Tables subsection. Move + Parameters subsection material to \footnote. Adjust wording. + +2018-05-29 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi (thebibliography) Add examples. Adjust wording. + +2018-05-28 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi (picture) Add examples. Adjust wording. + Add menu items, readjust menu order. Add examples for many + menu subjects and adjust wording. + +2018-05-24 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi (verbatim) Expand on problems putting + it in argument of macros, add examples. + (verse) Adjust wording. + +2018-05-23 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi Continue going through latex-info. Through that + doc's Environments. Adjust wording as it arises. + (minipage, parbox) Expand on options, add examples. + +2018-05-19 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi Continue going through latex-info. Through that + doc's Cross References, Commands, Page Layout. Adjust wording + as it arises, including adding error messages. + +2018-05-18 Karl Berry + + * text: "GNU/Linux", @TeX{} Live, MiK@TeX{}, just @samp. + +2018-05-17 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi Going through http://ctan.org/pkg/latex-info + (CTAN package latex-info), making sure this doc has everything + the older one has. So far, Counters done. Also adjust wording + as it arises. + +2018-05-17 Jim Hefferon + + * latex2e.texi (\include & \includeonly) Combine the two. Include + discussion of many edge cases, with examples. + (Splitting the input) Add typical case example. + (\endinput) Added. + (\input) Adjust wording to fit changes. + +2018-05-04 Vincent Belaïche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (Color): Translate node Color from Jim's r609 — + subnodes need further translation work. + +2018-04-30 Jim Hefferon + + * Makefile (dist) Add latex2e-es.pdf. + * latex2e.texi (list) Add h0 description accidentally omitted. + (picture) Add additional synopsis, adjust wording. + +2018-03-22 Vincent Belaïche + + * latex2e-fr.texi (All document): Use « tapuscrit » instead or as + an alternartive to « machine à écrire » for tt font family. + (Top, Color, Graphics): Add Color and Graphics nodes and sub-nodes + thereof, without translation. + (description): Translate edits from Jim r609 2018-03-04 + + * latex2e.texi (description): @var{}-ify « text of first item » + and « text of second item » + (description): « labeled list of items » -> « list of labeled items » + (Color package options): @code{}-ify « color » in title, as it is + the package name. + (Graphics package options, Graphics package configuration): + @code{}-ify « graphics » in title, as it is the package name. + +2018-03-21 Jim Hefferon + + * -- Prepare upload distribution to CTAN with correct file mtimes. + * makedist.sh Delete. (Better to use Makefile) + * CTAN Create Notes on uploading a distribution. + 2018-03-28 Karl Berry * Makefile (dist): rm zip file before remaking it; @@ -54,7 +364,7 @@ * latex2e.texi (list environment): Move list parameters to this entry. -2018-01-02 Vincent Belaïche +2018-01-02 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e-fr.texi (thebibliography, Upper and lower case): Align on Karl's r598 edits of 2017-10-29. @@ -65,7 +375,7 @@ * latex2e.texi: typos, wording. * aspell.en.pws: more exceptions. -2017-10-17 Vincent Belaïche +2017-10-17 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e-fr.texi (document header): Uppercase title 1st letter. Make PlainTeX a flag, not sure what the best translation @@ -76,15 +386,15 @@ (\providecommand): Add Jim's edits of r348 2015-05-29. (\newcommand & \renewcommand): Typo. (\newenvironment & \renewenvironment): typo. - (\newsavebox): Use « baquet » rather than « bac » to translate - « bin ». + (\newsavebox): Use « baquet » rather than « bac » to translate + « bin ». (Special insertions, Non-English characters): Rename node - « Non-English characters » to « Additional Latin letters ». Add an + « Non-English characters » to « Additional Latin letters ». Add an anchor for backward compatibility. * latex2e.texi (Document class options): Add @PkgIndex{geometry}. -2017-10-08 Vincent Belaïche +2017-10-08 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e.texi: Mark tabbing node translation from French as TODO. (thebibliography): Fix description about \refname, as sometimes it @@ -95,7 +405,7 @@ (thebibliography): Fix description about \refname, as sometimes it is also \bibname. -2017-10-06 Vincent Belaïche +2017-10-06 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e-fr.texi: Make EnvIndex and PkgIndex macro usable on the same line as text. @@ -109,7 +419,7 @@ algorithm2e and listings packages. (Upper and lower case): Mention textcase package. -2017-10-04 Vincent Belaïche +2017-10-04 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e.texi (tabbing): Partial translation of tabbing node rewrite, and add examples. @@ -123,7 +433,7 @@ (table): Typo. -2017-10-03 Vincent Belaïche +2017-10-03 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e-fr.texi (Class and package commands): Typo. (quotation and quote): Typoes. @@ -133,7 +443,7 @@ * latex2e.texi, * latex2e-fr.texi (Low-level font commands): remove width percentages. -2017-08-22 Vincent Belaïche +2017-08-22 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e.texi: push iftexthenelse macro and HAS-MATH flag to common.texi (Low-level font commands): Restore cmss & cmtt. `@dmn{}%' -> `%'. @@ -143,7 +453,7 @@ * common.texi: push iftexthenelse macro and HAS-MATH flag to common.texi -2017-08-22 Vincent Belaïche +2017-08-22 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e.texi (Low-level font commands): Refer to https://ctan.org/pkg/encguide. Use multitables to achieve Jim's @@ -157,7 +467,7 @@ Jim's r363 edits of 2015-06-16, as well as my edits on top of them to latex2e.texi made in this revision. -2017-08-09 Vincent Belaïche +2017-08-09 Vincent Belaïche * NEWS-fr: Typoes. @@ -169,12 +479,12 @@ * latex2e.texi: (\@startsection) Added defaults for book, article, and report classes. -2017-08-08 Vincent Belaïche +2017-08-08 Vincent Belaïche * README-fr: Convert from latin-9 to utf-8 to comply with CTAN requirements. -2017-08-08 Vincent Belaïche +2017-08-08 Vincent Belaïche * Makefile.1: rename README-fr to README in the zipped archive. @@ -184,13 +494,13 @@ * README-fr: Typoes. Extend the leading English part fo the French readme to comply with CTAN requirements. -2017-08-08 Vincent Belaïche +2017-08-08 Vincent Belaïche * README-fr: Port GNA! -> Puszcza. `non officiel' -> `officieux' for consistency with manual. Mention other people translate `moving argument' by `argument mouvant'. -2017-08-08 Vincent Belaïche +2017-08-08 Vincent Belaïche * NEWS-fr: Add delivery note --- translated from Jim's, thank you Jim! @@ -205,7 +515,7 @@ * latex2e-fr.{dbk,.dvi,.html,.info,.pdf,.texi,.txt,.xml}: Compilation for August 2017 delivery to CTAN. -2017-08-08 Vincent Belaïche +2017-08-08 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e-fr.texi: Update version & copyright notice for August 2017 delivery to CTAN. @@ -223,7 +533,7 @@ * latex2e.texi: copyright 2017. -2017-08-01 Vincent Belaïche +2017-08-01 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e.texi (Environment, Declaration, \makeatletter and \makeatother) (\@@ifstar, \@@startsection): put a sectionning title to node. @@ -258,7 +568,7 @@ (Sectioning): Add anchor to secnumdepth counter for reference from \@@startsection node. -2017-07-31 Vincent Belaïche +2017-07-31 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e-fr.texi (Class and package commands): Add \CheckCommand and \DeclareRobustCommand as per Jim's r568 2017-07-30 edits + my @@ -269,7 +579,7 @@ (Class and package commands/\DeclareRobustCommand): Improve existing description. Add mention to etoolbox macros. -2017-07-31 Vincent Belaïche +2017-07-31 Vincent Belaïche * Makefile.1: Extend check-dw to handle other languages. Add target help. @@ -282,7 +592,7 @@ * latex2e.texi (document header): update version. -2017-07-31 Vincent Belaïche +2017-07-31 Vincent Belaïche * Makefile.1: Add targets , like enpdf, frpdf, eninfo, etc... @@ -294,8 +604,8 @@ `http://ctan.org/...'. Reword `non officiel' -> `officieux'. (Overview): Take edits from Jim's r412+413 of 2015-08-21. (Starting and ending): Typo. rewording `sections' -> `rubriques'. - (Output files): English quotes `` '' to French quotes - « ». Concerning .log, add @dfn{fichier journal} (the French for + (Output files): English quotes `` '' to French quotes + « ». Concerning .log, add @dfn{fichier journal} (the French for ``log file''). Typo. Translate leftover English in .lot/.lof/.toc cindex. (@TeX{} engines): @TeX{} -> @TeX{} de base --- ie Plain-@TeX{}. Typo. @@ -312,7 +622,7 @@ (displaymath): Take edits from Jim's r412 2015-08-21, plus my modifications to latex2e.texi. (picture): `sections' -> `rubriques'. - (\oval): English quotes `` '' to French quotes « ». + (\oval): English quotes `` '' to French quotes « ». (table): Exchange order of \caption and \label in example to align on the English version. (Units of length): Translate to French leftover English @cindex @@ -369,14 +679,14 @@ * latex2e.texi: (\@ifstar): Translate from the French version. (\@startsection): Move to Sectioning. -2017-07-27 Vincent Belaïche +2017-07-27 Vincent Belaïche * Makefile.1 (compare-nodes, compare-nodes-fr, compare-nodes-es): new targets to compare node lists between languages. compare-nodes is made a synonym of compare-nodes-fr because the Spanish translation does not reuse the same node names. -2017-07-26 Vincent Belaïche +2017-07-26 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e-fr.texi (
): Add reference to https://www.latex-project.org/help/books/lc2fr-apb.pdf, as far as @@ -461,7 +771,7 @@ * latex2e.texi: added class and package commands from clsguide.pdf. -2017-06-09 Vincent Belaïche +2017-06-09 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e-fr.texi (abstract): typo. (\raggedleft): typo. @@ -489,7 +799,7 @@ (tugboat template): update. -2016-11-24 Vincent Belaïche +2016-11-24 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e-es.texi: Place the English license in the @copying section, and push the translation to an annex. @@ -506,7 +816,7 @@ * Makefile (txt_files): Remove license.texi from the list of files to zip into the distributed archive. -2016-11-23 Vincent Belaïche +2016-11-23 Vincent Belaïche * license.texi: dos2unix + svn propset svn:eol-style to LF. @@ -529,7 +839,7 @@ * Makefile.1: Add check-license- targets to check that the license is same as in license.texi -2016-11-21 Vincent Belaïche +2016-11-21 Vincent Belaïche * ltx-help.el (latex-help-file): Make this variable a defcustom for selecting the manuel translation. @@ -549,11 +859,11 @@ license.texi, make it delimited by @comment's. (\cc): Add `, as in:' before example. -2016-11-19 Vincent Belaïche +2016-11-19 Vincent Belaïche * license.texi: Ooops... add this file. -2016-11-19 Vincent Belaïche +2016-11-19 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e-fr.{xml,dvi,html,info,pdf,txt}: Make these files again for the license. @@ -571,7 +881,7 @@ * Makefile (txt_files): Add license.texi file. -2016-11-18 Vincent Belaïche +2016-11-18 Vincent Belaïche * Makefile.1: Make variable txt_tiles a macro, so that NEWS-fr and README-fr be delivered instead of NEWS and README for target @@ -579,7 +889,7 @@ * NEWS-fr: add news for November 2016 CTAN delivery. -2016-11-18 Vincent Belaïche +2016-11-18 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e-fr.{xml,dvi,html,info,pdf,txt}: Make these files. @@ -597,7 +907,7 @@ * Makefile.1 (spell-$(1)): Take in edit by Karl (rev 546) on Makefile -2016-11-15 Vincent Belaïche +2016-11-15 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e.texi (Math miscellany): Use `math' instead of `text' for the @var{...} name. @@ -612,24 +922,24 @@ * Makefile (spell): A-Z intended in range. -2016-09-14 Vincent Belaïche +2016-09-14 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e-fr.{dbk,html,info,txt,xml,pdf}: Update French manuals. -2016-09-13 Vincent Belaïche +2016-09-13 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e-fr.texi (\@@ifstar): New node. * latex2e.texi (\makeatletter and \makeatother): Comment that documenting \@ifstar is TODO. -2016-09-13 Vincent Belaïche +2016-09-13 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e-fr.texi (\newcommand & \renewcommand, Spaces) (\(SPACE) and \@@, \(SPACE) after control sequence): Complete taking on Karl's rev497 edits. -2016-09-13 Vincent Belaïche +2016-09-13 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e-fr.texi (\discretionary, Footnotes in section headings) (\newcommand & \renewcommand, Math miscellany, \(SPACE) and \@@) @@ -637,7 +947,7 @@ (\(SPACE) after control sequence): Rename node --- old name was ``\(SPACE) after CS'' --- as per Karl's rev497 edits. -2016-09-12 Vincent Belaïche +2016-09-12 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e.texi (Document class options): Remove @dmn{...} for ``inches''. @@ -648,7 +958,7 @@ (Floats): Indicate that ``Here'' means ``Ici'', and fix left-over non translated word ``For''. -2016-09-09 Vincent Belaïche +2016-09-09 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e.texi (Document class options): @dmn{...}-ize the units in the text from Jim's rev383 changes. @@ -667,14 +977,14 @@ @dmn{...}-ize the units. (Math symbols): Fix typo in \uplus entry. -2016-09-07 Vincent Belaïche +2016-09-07 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e-fr.texi: Same changes as in latex2e.texi (Document class options): Minor editorial change. (\newenvironment & \renewenvironment): Align on Karl's rev538 - change, ie clarify that @var{débutdéf} and @var{findéf} are - executed within a group. Rename @var{débutdéf} and @var{findéf} to - @var{défdébut} and @var{déffin} + change, ie clarify that @var{débutdéf} and @var{findéf} are + executed within a group. Rename @var{débutdéf} and @var{findéf} to + @var{défdébut} and @var{déffin} * latex2e.texi: new iftexthenelse macro. (Footnotes in a table): Minor editorial change to avoid overfull hbox. @@ -687,7 +997,7 @@ by ``processed'' because not only execution but also expansion prior to it happens within a group. -2016-09-05 Vincent Belaïche +2016-09-05 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e.texi (\newenvironment & \renewenvironment): Add an @findex for ``group''. @@ -703,11 +1013,11 @@ https://mail.gna.org/listinfo/latexrefman-discuss is for archives and subsription. -2016-09-04 Vincent Belaïche +2016-09-04 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e-fr.texi: Whole file, suppress any trailing blanks. -2016-09-04 Vincent Belaïche +2016-09-04 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e-fr.texi (Top): Fix translation of sub node menu entry text. (Overview): Fix spelling. Fix leftover English. ``paquetage de @@ -748,7 +1058,7 @@ \mathsection \mathsterling \mathunderscore \mathunderscore. (Text symbols): add \textsection, \textquotesingle. -2016-04-12 Vincent Belaïche +2016-04-12 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e.texi (Document class options): Improve wording by reusing package variable @var{pkg} in the synopsis description. @@ -767,11 +1077,11 @@ `\@var{cmd}'. Fix typoes. (\newenvironment & \renewenvironment): nargs starting from 0 rather than from 1. Fix typoes. `argument positionnel' -> - `paramètre positionnel'. + `paramètre positionnel'. (Reserved characters): `\backslash' -> `\textbackslash' in the @findex in accordance with description. Fix typoes. -2016-04-12 Vincent Belaïche +2016-04-12 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e-fr.texi (top comment, Top): Make version under quotes to avoid incorrect French ``de Avril 2016'' or ``du Avril 2016'' @@ -782,24 +1092,24 @@ notice up to 2016. * latex2e-fr.texi (top comment): `Copyright' -> `Tous droits - réservés ©' + add ``Vincent Belaïche'' as translator. + réservés ©' + add ``Vincent Belaïche'' as translator. -2016-04-11 Vincent Belaïche +2016-04-11 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e-es.texi (top comment, Using BibTeX): Replace CTAN central server URLs by mirror URLs, after a comment by Petra - Rübe-Pugliese. + Rübe-Pugliese. * latex2e-fr.texi (top comment, Output files, Using BibTeX): Replace CTAN central server URLs by mirror URLs, after a comment - by Petra Rübe-Pugliese. + by Petra Rübe-Pugliese. (Output files, Using BibTeX): Typoes. * latex2e.texi (top comment, Output files): Replace CTAN central server URLs by mirror URLs, after a comment by Petra - Rübe-Pugliese. + Rübe-Pugliese. -2016-04-08 Vincent Belaïche +2016-04-08 Vincent Belaïche * NEWS: Add NEWS entry for the Apr 2016 release --- assuming English will be released also. @@ -807,12 +1117,12 @@ * Makefile.1 (dist-xx, dist): Fix pior check that there aren't any uncommited changes before making the zip. -2016-04-07 Vincent Belaïche +2016-04-07 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e-fr.{dbk,html,info,txt,xml,pdf}: Update French manuals for distribution 2016-04-08 to CTAN. -2016-04-07 Vincent Belaïche +2016-04-07 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e-fr.texi: Updated @set UPDATED. @@ -863,7 +1173,7 @@ make tag TAG=foo "MESSAGE=Some message" -2016-04-04 Vincent Belaïche +2016-04-04 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e.texi: Add EnvIndex macro to make indexing environments consistent and throughout the manual. Replace any @findex of an @@ -879,10 +1189,10 @@ * latex2e-es.texi: Same as latex2e.texi. (filecontents): Align to latest text in latex2e{,-fr}.texi. -2016-04-02 Vincent Belaïche +2016-04-02 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e-es.texi: Add @BES and @BESU macro definitions. - (Símbolos de Texto): Use @BES macro rather than @math for + (Símbolos de Texto): Use @BES macro rather than @math for \textperiodcentered so that the other-than-PDF is clean. `$' -> `\$' for \textdollar. @@ -893,21 +1203,21 @@ \@startsection example for solving the overfull hbox in the PDF output. * latex2e-fr.texi (Text symbols): \textquestiondown - Typo. \textexclamdown `haut en bas' -> `culbuté'. Use @BES macro + Typo. \textexclamdown `haut en bas' -> `culbuté'. Use @BES macro rather than @math for \textperiodcentered and \trademark so that the other-than-PDF is clean. `$' -> `\$' for \textdollar. `marque de fabrique' -> `marque de commerce' for \texttrademark. (\@@startsection): re-indent \@startsection example for solving the overfull hbox in the PDF output, and fix some wrong reference. -2016-03-31 Vincent Belaïche +2016-03-31 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e-fr.{dbk,dvi,html,info,pdf,texi,txt,xml}: make fr. -2016-03-29 Vincent Belaïche +2016-03-29 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e-fr.texi (Line breaking): Improve translation of - break/breaking, use `saut/sauter à' rather than `rupture/rompre'. + break/breaking, use `saut/sauter à' rather than `rupture/rompre'. (Spaces): Typo. (Special insertions): Typo. (Text symbols): Fix typo adding `comp' into @@ -923,7 +1233,7 @@ `\textcapitalcompwordmark' and `\textascendercompwordmark' -2016-03-17 Vincent Belaïche +2016-03-17 Vincent Belaïche Reword descrition of \epsilon and \varepsilon. @@ -933,15 +1243,15 @@ ``script small letter''. * latex2e-fr.texi (Math symbols): About \varepsilon ``en forme de - 3 retourné'' -> ``minuscule de ronde''. + 3 retourné'' -> ``minuscule de ronde''. -2016-03-15 Vincent Belaïche +2016-03-15 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e.texi (Math symbols): Fix compilation errors. * latex2e-fr.texi (Math symbols): Fix compilation errors. -2016-03-14 Vincent Belaïche +2016-03-14 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e.texi Define flags NotInPlainTeX, NeedsAMSSymb and NeedsSTIX, in order to factorize text of `Math symbols' node. @@ -954,7 +1264,7 @@ * latex2e-fr.texi (Math symbols): Progress translation of this node and make same changes as for latex2e.texi. -2016-03-08 Vincent Belaïche +2016-03-08 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e-fr.texi (Top): Typoe in `Modes' menu entry. (eqnarray): `or' -> `ou'. @@ -975,41 +1285,41 @@ (\ensuremath): new node. (Text symbols): Add pilcrow character for \P, similar change for \S. -2016-03-06 Vincent Belaïche +2016-03-06 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e-fr.texi (Math symbols): Progress translation of this node. -2016-02-29 Vincent Belaïche +2016-02-29 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e-fr.texi (\circle): Use term ``disque'', in addition to ``cercle plein'' (solid circle). @dmn{...}-ify unit. (\makebox (picture)): Typo. (Math symbols): Progress translation of this node. -2016-02-22 Vincent Belaïche +2016-02-22 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e.texi (Text symbols): Fix @code{'}->@code{''} for \textquotedblright (Splitting the input): @dfn{...}-ify `root file' and add it to concept index (\include): Replace `See next section' -> `See @ref{\includeonly}'. (\includeonly): `@var{file}s' -> `@var{file1}, @var{file2}, @dots{}' - * latex2e-fr.texi (\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol): `croix-mortuaire' -> `obèle' + * latex2e-fr.texi (\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol): `croix-mortuaire' -> `obèle' (Math symbols): Progress translation of this node. (Text symbols): Start translation of this node. - (\thinspace): `imbriqué' -> `emboîté', as per Cahier GUTenberg #49 glossary + (\thinspace): `imbriqué' -> `emboîté', as per Cahier GUTenberg #49 glossary (Text symbols): Fix @code{'}->@code{''} for \textquotedblright (Splitting the input, \include, \includeonly, \input): Translate these nodes. (Splitting the input): @dfn{...}-ify `root file' and add it to concept index (\include): Replace `See next section' -> `See @ref{\includeonly}'. (\includeonly): `@var{file}s' -> `@var{file1}, @var{file2}, @dots{}' -2016-02-15 Vincent Belaïche +2016-02-15 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e.texi (\noindent): `..' -> `...'. * latex2e-fr.texi (About this document, @LaTeX{} command syntax) (Document class options, Document class options) - (Page layout parameters, Sectioning, enumerate, \item, \line) + (Page layout parameters, Sectioning, enumerate, \item, \line) (\thicklines, \thinlines, \cite, \newtheorem, \newtheorem, \newtheorem) (\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol, \signature): @tie{} -> UTF-8 unbreakable space. @@ -1020,7 +1330,7 @@ (Math symbols): Progress translation + @tie{} -> UTF-8 unbreakable space. -2016-02-11 Vincent Belaïche +2016-02-11 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e.texi (abstract): @code{...}-ify words `article' & `report' when they refer to classes. @@ -1034,10 +1344,10 @@ (\@@startsection): `@var{indent}' -> `@var{retrait}', indent(ation) -> retrait or renfoncement. (Document class options): Added flegn concerns display mode formula only. (Environments): `mise en vedette' -> `en hors texte' - (abstract): `abtracts' -> `résumé', and update translating this + (abstract): `abtracts' -> `résumé', and update translating this node as per Jim's rev 486 of 2015-12-05T13:22:45+01 edit. (Environment): Ellipsis `..' -> `...', and add - `Voir @ref{Environments} pour une liste des environnements.' as + `Voir @ref{Environments} pour une liste des environnements.' as per Jim's rev 486 of 2015-12-05T13:22:45+01 edit. (array): Update translation ad per Jim's edits rev 391 of 2015-08-02T22:57:00+02 and with fixes from rev 469 by Karl of @@ -1064,7 +1374,7 @@ * latex2e.texi (array): the directive is just p{...}, not @p{...}. Noted by Vincent. -2016-02-08 Vincent Belaïche +2016-02-08 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e.texi (lrbox): Use Synopsis instead of in-line @code{...}. `cmd' -> `\@var{cmd}'. @ref{...}-ify @code{\sbox}. @@ -1093,12 +1403,12 @@ (lrbox): Translate this node. (\raisebox): Complete translation of this node. (Front/back matter): Typo. - (Tables of contents): `article' -> `entrée', as per Cahier GUTenberg #49 glossary. + (Tables of contents): `article' -> `entrée', as per Cahier GUTenberg #49 glossary. (\addcontentsline): Translate this node, with same edits as in latex2e.texi. (\addtocontents): Translate this node. (Glossaries): Translate this node. (Indexes): Translate this node, with same edits as in latex2e.texi. - (Letters): Typoes. `clôture' -> `salutation'. Typo. Complete + (Letters): Typoes. `clôture' -> `salutation'. Typo. Complete translation with same edits as in latex2e.texi. (\address): Translate this node. (\cc): Translate this node. @@ -1108,7 +1418,7 @@ (\makelabels): Typo. (\opening): Typo. -2016-02-05 Vincent Belaïche +2016-02-05 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e.texi (Line breaking, \discretionary): Add node \discreionary, need completion. @@ -1122,7 +1432,7 @@ (Page breaking): Translate this node. (\protect): Translate this node, with same changes as in latex2e.texi. -2016-02-04 Vincent Belaïche +2016-02-04 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e-fr.texi (Spacing in math mode): Add @xref{\thinspace} to the \thinspace entry. @@ -1139,7 +1449,7 @@ example. Make TeX output only when compilation is with TeX and fix some of the examples. -2016-02-02 Vincent Belaïche +2016-02-02 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e-fr.texi: Reword copyright notice from Automatic-translation French to real French. @@ -1180,7 +1490,7 @@ * latex2e.texi (\newcommand & \renewcommand): mention "\ " after control sequences, as noted by Vincent. -2016-01-27 Vincent Belaïche +2016-01-27 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e-fr.texi (Marginal notes): Typoes. (Subscripts & superscripts): Typo. @@ -1222,7 +1532,7 @@ * aspell.en.pws: add more exceptions. * latex2e.texi: fix typos, refilling. -2016-01-15 Vincent Belaïche +2016-01-15 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e.texi (\setlength, \addtolength, \settodepth) (\settoheight, \settowidth): Place synopsis in a Synopsis @@ -1242,7 +1552,7 @@ (Symbols by font position): Add this node, after update made to latex2e.texi -2015-12-14 Vincent Belaïche +2015-12-14 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e-fr.texi (Top): section->rubrique, sectionement->rubricage (@LaTeX{} command syntax): Add node ``\makeatletter and \makeatother''. @@ -1315,7 +1625,7 @@ * latex2e.texi (\makeatletter and \makeatother): Adjust wording. -2015-11-26 Vincent Belaïche +2015-11-26 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e-fr.texi (\newsavebox, \newtheorem, \newfont): Complete translation of this node, and align on latest English version. @@ -1335,7 +1645,7 @@ position. Distinguish between output in text body font and output in typewriter font. -2015-11-09 Vincent Belaïche +2015-11-09 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e.texi (\newcommand & \renewcommand): Introduce the concept of positional parameter. @@ -1346,7 +1656,7 @@ letters and character `*'. Use the term positional parameter, and tell that expansion is within begdefn, not within environment, which was misleading. @samp{...}-ify `Shakespear' outside of - @example...@end example. + @example...@end example. * latex2e-fr.texi (Output files): Typo. (tabular): Typoes. @@ -1354,14 +1664,14 @@ (\newenvironment & \renewenvironment): Complete the translation and make the same text improvements as in latex2e.texi. -2015-11-06 Vincent Belaïche +2015-11-06 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e-fr.texi (\parbox): Tell that `position=m' equates the default behaviour. * latex2e.texi (\parbox): Same as latex2e-fr.texi. -2015-11-05 Vincent Belaïche +2015-11-05 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e.texi (\fussy): Typo. @@ -1369,16 +1679,16 @@ (\verb): Clean-up left over English words. (\obeycr & \restorecr, \fussy, \sloppy): Translate this node. -2015-11-04 Vincent Belaïche +2015-11-04 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e.texi (tabular): wording `@code{*-expression}' -> `@code{*}-expression'. * latex2e-fr.texi (tabular): Complete translation of this node. -2015-11-03 Vincent Belaïche +2015-11-03 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e.texi (\parbox): Correct description of \parbox vertical - alignment after comment from Denis Bitouzé. + alignment after comment from Denis Bitouzé. * latex2e-fr.texi (\parbox): Same as for latex2e.texi. @@ -1389,11 +1699,11 @@ * latex2e.texi (throughout): consistently use ... instead of .. for code ellipses. -2015-10-27 Vincent Belaïche +2015-10-27 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e-fr.texi (enumerate): Typo. (itemize): Restore missing example. - (thebibliography): `label' -> `étiquette', `cite_key' -> + (thebibliography): `label' -> `étiquette', `cite_key' -> `clef_de_cite'. Change wording concerning `\refname' in standard classes. (\bibitem, \cite, \nocite, Using BibTeX, theorem): Translate this node. (\cleardoublepage, \newpage): Improve wording `page actuelle' -> @@ -1438,7 +1748,7 @@ * latex2e.texi (Footnotes): Add remark that getting biblio references in footnotes depends on the bibliographic style. -2015-10-11 Vincent Belaïche +2015-10-11 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e-fr.texi (Page breaking): Translate menu entries (\cleardoublepage, \clearpage, \newpage, \enlargethispage) @@ -1451,7 +1761,7 @@ * latex2e.texi (\cleardoublepage, \clearpage): Clarify that only pending floating tables & figures are cleared. (\newpage): `see @code{\clearpage} above' -> `@pxref{\clearpage}' - (Footnotes): Make the exact quotation of Noël Coward, and correct + (Footnotes): Make the exact quotation of Noël Coward, and correct his first name spelling. 2015-10-11 Jim Hefferon @@ -1468,7 +1778,7 @@ * latex2e.texi (\makelabels): Add more on how to customize label sizes, etc. -2015-10-09 Vincent Belaïche +2015-10-09 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e-fr.texi (Environments): Merge menu entries for nodes quote & quotations after Jim's edits of 2015-09-28 @@ -1481,7 +1791,7 @@ * latex2e.texi (Footnotes in a section heading): Add node, provide examples. -2015-10-08 Vincent Belaïche +2015-10-08 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e.texi (\makelabels): @var{...}-ify argument 'to addess', and @code{...}-ify class name. @@ -1544,7 +1854,7 @@ * latex2e.texi (Letters): Add synopsis, examples. -2015-09-22 Vincent Belaïche +2015-09-22 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e-fr.texi (filecontents): Add Jim's 2015-09-18 (r439) edits. (\addvspace): Add Jim's 2015-09-13 (r432) edits. @@ -1560,7 +1870,7 @@ * latex2e-{es,fr}.{dbk,html,info,txt,xml}: Compile these files again, because of eol problem. -2015-09-21 Vincent Belaïche +2015-09-21 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e-{es,fr}.{dbk,dvi,html,info,pdf,txt,xml}: Compile these files @@ -1570,7 +1880,7 @@ * latex2e.texi (filecontents): Corrections suggested by JB. -2015-09-17 Vincent Belaïche +2015-09-17 Vincent Belaïche * ChangeLog: Correct typo on Jim's surname Hefferson->Hefferon. @@ -1589,7 +1899,7 @@ * latex2e.texi (Subscripts & superscripts): Add examples. -2015-09-15 Vincent Belaïche +2015-09-15 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e.texi (Starting and ending): Add @cindex environment (Spaces, \(SPACE) and \@@, \(SPACE) after CS): Move text how to @@ -1602,7 +1912,7 @@ changes as for latex2e.texi. (Overview): add @: after some abbrev ending periods. (Font styles): Follow Karl's changes of - 2015-04-26, "deux choses très différentes"->"deux constructions + 2015-04-26, "deux choses très différentes"->"deux constructions sans relation l'une avec l'autre" (Starting and ending): Follows Karl's change of 2015-04-26 (\- (hyphenation)): Translate this node. @@ -1626,7 +1936,7 @@ * latex2e.texi (\noindent): Add example. -2015-09-14 Vincent Belaïche +2015-09-14 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e.texi (Spacing in math mode): Add missing @findex entries for \thickspace, \medspace & \thinspace. Typo tht->that. @@ -1689,7 +1999,7 @@ * latex2e.texi (Spacing in math mode): Move math mode lengths to here and add whether they work also in text mode. -2015-09-04 Vincent Belaïche +2015-09-04 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e-fr.texi: Add macroes BES & BESU to support compilation of math symbols with texi2pdf. (Symbolic footnotes): Complete translation of this node @@ -1714,7 +2024,7 @@ (\makebox): reword is specified->can be overriden, because width is optional. (\makebox): @code{...}-ify environment name picture. -2015-08-29 Vincent Belaïche +2015-08-29 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e-fr.texi (\linethickness): Typo. (\thicklines, \thinlines, \shortstack, \/, \hrulefill) @@ -1727,7 +2037,7 @@ (\addvspace): @var{...}-ify word `length'. -2015-08-27 Vincent Belaïche +2015-08-27 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e.texi (Units of length): Use `@dmn{...}' rather than `@tie{}...' in new node added by Jim. @@ -1736,11 +2046,11 @@ * latex2e.texi (Units of length): Add new node in Lengths. -2015-08-25 Vincent Belaïche +2015-08-25 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e.texi (tabular): typo : horozontal->horizontal. -2015-08-24 Vincent Belaïche +2015-08-24 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e.texi (picture): (width,height)(x offset,y offset)->(@var{width},@var{height})(@var{xoffset},@var{yoffset}) (picture): make position a concept index entry, and @dfn{...}-ize it. @@ -1750,7 +2060,7 @@ (picture): Translate this node. (\framebox (picture)): @var{width}->@var{largeur} -2015-08-23 Vincent Belaïche +2015-08-23 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e-fr.texi (file preamble): Add comment about glossary resources useful for French translation @@ -1761,7 +2071,7 @@ (\centering): typo (flushleft, \raggedright): Improve wording. (flushright, \raggedleft): Translate these nodes. - (quotation, Making paragraphs): ligne blanche->ligne à blanc + (quotation, Making paragraphs): ligne blanche->ligne à blanc * latex2e.texi (Floats): typo insert comma. (Floats): figure->float @@ -1790,7 +2100,7 @@ with issues. Shrink the figure and table nodes by the common material. -2015-08-20 Vincent Belaïche +2015-08-20 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e-fr.texi (Output files, @TeX{} engines, \line) (Glossaries): Remove @acronym on Karl's request @@ -1807,7 +2117,7 @@ * Makefile (xref_suffixes): no auxs or tocs. -2015-08-19 Vincent Belaïche +2015-08-19 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e.texi (flushleft): string->control sequence. @@ -1898,7 +2208,7 @@ * latex2e.texi (center, \centering): Add detail, including distinguishing the two and examples. -2015-08-05 Vincent Belaïche +2015-08-05 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e.texi (\indent): remove "width of" concering concerning \parindent length. @@ -1935,7 +2245,7 @@ * latex2e.texi (vline, cline, hline): Add examples. Also describe how columns are counted. -2015-07-30 Vincent Belaïche +2015-07-30 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e-fr.texi (Top): Correct menu item French translation for "Making paragraphs" (itemize): typo, remove left-over English word "dash" @@ -1944,7 +2254,7 @@ * latex2e.texi (Text symbols): Correct -- for --- for en-dash -2015-07-29 Vincent Belaïche +2015-07-29 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e-es.texi (Acentos): Make references between \underbar and \b. @@ -1987,7 +2297,7 @@ the unicode glyph to the start of each entry to make easier scanning for the desired symbol. -2015-07-08 Vincent Belaïche +2015-07-08 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e-fr.texi (Line breaking, \savebox): Translation to French. (Sectioning): Typo. @@ -2294,7 +2604,7 @@ * latex2e.texi (\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol): \Roman for second @item. Typo reported by Jose Atria. -2014-11-19 Vincent Belaïche +2014-11-19 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e-fr.texi: Progress translation to French @@ -2304,12 +2614,12 @@ (node filecontents): Make it clear that it is about files not documents. -2014-10-20 Vincent Belaïche +2014-10-20 Vincent Belaïche * Makefile: Add target `check' to compile each manual once with tex and once with makeinfo. This is faster than using target `all'. -2014-10-19 Vincent Belaïche +2014-10-19 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e.texi (\setcounter): replace @var{\counter} by @var{counter} @@ -2318,7 +2628,7 @@ * latex2e-fr.texi (\setcounter): Same change as latex2e.texi. Progress Translation to French. -2014-10-17 Vincent Belaïche +2014-10-17 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e-es.texi (\pagenumbering): use @backslashchar{} within @vincentb in order to compile with tex. @@ -2336,7 +2646,7 @@ * latex2e-es.texi (\put): @vincentb, not @vincenb. -2014-09-25 Vincent Belaïche +2014-09-25 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e.texi (\put): Make coordinates within @var{...} and add explicit reference to them in the text. @@ -2348,7 +2658,7 @@ * latex2e-fr.texi (nodes \put, \usebox): Same as latex2e.texi. Progress translation to French. -2014-09-19 Vincent Belaïche +2014-09-19 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e.texi (document header): Set @documentencoding and @documentlanguage. @@ -2374,7 +2684,7 @@ * latex2e-fr.texi: Similar changes as latex2e.texi. Progress translation to French. -2014-09-10 Vincent Belaïche +2014-09-10 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e.texi (\thinspace): em -> @dmn{em}. @@ -2382,7 +2692,7 @@ * latex2e-fr.texi: Progress translation to French. -2014-09-08 Vincent Belaïche +2014-09-08 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e-fr.texi: Progress translation to French. @@ -2390,14 +2700,14 @@ make by' by `The box made by'. (node Math miscellany): correct typo `for examp*l*e'. -2014-08-30 Vincent Belaïche +2014-08-30 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e-es.texi (\vector): correct bug involved by renaming y-slop/x-slop to declivex/declivey --- as I used @vincentb macro encapsulation to mark my change, it made \ of \vector no longer a "other" character. -2014-08-29 Vincent Belaïche +2014-08-29 Vincent Belaïche * Makefile: add definition of variable all, for clean to work. Add squeaky as a synonym of realclean. Add in comment generic line for @@ -2408,12 +2718,12 @@ * latex2e.texi (node Page layout parameters): correct typo clase -> classes (node array): `in that row' -> `in each row of that column - * latex2e-es.texi (node array): `el número de elementos y deben + * latex2e-es.texi (node array): `el número de elementos y deben tener el formato' -> `cual formato debe tener cada linea en esta columna' -2014-08-24 Vincent Belaïche +2014-08-24 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e.texi (node Boxes): add @code{...} encapsulation. (\dashbox): replace @code{...} by @var{...} for \dashbox @@ -2426,7 +2736,7 @@ * latex2e-es.texi (node Cajas): same as latex2e.texi. (\dashbox): same as latex2e.texi. Rename parameter - @var{dlargo} to @var{glargo}, with 'g' for guión (aka + @var{dlargo} to @var{glargo}, with 'g' for guión (aka dash). (nodes \line & Glossarios): same as latex2e.texi. (\makebox of picture): same as latex2e.texi. @@ -2439,7 +2749,7 @@ (\vector): same as latex2e.texi. Progress further translation to French. -2014-08-17 Vincent Belaïche +2014-08-17 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e.texi: (node Layout) Add @code{...} around \headheight and \footskip in `Page layout parameters' menu entry @@ -2449,7 +2759,7 @@ * latex2e-fr.texi: Same change as in latex2e.texi. Continue progressing translation to French. -2014-08-11 Vincent Belaïche +2014-08-11 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e.texi: Add @code{...} encapsulation in some places to class names letter, slides, book, report, article, and to @@ -2462,23 +2772,23 @@ translation to French. -2014-08-10 Vincent Belaïche +2014-08-10 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e.texi: (Overview) change wording about case sensitivity. - * latex2e-es.texi: (Descripción) same change change as for latex2e.texi about case sensitivity. + * latex2e-es.texi: (Descripción) same change change as for latex2e.texi about case sensitivity. * latex2e-fr.texi: (Overview) same change change as for latex2e.texi about case sensitivity. (Whole document) Put in place same structure as for original and progress translation. -2014-08-01 Vincent Belaïche +2014-08-01 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e-fr.texi: Creation --- still very approximate & preliminary... * Makefile: Make it generic -2014-07-20 Vincent Belaïche +2014-07-20 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e.texi (\LaTeXe), * latex2e-es.texi (\LaTeXe): document LaTeX2e log. @@ -2493,7 +2803,7 @@ (Font styles): mention my disagreement with the oft-stated notion that \tt, et al., are "obsolete". -2014-02-27 Vincent Belaïche +2014-02-27 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e.texi (filecontents): Clarify that LaTeX2e default filecontents environment DOES NOT overwrite existing files, you @@ -2501,12 +2811,12 @@ * latex2e-es.texi (filecontents): Align on the English version. -2014-02-26 Vincent Belaïche +2014-02-26 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e-es.texi: Align Spanish translation with changes made by Karl on 2014-02-23, and also some changes done before that. -2014-02-25 Vincent Belaïche +2014-02-25 Vincent Belaïche * latex2e.texi: Correct typo, rm duplicate 2014 in copyright notice. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/Makefile b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/Makefile index 3fc87677a3f..9eaf220b9ce 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/Makefile +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/Makefile @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -# $Id: Makefile 614 2018-03-28 22:21:21Z karl $ +# $Id: Makefile 617 2018-04-30 14:16:52Z jimhefferon $ # Public domain. Originally written 2006, Karl Berry. # Makefile for latexrefman. @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ dist: en es zip -q $(dist) \ $(addprefix latex2e-help-texinfo/, $(txt_files) \ latex2e.texi common.texi $(en_mi_output) latex2e.pdf) \ -$(addprefix latex2e-help-texinfo/spanish/, $(es_mi_output)) \ +$(addprefix latex2e-help-texinfo/spanish/, $(es_mi_output) latex2e-es.pdf) \ $(addprefix latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e-figures/, $(figure_files)) \ $(addprefix latex2e-help-texinfo/graphics/, README $(figure_source_files)) rm -rf latex2e-help-texinfo diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/NEWS b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/NEWS index 00ba42c167a..dc994adf263 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/NEWS +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/NEWS @@ -4,6 +4,25 @@ Public domain. Originally written 1995, Torsten Martinsen. Spanish translation originally from Nacho Pacheco (currently unmaintained). French translation originally from Vincent Belaiche. +Changes in July 2018 release: + +We have gone through the two documents latex-info and +latex2e-reference and checked that any information in those documents +is in this one. + +There have also been other changes, including switching to a single +unified index, a more uniform entry format, and many more examples and +error messages. There are a number of entirely new entries such as +ones on \strut, caligraphic math fonts, \boldmath, and blackboard +bold. There have also been adjustments to the organization such as +having separate sections for \part, \chapter, etc., and some +combinations such as that of \clearpage and \cleardoublepage. + +In addition, there were many bug fixes, including greatly shrinking +the size of one of the graphics. + +---------------------------------------------------------------- + Changes in April 2018 release: There is a new chapter on color and a new chapter on graphics @@ -12,6 +31,7 @@ there is much greater coverage of the list environment including a diagram of the parameters, and a description of the tabbing environment. + ---------------------------------------------------------------- Changes in Aug 2017 release: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/aspell.en.pws b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/aspell.en.pws index 52d57cdf298..de3448bc46e 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/aspell.en.pws +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/aspell.en.pws @@ -1,54 +1,176 @@ personal_ws-1.1 en 0 +AAF +ArtBox Avant +BD +BES +BESU Biemesderfer +BleedBox Botway +CTAN's +CropBox +EE +EF EnvIndex +FC Garde +Halmos Kleene LAH Lappish Martinsen +MediaBox +NeedsAMSSymb +NeedsSTIX +NotInPlainTeX +O'Brian Overstrike +PkgIndex +Supremum +TrimBox ae +afterskip arabic aring +arrayrulewidth +arraystrech ary +baselinestretch +bb +bbllx +bblly +bburx +bbury +beforeskip +beginparpenalty +bigfoot +bigski +bigskip +bigskipamount +bm bowtie bp +builtin +cdots cmd +columnsep +columnseprule +columnwidth coproduct +cosecant cp +cprotect +datetime +dblfloatpagefraction +dcolumn +ddagger +ddots del +delim +doublerulesep +doublestruck dvi dvitype eg ek +endparpenalty eng +enumi +enumii +enumiii +enumiv env +envlab +errorstop +errorstopmode eth +evensidemargin executivepaper f's +fbox +fboxrule fd fleqn +floatpagefraction fn fnsymbol +fontencoding +fontfamily +fontseries +fontshape +footmisc +footnoterule +footnotesep +footskip greek hacek +headheight +headsep +hiresbb +homomorphism hungarian +idx +ifstar +indentfirst indexspace +infinum intercolumn +itemindent +itempenalty +itemsep lR +labelenumi +labelenumii +labelenumiii +labelenumiv +labelitemi +labelitemii +labelitemiii +labelitemiv +labelsep +labelwidth +ldots leadsto +leftmargin +leftmargini +leftmarginii +leftmarginiii +leftmarginiv +leftmarginv +leftmarginvi legalpaper +lethead +letheadflag letterpaper lhd +linespread +listparindent +lr lrbox lunate +makeidx +makelabel +marginparpush +marginparsep +marginparwidth +marginsep +medskipamount +medspace +mfirstuc +mhchem mho +mistyped mpfootnote +multind multiset +mx +natheight +natwidth +negthinspace niques notitlepage +oddsidemargin oe onecolumn oo @@ -56,62 +178,77 @@ openany openbib openright oslash +outdent overbar overdot +overlines +overlining +pagebox pagebreak pagestyle +paperheight +paperwidth +parsep +partopsep +pict +pixelation printindex ptr +radians +rescale revemptyset rhd +rightmargin secnumdepth +selectfont +setspace +showidx +smallskip +smallskipamount sp sqsubset sqsupset +startsection +subitem +subitems +subregion superscripted +tabcolsep teck tecks +texi texinfo +textcase +textheight textstyle th +thickspace titlepage +tocbibbind +tocdepth +tocloft topmargin +topsep +topskip +totalheght +totalheight twocolumn twoside +ulem underbar +underbrace +unlabelled unlhd unrhd upharpoonright +usefont usrguide varnothing +vdots +verbatimbox vert xdv xelatex +xindy xyz zet -ddagger -footmisc -setspace -showidx -makeidx -multind -datetime -PkgIndex -afterskip -beforeskip -ifstar -textcase -startsection -mfirstuc -texi -outdent -ArtBox -BleedBox -builtin -CropBox -MediaBox -pixelation -radians -rescale -subregion -TrimBox diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/common.texi b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/common.texi index 4f18915713e..dc17efa9d3d 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/common.texi +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/common.texi @@ -1,4 +1,6 @@ -@set LTXREFMAN_HOME_PAGE http://puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman/ +@c $Id$ +@c Public domain. +@set LTXREFMAN_HOME_PAGE puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman @set LTXREFMAN_BUGS latexrefman@@tug.org @clear HAS-MATH @iftex diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/graphics/README b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/graphics/README index 54e67b5b464..bff28795fe2 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/graphics/README +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/graphics/README @@ -1,4 +1,8 @@ This directory contains the source for the graphics used in the document. -Note that different TeXinfo output formats require different graphic -formats. In particular, one such format is .txt. Those graphics are -stored with their matching ones in .pdf or .png or .eps. \ No newline at end of file + +The asy/ directory contains the source for graphics produced with +Asymptote. + +TeXinfo wants the graphics in ../latex2e-figures/. Note that +different TeXinfo output formats require different graphic formats. + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/graphics/asy/list.asy b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/graphics/asy/list.asy index c9d58d73bf8..1a6c5fdb395 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/graphics/asy/list.asy +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/graphics/asy/list.asy @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ import settings; -settings.outformat="pdf"; +// settings.outformat="pdf"; unitsize(1pt); diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e-figures/list.eps b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e-figures/list.eps new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..17cea74f45e --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e-figures/list.eps @@ -0,0 +1,1302 @@ +%!PS-Adobe-3.0 EPSF-3.0 +%%Creator: dvips(k) 5.995 Copyright 2015 Radical Eye Software +%%Title: list_.dvi +%%CreationDate: Fri Jun 8 10:35:27 2018 +%%Pages: 1 +%%PageOrder: Ascend +%%BoundingBox: 189 310 422 481 +%%HiResBoundingBox: 189.816995 310.126502 421.183005 480.873498 +%%DocumentFonts: CMTI7 CMMI8 CMR6 +%%EndComments +%DVIPSWebPage: (www.radicaleye.com) +%DVIPSCommandLine: dvips -R -Pdownload35 -D600 -O61.417bp,185.327bp +%+ -T612bp,792bp -tletterSize -q -olist_.ps list_.dvi +%DVIPSParameters: dpi=600 +%DVIPSSource: TeX output 2018.06.08:1035 +%%BeginProcSet: tex.pro 0 0 +%! +/TeXDict 300 dict def TeXDict begin/N{def}def/B{bind def}N/S{exch}N/X{S +N}B/A{dup}B/TR{translate}N/isls false N/vsize 11 72 mul N/hsize 8.5 72 +mul N/landplus90{false}def/@rigin{isls{[0 landplus90{1 -1}{-1 1}ifelse 0 +0 0]concat}if 72 Resolution div 72 VResolution div neg scale isls{ +landplus90{VResolution 72 div vsize mul 0 exch}{Resolution -72 div hsize +mul 0}ifelse TR}if Resolution VResolution vsize -72 div 1 add mul TR[ +matrix currentmatrix{A A round sub abs 0.00001 lt{round}if}forall round +exch round exch]setmatrix}N/@landscape{/isls true N}B/@manualfeed{ +statusdict/manualfeed true put}B/@copies{/#copies X}B/FMat[1 0 0 -1 0 0] +N/FBB[0 0 0 0]N/nn 0 N/IEn 0 N/ctr 0 N/df-tail{/nn 8 dict N nn begin +/FontType 3 N/FontMatrix fntrx N/FontBBox FBB N string/base X array +/BitMaps X/BuildChar{CharBuilder}N/Encoding IEn N end A{/foo setfont}2 +array copy cvx N load 0 nn put/ctr 0 N[}B/sf 0 N/df{/sf 1 N/fntrx FMat N +df-tail}B/dfs{div/sf X/fntrx[sf 0 0 sf neg 0 0]N df-tail}B/E{pop nn A +definefont setfont}B/Cw{Cd A length 5 sub get}B/Ch{Cd A length 4 sub get +}B/Cx{128 Cd A length 3 sub get sub}B/Cy{Cd A length 2 sub get 127 sub} +B/Cdx{Cd A length 1 sub get}B/Ci{Cd A type/stringtype ne{ctr get/ctr ctr +1 add N}if}B/CharBuilder{save 3 1 roll S A/base get 2 index get S +/BitMaps get S get/Cd X pop/ctr 0 N Cdx 0 Cx Cy Ch sub Cx Cw add Cy +setcachedevice Cw Ch true[1 0 0 -1 -.1 Cx sub Cy .1 sub]{Ci}imagemask +restore}B/D{/cc X A type/stringtype ne{]}if nn/base get cc ctr put nn +/BitMaps get S ctr S sf 1 ne{A A length 1 sub A 2 index S get sf div put +}if put/ctr ctr 1 add N}B/I{cc 1 add D}B/bop{userdict/bop-hook known{ +bop-hook}if/SI save N @rigin 0 0 moveto/V matrix currentmatrix A 1 get A +mul exch 0 get A mul add .99 lt{/QV}{/RV}ifelse load def pop pop}N/eop{ +SI restore userdict/eop-hook known{eop-hook}if showpage}N/@start{ +userdict/start-hook known{start-hook}if pop/VResolution X/Resolution X +1000 div/DVImag X/IEn 256 array N 2 string 0 1 255{IEn S A 360 add 36 4 +index cvrs cvn put}for pop 65781.76 div/vsize X 65781.76 div/hsize X}N +/dir 0 def/dyy{/dir 0 def}B/dyt{/dir 1 def}B/dty{/dir 2 def}B/dtt{/dir 3 +def}B/p{dir 2 eq{-90 rotate show 90 rotate}{dir 3 eq{-90 rotate show 90 +rotate}{show}ifelse}ifelse}N/RMat[1 0 0 -1 0 0]N/BDot 260 string N/Rx 0 +N/Ry 0 N/V{}B/RV/v{/Ry X/Rx X V}B statusdict begin/product where{pop +false[(Display)(NeXT)(LaserWriter 16/600)]{A length product length le{A +length product exch 0 exch getinterval eq{pop true exit}if}{pop}ifelse} +forall}{false}ifelse end{{gsave TR -.1 .1 TR 1 1 scale Rx Ry false RMat{ +BDot}imagemask grestore}}{{gsave TR -.1 .1 TR Rx Ry scale 1 1 false RMat +{BDot}imagemask grestore}}ifelse B/QV{gsave newpath transform round exch +round exch itransform moveto Rx 0 rlineto 0 Ry neg rlineto Rx neg 0 +rlineto fill grestore}B/a{moveto}B/delta 0 N/tail{A/delta X 0 rmoveto}B +/M{S p delta add tail}B/b{S p tail}B/c{-4 M}B/d{-3 M}B/e{-2 M}B/f{-1 M} +B/g{0 M}B/h{1 M}B/i{2 M}B/j{3 M}B/k{4 M}B/w{0 rmoveto}B/l{p -4 w}B/m{p +-3 w}B/n{p -2 w}B/o{p -1 w}B/q{p 1 w}B/r{p 2 w}B/s{p 3 w}B/t{p 4 w}B/x{ +0 S rmoveto}B/y{3 2 roll p a}B/bos{/SS save N}B/eos{SS restore}B end + +%%EndProcSet +%%BeginProcSet: texps.pro 0 0 +%! +TeXDict begin/rf{findfont dup length 1 add dict begin{1 index/FID ne 2 +index/UniqueID ne and{def}{pop pop}ifelse}forall[1 index 0 6 -1 roll +exec 0 exch 5 -1 roll VResolution Resolution div mul neg 0 0]FontType 0 +ne{/Metrics exch def dict begin Encoding{exch dup type/integertype ne{ +pop pop 1 sub dup 0 le{pop}{[}ifelse}{FontMatrix 0 get div Metrics 0 get +div def}ifelse}forall Metrics/Metrics currentdict end def}{{1 index type +/nametype eq{exit}if exch pop}loop}ifelse[2 index currentdict end +definefont 3 -1 roll makefont/setfont cvx]cvx def}def/ObliqueSlant{dup +sin S cos div neg}B/SlantFont{4 index mul add}def/ExtendFont{3 -1 roll +mul exch}def/ReEncodeFont{CharStrings rcheck{/Encoding false def dup[ +exch{dup CharStrings exch known not{pop/.notdef/Encoding true def}if} +forall Encoding{]exch pop}{cleartomark}ifelse}if/Encoding exch def}def +end + +%%EndProcSet +%%BeginProcSet: special.pro 0 0 +%! +TeXDict begin/SDict 200 dict N SDict begin/@SpecialDefaults{/hs 612 N +/vs 792 N/ho 0 N/vo 0 N/hsc 1 N/vsc 1 N/ang 0 N/CLIP 0 N/rwiSeen false N +/rhiSeen false N/letter{}N/note{}N/a4{}N/legal{}N}B/@scaleunit 100 N +/@hscale{@scaleunit div/hsc X}B/@vscale{@scaleunit div/vsc X}B/@hsize{ +/hs X/CLIP 1 N}B/@vsize{/vs X/CLIP 1 N}B/@clip{/CLIP 2 N}B/@hoffset{/ho +X}B/@voffset{/vo X}B/@angle{/ang X}B/@rwi{10 div/rwi X/rwiSeen true N}B +/@rhi{10 div/rhi X/rhiSeen true N}B/@llx{/llx X}B/@lly{/lly X}B/@urx{ +/urx X}B/@ury{/ury X}B/magscale true def end/@MacSetUp{userdict/md known +{userdict/md get type/dicttype eq{userdict begin md length 10 add md +maxlength ge{/md md dup length 20 add dict copy def}if end md begin +/letter{}N/note{}N/legal{}N/od{txpose 1 0 mtx defaultmatrix dtransform S +atan/pa X newpath clippath mark{transform{itransform moveto}}{transform{ +itransform lineto}}{6 -2 roll transform 6 -2 roll transform 6 -2 roll +transform{itransform 6 2 roll itransform 6 2 roll itransform 6 2 roll +curveto}}{{closepath}}pathforall newpath counttomark array astore/gc xdf +pop ct 39 0 put 10 fz 0 fs 2 F/|______Courier fnt invertflag{PaintBlack} +if}N/txpose{pxs pys scale ppr aload pop por{noflips{pop S neg S TR pop 1 +-1 scale}if xflip yflip and{pop S neg S TR 180 rotate 1 -1 scale ppr 3 +get ppr 1 get neg sub neg ppr 2 get ppr 0 get neg sub neg TR}if xflip +yflip not and{pop S neg S TR pop 180 rotate ppr 3 get ppr 1 get neg sub +neg 0 TR}if yflip xflip not and{ppr 1 get neg ppr 0 get neg TR}if}{ +noflips{TR pop pop 270 rotate 1 -1 scale}if xflip yflip and{TR pop pop +90 rotate 1 -1 scale ppr 3 get ppr 1 get neg sub neg ppr 2 get ppr 0 get +neg sub neg TR}if xflip yflip not and{TR pop pop 90 rotate ppr 3 get ppr +1 get neg sub neg 0 TR}if yflip xflip not and{TR pop pop 270 rotate ppr +2 get ppr 0 get neg sub neg 0 S TR}if}ifelse scaleby96{ppr aload pop 4 +-1 roll add 2 div 3 1 roll add 2 div 2 copy TR .96 dup scale neg S neg S +TR}if}N/cp{pop pop showpage pm restore}N end}if}if}N/normalscale{ +Resolution 72 div VResolution 72 div neg scale magscale{DVImag dup scale +}if 0 setgray}N/@beginspecial{SDict begin/SpecialSave save N gsave +normalscale currentpoint TR @SpecialDefaults count/ocount X/dcount +countdictstack N}N/@setspecial{CLIP 1 eq{newpath 0 0 moveto hs 0 rlineto +0 vs rlineto hs neg 0 rlineto closepath clip}if ho vo TR hsc vsc scale +ang rotate rwiSeen{rwi urx llx sub div rhiSeen{rhi ury lly sub div}{dup} +ifelse scale llx neg lly neg TR}{rhiSeen{rhi ury lly sub div dup scale +llx neg lly neg TR}if}ifelse CLIP 2 eq{newpath llx lly moveto urx lly +lineto urx ury lineto llx ury lineto closepath clip}if/showpage{}N +/erasepage{}N/setpagedevice{pop}N/copypage{}N newpath}N/@endspecial{ +count ocount sub{pop}repeat countdictstack dcount sub{end}repeat +grestore SpecialSave restore end}N/@defspecial{SDict begin}N +/@fedspecial{end}B/li{lineto}B/rl{rlineto}B/rc{rcurveto}B/np{/SaveX +currentpoint/SaveY X N 1 setlinecap newpath}N/st{stroke SaveX SaveY +moveto}N/fil{fill SaveX SaveY moveto}N/ellipse{/endangle X/startangle X +/yrad X/xrad X/savematrix matrix currentmatrix N TR xrad yrad scale 0 0 +1 startangle endangle arc savematrix setmatrix}N end + +%%EndProcSet +%%BeginProcSet: color.pro 0 0 +%! +TeXDict begin/setcmykcolor where{pop}{/setcmykcolor{dup 10 eq{pop +setrgbcolor}{1 sub 4 1 roll 3{3 index add neg dup 0 lt{pop 0}if 3 1 roll +}repeat setrgbcolor pop}ifelse}B}ifelse/TeXcolorcmyk{setcmykcolor}def +/TeXcolorrgb{setrgbcolor}def/TeXcolorgrey{setgray}def/TeXcolorgray{ +setgray}def/TeXcolorhsb{sethsbcolor}def/currentcmykcolor where{pop}{ +/currentcmykcolor{currentrgbcolor 10}B}ifelse/DC{exch dup userdict exch +known{pop pop}{X}ifelse}B/GreenYellow{0.15 0 0.69 0 setcmykcolor}DC +/Yellow{0 0 1 0 setcmykcolor}DC/Goldenrod{0 0.10 0.84 0 setcmykcolor}DC +/Dandelion{0 0.29 0.84 0 setcmykcolor}DC/Apricot{0 0.32 0.52 0 +setcmykcolor}DC/Peach{0 0.50 0.70 0 setcmykcolor}DC/Melon{0 0.46 0.50 0 +setcmykcolor}DC/YellowOrange{0 0.42 1 0 setcmykcolor}DC/Orange{0 0.61 +0.87 0 setcmykcolor}DC/BurntOrange{0 0.51 1 0 setcmykcolor}DC +/Bittersweet{0 0.75 1 0.24 setcmykcolor}DC/RedOrange{0 0.77 0.87 0 +setcmykcolor}DC/Mahogany{0 0.85 0.87 0.35 setcmykcolor}DC/Maroon{0 0.87 +0.68 0.32 setcmykcolor}DC/BrickRed{0 0.89 0.94 0.28 setcmykcolor}DC/Red{ +0 1 1 0 setcmykcolor}DC/OrangeRed{0 1 0.50 0 setcmykcolor}DC/RubineRed{ +0 1 0.13 0 setcmykcolor}DC/WildStrawberry{0 0.96 0.39 0 setcmykcolor}DC +/Salmon{0 0.53 0.38 0 setcmykcolor}DC/CarnationPink{0 0.63 0 0 +setcmykcolor}DC/Magenta{0 1 0 0 setcmykcolor}DC/VioletRed{0 0.81 0 0 +setcmykcolor}DC/Rhodamine{0 0.82 0 0 setcmykcolor}DC/Mulberry{0.34 0.90 +0 0.02 setcmykcolor}DC/RedViolet{0.07 0.90 0 0.34 setcmykcolor}DC +/Fuchsia{0.47 0.91 0 0.08 setcmykcolor}DC/Lavender{0 0.48 0 0 +setcmykcolor}DC/Thistle{0.12 0.59 0 0 setcmykcolor}DC/Orchid{0.32 0.64 0 +0 setcmykcolor}DC/DarkOrchid{0.40 0.80 0.20 0 setcmykcolor}DC/Purple{ +0.45 0.86 0 0 setcmykcolor}DC/Plum{0.50 1 0 0 setcmykcolor}DC/Violet{ +0.79 0.88 0 0 setcmykcolor}DC/RoyalPurple{0.75 0.90 0 0 setcmykcolor}DC +/BlueViolet{0.86 0.91 0 0.04 setcmykcolor}DC/Periwinkle{0.57 0.55 0 0 +setcmykcolor}DC/CadetBlue{0.62 0.57 0.23 0 setcmykcolor}DC +/CornflowerBlue{0.65 0.13 0 0 setcmykcolor}DC/MidnightBlue{0.98 0.13 0 +0.43 setcmykcolor}DC/NavyBlue{0.94 0.54 0 0 setcmykcolor}DC/RoyalBlue{1 +0.50 0 0 setcmykcolor}DC/Blue{1 1 0 0 setcmykcolor}DC/Cerulean{0.94 0.11 +0 0 setcmykcolor}DC/Cyan{1 0 0 0 setcmykcolor}DC/ProcessBlue{0.96 0 0 0 +setcmykcolor}DC/SkyBlue{0.62 0 0.12 0 setcmykcolor}DC/Turquoise{0.85 0 +0.20 0 setcmykcolor}DC/TealBlue{0.86 0 0.34 0.02 setcmykcolor}DC +/Aquamarine{0.82 0 0.30 0 setcmykcolor}DC/BlueGreen{0.85 0 0.33 0 +setcmykcolor}DC/Emerald{1 0 0.50 0 setcmykcolor}DC/JungleGreen{0.99 0 +0.52 0 setcmykcolor}DC/SeaGreen{0.69 0 0.50 0 setcmykcolor}DC/Green{1 0 +1 0 setcmykcolor}DC/ForestGreen{0.91 0 0.88 0.12 setcmykcolor}DC +/PineGreen{0.92 0 0.59 0.25 setcmykcolor}DC/LimeGreen{0.50 0 1 0 +setcmykcolor}DC/YellowGreen{0.44 0 0.74 0 setcmykcolor}DC/SpringGreen{ +0.26 0 0.76 0 setcmykcolor}DC/OliveGreen{0.64 0 0.95 0.40 setcmykcolor} +DC/RawSienna{0 0.72 1 0.45 setcmykcolor}DC/Sepia{0 0.83 1 0.70 +setcmykcolor}DC/Brown{0 0.81 1 0.60 setcmykcolor}DC/Tan{0.14 0.42 0.56 0 +setcmykcolor}DC/Gray{0 0 0 0.50 setcmykcolor}DC/Black{0 0 0 1 +setcmykcolor}DC/White{0 0 0 0 setcmykcolor}DC end + +%%EndProcSet +%%BeginFont: CMR6 +%!PS-AdobeFont-1.0: CMR6 003.002 +%%Title: CMR6 +%Version: 003.002 +%%CreationDate: Mon Jul 13 16:17:00 2009 +%%Creator: David M. Jones +%Copyright: Copyright (c) 1997, 2009 American Mathematical Society +%Copyright: (), with Reserved Font Name CMR6. +% This Font Software is licensed under the SIL Open Font License, Version 1.1. +% This license is in the accompanying file OFL.txt, and is also +% available with a FAQ at: http://scripts.sil.org/OFL. +%%EndComments +FontDirectory/CMR6 known{/CMR6 findfont dup/UniqueID known{dup +/UniqueID get 5000789 eq exch/FontType get 1 eq and}{pop false}ifelse +{save true}{false}ifelse}{false}ifelse +11 dict begin +/FontType 1 def +/FontMatrix [0.001 0 0 0.001 0 0 ]readonly def +/FontName /CMR6 def +/FontBBox {-20 -250 1193 750 }readonly def +/PaintType 0 def +/FontInfo 9 dict dup begin +/version (003.002) readonly def +/Notice (Copyright \050c\051 1997, 2009 American Mathematical Society \050\051, with Reserved Font Name CMR6.) readonly def +/FullName (CMR6) readonly def +/FamilyName (Computer Modern) readonly def +/Weight (Medium) readonly def +/ItalicAngle 0 def +/isFixedPitch false def +/UnderlinePosition -100 def +/UnderlineThickness 50 def +end readonly def +/Encoding 256 array +0 1 255 {1 index exch /.notdef put} for +dup 48 /zero put +dup 49 /one put +dup 50 /two put +dup 51 /three put +dup 52 /four put +dup 53 /five put +readonly def +currentdict end +currentfile eexec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cleartomark +{restore}if +%%EndFont +%%BeginFont: CMMI8 +%!PS-AdobeFont-1.0: CMMI8 003.002 +%%Title: CMMI8 +%Version: 003.002 +%%CreationDate: Mon Jul 13 16:17:00 2009 +%%Creator: David M. Jones +%Copyright: Copyright (c) 1997, 2009 American Mathematical Society +%Copyright: (), with Reserved Font Name CMMI8. +% This Font Software is licensed under the SIL Open Font License, Version 1.1. +% This license is in the accompanying file OFL.txt, and is also +% available with a FAQ at: http://scripts.sil.org/OFL. +%%EndComments +FontDirectory/CMMI8 known{/CMMI8 findfont dup/UniqueID known{dup +/UniqueID get 5087383 eq exch/FontType get 1 eq and}{pop false}ifelse +{save true}{false}ifelse}{false}ifelse +11 dict begin +/FontType 1 def +/FontMatrix [0.001 0 0 0.001 0 0 ]readonly def +/FontName /CMMI8 def +/FontBBox {-24 -250 1110 750 }readonly def +/PaintType 0 def +/FontInfo 10 dict dup begin +/version (003.002) readonly def +/Notice (Copyright \050c\051 1997, 2009 American Mathematical Society \050\051, with Reserved Font Name CMMI8.) readonly def +/FullName (CMMI8) readonly def +/FamilyName (Computer Modern) readonly def +/Weight (Medium) readonly def +/ItalicAngle -14.04 def +/isFixedPitch false def +/UnderlinePosition -100 def +/UnderlineThickness 50 def +/ascent 750 def +end readonly def +/Encoding 256 array +0 1 255 {1 index exch /.notdef put} for +dup 104 /h put +dup 118 /v put +readonly def +currentdict end +currentfile eexec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cleartomark +{restore}if +%%EndFont +%%BeginFont: CMTI7 +%!PS-AdobeFont-1.0: CMTI7 003.002 +%%Title: CMTI7 +%Version: 003.002 +%%CreationDate: Mon Jul 13 16:17:00 2009 +%%Creator: David M. Jones +%Copyright: Copyright (c) 1997, 2009 American Mathematical Society +%Copyright: (), with Reserved Font Name CMTI7. +% This Font Software is licensed under the SIL Open Font License, Version 1.1. +% This license is in the accompanying file OFL.txt, and is also +% available with a FAQ at: http://scripts.sil.org/OFL. +%%EndComments +FontDirectory/CMTI7 known{/CMTI7 findfont dup/UniqueID known{dup +/UniqueID get 5000825 eq exch/FontType get 1 eq and}{pop false}ifelse +{save true}{false}ifelse}{false}ifelse +11 dict begin +/FontType 1 def +/FontMatrix [0.001 0 0 0.001 0 0 ]readonly def +/FontName /CMTI7 def +/FontBBox {-27 -250 1268 750 }readonly def +/PaintType 0 def +/FontInfo 9 dict dup begin +/version (003.002) readonly def +/Notice (Copyright \050c\051 1997, 2009 American Mathematical Society \050\051, with Reserved Font Name CMTI7.) readonly def +/FullName (CMTI7) readonly def +/FamilyName (Computer Modern) readonly def +/Weight (Medium) readonly def +/ItalicAngle -14.04 def +/isFixedPitch false def +/UnderlinePosition -100 def +/UnderlineThickness 50 def +end readonly def +/Encoding 256 array +0 1 255 {1 index exch /.notdef put} for +dup 44 /comma put +dup 70 /F put +dup 76 /L put +dup 83 /S put +dup 97 /a put +dup 98 /b put +dup 99 /c put +dup 100 /d put +dup 101 /e put +dup 102 /f put +dup 103 /g put +dup 104 /h put +dup 105 /i put +dup 108 /l put +dup 109 /m put +dup 110 /n put +dup 111 /o put +dup 112 /p put +dup 114 /r put +dup 115 /s put +dup 116 /t put +dup 117 /u put +dup 118 /v put +dup 119 /w put +readonly def +currentdict end +currentfile eexec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cleartomark +{restore}if +%%EndFont +TeXDict begin 40258584 52099344 1000 600 600 (list_.dvi) +@start /Fa 202[30 30 30 30 30 30 48[{}6 49.8132 /CMR6 +rf /Fb 137[34 13[41 104[{}2 66.4176 /CMMI8 rf /Fc 136[45 +32 37 23 28 29 1[35 35 38 56 18 2[21 35 32 21 32 35 32 +32 35 13[38 6[43 5[44 25[21 44[{}24 58.1154 /CMTI7 rf +end +%%EndProlog +%%BeginSetup +%%Feature: *Resolution 600dpi +TeXDict begin +%%BeginPaperSize: Letter +/setpagedevice where +{ pop << /PageSize [612 792] >> setpagedevice } +{ /letter where { pop letter } if } +ifelse +%%EndPaperSize + end +%%EndSetup +%%Page: 1 1 +TeXDict begin 1 0 bop Black Black 982 3416 a @beginspecial +6.810139 @llx -166.761932 @lly 238.176147 @urx 3.985056 +@ury 2313 @rwi @setspecial +%%BeginDocument: list_0.eps +%!PS-Adobe-3.0 EPSF-3.0 +%%BoundingBox: 6 -167 239 4 +%%HiResBoundingBox: 6.81013865 -166.76194 238.176148 3.98505604 +%%Creator: Asymptote 2.372.37 +%%CreationDate: 2018.06.08 10:35:27 +%%Pages: 1 +%%Page: 1 1 +/Setlinewidth {0 exch dtransform dup abs 1 lt {pop 0}{round} ifelse +idtransform setlinewidth pop} bind def +newpath 7.06013865 0 moveto + 218.864298 0 lineto +0.5 .setopacityalpha +0.75 setgray +7.97011208 Setlinewidth +0 setlinecap +1 setlinejoin +10 setmiterlimit +stroke +newpath 7.06013865 -11.9105037 moveto + 218.864298 -11.9105037 lineto +stroke +newpath 13.0153905 -37.7165951 moveto + 42.7916498 -37.7165951 lineto +stroke +newpath 47.7543597 -37.7165951 moveto + 203.976169 -37.7165951 lineto +stroke +newpath 31.8736881 -49.6270989 moveto + 203.976169 -49.6270989 lineto +stroke +newpath 31.8736881 -61.5376026 moveto + 203.976169 -61.5376026 lineto +stroke +newpath 36.836398 -77.4182742 moveto + 203.976169 -77.4182742 lineto +stroke +newpath 13.0153905 -101.239282 moveto + 42.7916498 -101.239282 lineto +stroke +newpath 47.7543597 -101.239282 moveto + 203.976169 -101.239282 lineto +stroke +newpath 31.8736881 -113.149785 moveto + 203.976169 -113.149785 lineto +stroke +newpath 31.8736881 -125.060289 moveto + 203.976169 -125.060289 lineto +stroke +newpath 7.06013865 -150.866381 moveto + 218.864298 -150.866381 lineto +stroke +newpath 7.06013865 -162.776884 moveto + 218.864298 -162.776884 lineto +stroke +newpath 224.81955 -33.7464272 moveto + 221.06955 -33.7464272 lineto +1 .setopacityalpha +1 0 0 setrgbcolor +0.5 Setlinewidth +1 setlinecap +stroke +newpath 224.81955 -15.8806716 moveto + 221.06955 -15.8806716 lineto +stroke +newpath 224.81955 -33.7464272 moveto + 224.81955 -15.8806716 lineto +stroke +newpath 224.81955 -73.4481063 moveto + 221.06955 -73.4481063 lineto +stroke +newpath 224.81955 -65.5077705 moveto + 221.06955 -65.5077705 lineto +stroke +newpath 224.81955 -73.4481063 moveto + 224.81955 -65.5077705 lineto +stroke +newpath 224.81955 -97.2691138 moveto + 221.06955 -97.2691138 lineto +stroke +newpath 224.81955 -81.3884422 moveto + 221.06955 -81.3884422 lineto +stroke +newpath 224.81955 -97.2691138 moveto + 224.81955 -81.3884422 lineto +stroke +newpath 224.81955 -146.896213 moveto + 221.06955 -146.896213 lineto +stroke +newpath 224.81955 -129.030457 moveto + 221.06955 -129.030457 lineto +stroke +newpath 224.81955 -146.896213 moveto + 224.81955 -129.030457 lineto +stroke +newpath 42.7916498 -30.7688013 moveto + 42.7916498 -34.5188013 lineto +0 0 1 setrgbcolor +stroke +newpath 13.0153905 -30.7688013 moveto + 13.0153905 -34.5188013 lineto +stroke +newpath 42.7916498 -30.7688013 moveto + 13.0153905 -30.7688013 lineto +stroke +newpath 47.7543597 -30.7688013 moveto + 47.7543597 -34.5188013 lineto +stroke +newpath 42.7916498 -30.7688013 moveto + 42.7916498 -34.5188013 lineto +stroke +newpath 47.7543597 -30.7688013 moveto + 42.7916498 -30.7688013 lineto +stroke +newpath 31.8736881 -84.3660681 moveto + 31.8736881 -80.6160681 lineto +stroke +newpath 36.836398 -84.3660681 moveto + 36.836398 -80.6160681 lineto +stroke +newpath 31.8736881 -84.3660681 moveto + 36.836398 -84.3660681 lineto +stroke +newpath 7.06013865 -132.008083 moveto + 7.06013865 -128.258083 lineto +stroke +newpath 31.8736881 -132.008083 moveto + 31.8736881 -128.258083 lineto +stroke +newpath 7.06013865 -132.008083 moveto + 31.8736881 -132.008083 lineto +stroke +newpath 31.8736881 -132.008083 moveto + 31.8736881 -128.258083 lineto +stroke +newpath 47.7543597 -132.008083 moveto + 47.7543597 -128.258083 lineto +stroke +newpath 31.8736881 -132.008083 moveto + 47.7543597 -132.008083 lineto +stroke +newpath 203.976169 -132.008083 moveto + 203.976169 -128.258083 lineto +stroke +newpath 218.864298 -132.008083 moveto + 218.864298 -128.258083 lineto +stroke +newpath 203.976169 -132.008083 moveto + 218.864298 -132.008083 lineto +stroke +showpage +%%EOF + +%%EndDocument + @endspecial 0.000000 TeXcolorgray 1189 2140 a Fc(Surr)m(ounding)26 +b(envir)m(onment,)f(pr)m(e)m(c)m(e)m(ding)e(material)p +0.000000 TeXcolorgray 1082 2360 a(L)m(ab)m(el)p 0.000000 +TeXcolorgray 244 w(First)j(item)p 0.000000 TeXcolorgray +1480 2686 a(First)g(item,)f(se)m(c)m(ond)f(p)m(ar)m(agr)m(aph)p +0.000000 TeXcolorgray 1082 2890 a(L)m(ab)m(el)p 0.000000 +TeXcolorgray 244 w(Se)m(c)m(ond)h(item)p 0.000000 TeXcolorgray +1191 3298 a(Surr)m(ounding)h(envir)m(onment,)f(fol)s(lowing)i(material) +p 1.000000 0.000000 0.000000 TeXcolorrgb 2829 2242 a +Fb(v)2863 2251 y Fa(0)p 1.000000 0.000000 0.000000 TeXcolorrgb +2829 2615 a Fb(v)2863 2624 y Fa(1)p 1.000000 0.000000 0.000000 +TeXcolorrgb 2829 2780 a Fb(v)2863 2789 y Fa(2)p +1.000000 0.000000 0.000000 TeXcolorrgb 2829 3185 a Fb(v)2863 +3194 y Fa(3)p 0.000000 0.000000 1.000000 TeXcolorrgb +1120 2243 a Fb(h)1161 2252 y Fa(0)p 0.000000 0.000000 1.000000 +TeXcolorrgb 1265 2243 a Fb(h)1306 2252 y Fa(1)p +0.000000 0.000000 1.000000 TeXcolorrgb 1174 2805 a Fb(h)1215 +2814 y Fa(2)p 0.000000 0.000000 1.000000 TeXcolorrgb +1050 3202 a Fb(h)1091 3211 y Fa(3)p 0.000000 0.000000 1.000000 +TeXcolorrgb 1219 3202 a Fb(h)1260 3211 y Fa(4)p +0.000000 0.000000 1.000000 TeXcolorrgb 2649 3202 a Fb(h)2690 +3211 y Fa(5)p Black 0.000000 0.000000 1.000000 TeXcolorrgb +eop end +%%Trailer + +userdict /end-hook known{end-hook}if +%%EOF diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e-figures/list.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e-figures/list.pdf index 547821f3164..820030a1879 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e-figures/list.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e-figures/list.pdf differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e-figures/list.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e-figures/list.png index 11f297ba98f..4ccda19f806 100644 Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e-figures/list.png and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e-figures/list.png differ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.dbk b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.dbk index e19d3d75c39..bc7c6640517 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.dbk +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.dbk @@ -4,26 +4,35 @@ ]> + + -&latex;2e unofficial reference manual (March 2018) +&latex;2e unofficial reference manual (July 2018) - - - - - + + + + + + + + + + + + @@ -31,7 +40,7 @@ This document is an unofficial reference manual for &latex;, a -document preparation system, version of March 2018. +document preparation system, version of July 2018. This manual was originally translated from LATEX.HLP v1.0a in the VMS Help Library. The pre-translation version was written by @@ -67,10 +76,12 @@ notice identical to this one. into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions. + + This document is an unofficial reference manual for &latex;, a -document preparation system, version of March 2018. +document preparation system, version of July 2018. This manual was originally translated from LATEX.HLP v1.0a in the VMS Help Library. The pre-translation version was written by @@ -115,7 +126,7 @@ into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions. &latex;2e: An unofficial reference manual This document is an unofficial reference manual (version of -March 2018) for &latex;2e, a document preparation system. +July 2018) for &latex;2e, a document preparation system. @@ -123,11 +134,11 @@ March 2018) for &latex;2e, a document preparation system. About this document -http://puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman/ home page +home page for manual This is an unofficial reference manual for the &latex;2e document preparation system, which is a macro package for the &tex; typesetting program (see Overview). This document’s home page is -http://puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman/. That page has links to the +puszcza.gnu.org.ua/software/latexrefman. That page has links to the current output in various formats, sources, mailing list archives and subscriptions, and other infrastructure. @@ -223,17 +234,20 @@ sensible, such as in plain text, write it as ‘LaTeXR hello, world &latex; files have a simple global structure, with a standard beginning -and ending. Here is a “hello, world” example: +and ending. This is a small example. \documentclass{article} \begin{document} Hello, \LaTeX\ world. \end{document} +Every &latex; document has a \begin{document} line and an +\end{document} line. + document class, defined -Here, the ‘article’ is the so-called document class, -implemented in a file article.cls. Any document class can be -used. A few document classes are defined by &latex; itself, and vast +Here, the ‘article’ is the document class. It is implemented +in a file article.cls. You can use any document class on your +system. A few document classes are defined by &latex; itself, and vast array of others are widely available. See Document classes. preamble, defined @@ -241,12 +255,13 @@ array of others are widely available. See Docu \documentclass and the \begin{document} commands. This area is called the preamble. -The \begin{document} ... \end{document} is a so-called +The \begin{document}, \end{document} pair defines an environment environment; the ‘document’ environment (and no others) is -required in all &latex; documents (see document). &latex; -provides many environments itself, and many more are defined separately. -See Environments. +required in all &latex; documents (see document). &latex; make +available to you many environments that are documented here +(see Environments). Many more are available to you from external +packages, most importantly those available at CTAN (see CTAN). The following sections discuss how to produce PDF or other output from a &latex; input file. @@ -256,7 +271,7 @@ a &latex; input file. Output files -&latex; produces a main output file and at least two accessory files. +&latex; produces a main output file and at least two auxiliary files. The main output file’s name ends in either .dvi or .pdf. .dvi @@ -266,7 +281,7 @@ The main output file’s name ends in either .dvi or dvips command dvipdfmx command dvitype command -If &latex; is invoked with the system command latex then it +If &latex; is invoked with the system command latex then it produces a DeVice Independent file, with extension .dvi. You can view this file with a command such as xdvi, or convert it to a PostScript .ps file with dvips or to a @@ -279,7 +294,7 @@ available (http://mirror.ctan.org/dv .pdf file pdf&tex; pdflatex command -If &latex; is invoked via the system command pdflatex, +If &latex; is invoked via the system command pdflatex, among other commands (see &tex; engines), then the main output is a Portable Document Format (PDF) file. Typically this is a self-contained file, with all fonts and images included. @@ -291,7 +306,7 @@ self-contained file, with all fonts and images included. transcript file log file .log file -This transcript file contains summary information such as a list of +This transcript file contains summary information such as a list of loaded packages. It also includes diagnostic messages and perhaps additional information for any errors. @@ -301,7 +316,7 @@ additional information for any errors. cross references, resolving forward references, resolving references, resolving forward -Auxiliary information is used by &latex; for things such as +Auxiliary information is used by &latex; for things such as cross references. For example, the first time that &latex; finds a forward reference—a cross reference to something that has not yet appeared in the source—it will appear in the output as a doubled @@ -321,10 +336,11 @@ location. table of contents file contents file &latex; may produce yet more files, characterized by the filename -ending. These include a .lof file that is used to make a list -of figures, a .lot file used to make a list of tables, and a -.toc file used to make a table of contents. A particular class -may create others; the list is open-ended. +ending. These include a .lof file that is used to make a list of +figures, a .lot file used to make a list of tables, and a +.toc file used to make a table of contents (see Table of +contents etc.). A particular class may create others; the list is +open-ended. @@ -340,14 +356,14 @@ may create others; the list is open-ended. &latex; is defined to be a set of commands that are run by a &tex; implementation (see Overview). This section gives a terse -overview of the main programs. +overview of the main programs (see also Command line). latex pdflatex pdf&tex; engine etex command e-&tex; -In &tex; Live (http://tug.org/texlive), if &latex; is invoked +In &tex; Live (http://tug.org/texlive), if &latex; is invoked via either the system command latex or pdflatex, then the pdf&tex; engine is run (http://ctan.org/pkg/pdftex). When invoked as latex, the main output is a .dvi @@ -367,7 +383,7 @@ assumed to be available in &latex;. lualatex lualatex command Lua&tex; -If &latex; is invoked via the system command lualatex, the +If &latex; is invoked via the system command lualatex, the Lua&tex; engine is run (http://ctan.org/pkg/luatex). This program allows code written in the scripting language Lua (http://luatex.org) to interact with &tex;’s typesetting. @@ -381,7 +397,7 @@ but this is rarely used. Xe&tex; .xdv file xdvipdfmx -If &latex; is invoked with the system command xelatex, the +If &latex; is invoked with the system command xelatex, the Xe&tex; engine is run (http://tug.org/xetex). Like Lua&tex;, Xe&tex; natively supports UTF-8 Unicode and TrueType and OpenType fonts, though the implementation is completely different, mainly using @@ -458,7 +474,7 @@ behavior. For instance, for poetry in &latex; put the lines between ... \end{verse} -See Environments for a list of environments. +See Environments for a list of environments. The environment name at the beginning must exactly match that at the end. This includes the case where environment name ends in a @@ -485,8 +501,8 @@ changes the setting of page numbers from roman numerals to arabic. - -<literal>\makeatletter</literal> and <literal>\makeatother</literal> + +<literal>\makeatletter</literal> & <literal>\makeatother</literal> Synopsis: @@ -531,9 +547,9 @@ have the character code of a letter. in their names see http://ctan.org/pkg/macros2e. These macros are mainly intended to package or class authors. -The example below is typical. In the user’s class file is a command -\thesis@universityname. The user wants to change the -definition. These three lines should go in the preamble, before the +In this example the class file has a command +\thesis@universityname that the user wants to change. These +three lines should go in the preamble, before the \begin{document}. \makeatletter @@ -552,8 +568,8 @@ definition. These three lines should go in the preamble, before the Synopsis: \newcommand{\mycmd}{\@ifstar{\mycmd@star}{\mycmd@nostar}} -\newcommand{\mycmd@nostar}[non-starred command number of args]{body of non-starred command} -\newcommand{\mycmd@star}[starred command number of args]{body of starred command} +\newcommand{\mycmd@nostar}[nostar-num-args]{nostar-body} +\newcommand{\mycmd@star}[star-num-args]{star-body} Many standard &latex; environments or commands have a variant with the same name but ending with a star character *, an asterisk. @@ -573,7 +589,7 @@ are \mycmd@nostar and \mycmd@star. They c same number of arguments or a different number, or no arguments at all. As always, in a &latex; document a command using at-sign @ must be enclosed inside a \makeatletter ... \makeatother block -(see \makeatletter and \makeatother). +(see \makeatletter & \makeatother). This example of \@ifstar defines the command \ciel and a variant \ciel*. Both have one required argument. A call to @@ -585,14 +601,15 @@ variant \ciel*. Both have one required argument. A call to \newcommand*{\ciel}{\@ifstar{\ciel@starred}{\ciel@unstarred}} In the next example, the starred variant takes a different number of -arguments than does the unstarred one. With this definition, Agent -007’s ``My name is \agentsecret*{Bond}, -\agentsecret{James}{Bond}.'' is equivalent to ``My name is -\textsc{Bond}, \textit{James} textsc{Bond}.'' +arguments than the unstarred one. With this definition, Agent 007’s +``My name is \agentsecret*{Bond}, +\agentsecret{James}{Bond}.'' is equivalent to entering the commands +``My name is \textsc{Bond}, \textit{James} textsc{Bond}.'' \newcommand*{\agentsecret@unstarred}[2]{\textit{#1} \textsc{#2}} \newcommand*{\agentsecret@starred}[1]{\textsc{#1}} -\newcommand*{\agentsecret}{\@ifstar{\agentsecret@starred}{\agentsecret@unstarred}} +\newcommand*{\agentsecret}{% + \@ifstar{\agentsecret@starred}{\agentsecret@unstarred}} There are two sometimes more convenient ways to accomplish the work of \@ifstar. The suffix package allows the construct @@ -608,6 +625,39 @@ arguments than does the unstarred one. With this definition, Agent + + +CTAN: Comprehensive &tex; Archive Network + +CTAN + +The Comprehensive &tex; Archive Network, CTAN, is the &tex; and +&latex; community’s repository of free material. It is a set of +Internet sites around the world that offer material related to &latex; +for download. Visit CTAN on the web at https://ctan.org. + +This material is organized into packages, discrete bundles that +typically offer some coherent functionality and are maintained by one +person or a small number of people. For instance, many publishers have +a package that allows authors to format papers to that publisher’s +specifications. + +In addition to the massive holdings, the web site offers features such +as search by name or by functionality. + +DANTE e.V. +mirrors of CTAN +CTAN is not a single site, but instead is a set of sites. One of the +sites is the core. This site actively manages the material, for +instance, by accepting uploads of new or updated packages. It is +hosted by the German &tex; group DANTE e.V. Other sites around the +world help out by mirroring, that is, automatically syncing their +collections with the core site and then in turn making their copies +publicly available. This gives users close to their location better +access and relieves the load on the core site. The list of mirrors is +at https://ctan.org/mirrors. + + @@ -632,23 +682,23 @@ normally the first command in a &latex; source file. see Overview.) article -For a journal article, a presentation, and miscellaneous general use. +For a journal article, a presentation, and miscellaneous general use. book -Full-length books, including chapters and possibly including front +Full-length books, including chapters and possibly including front matter, such as a preface, and back matter, such as an appendix (see Front/back matter). letter -Mail, optionally including mailing labels +Mail, optionally including mailing labels (see Letters). report -For documents of length between an article and a book, +For documents of length between an article and a book, such as technical reports or theses, which may contain several chapters. slides -For slide presentations—rarely used today. In its place the +For slide presentations—rarely used today. In its place the beamer package is perhaps the most prevalent (see beamer template). @@ -665,9 +715,9 @@ template). class options global options -You can specify so-called global options or class options to -the \documentclass command by enclosing them in square brackets. -To specify more than one option, separate them with a comma, as in: +You can specify global options or class options to the +\documentclass command by enclosing them in square brackets. To +specify more than one option, separate them with a comma. \documentclass[option1,option2,...]{class} @@ -854,7 +904,7 @@ SMC Math Department is for a class. Inside of a class or package file you can use the at-sign @ as a character in command names without having to surround the code containing that command with \makeatletter and -\makeatother. See \makeatletter and \makeatother. This allow +\makeatother. See \makeatletter & \makeatother. This allow you to create commands that users will not accidentally redefine. Another technique is to preface class- or package-specific commands with some string to prevent your class or package from interfering with @@ -897,7 +947,6 @@ document font size. most of its work: declaring new variables, commands and fonts, and loading other files. - Here is a starting class file, which should be saved as stub.cls where &latex; can find it, for example in the same directory as the .tex file. @@ -919,6 +968,7 @@ Class Guide, at of the descriptions here derive from this document), or the tutorial https://www.tug.org/TUGboat/tb26-3/tb84heff.pdf. + Class and package commands @@ -1010,10 +1060,10 @@ or \DeclareOption*. package options options, class options, package -Make an option available to a user, for invoking in their +Make an option available to a user to invoke in their \documentclass command. For example, the smcmemo class -could have an option allowing users to put the institutional logo on the -first page with \documentclass[logo]{smcmemo}. The class file +could have an option \documentclass[logo]{smcmemo} allowing +users to put the institutional logo on the first page. The class file must contain \DeclareOption{logo}{code} (and later, \ProcessOptions). @@ -1058,14 +1108,14 @@ command is used within a moving argument, use \newcommand. package, etoolbox etoolbox package - -The etoolbox package offers commands \newrobustcmd, -\newrobustcmd*, \renewrobustcmd, \renewrobustcmd*, -\providerobustcmd, and \providerobustcmd* which are similar -to \newcommand, \newcommand*, \renewcommand, -\renewcommand*, \providecommand, and -\providecommand*, but define a robust cmd with two advantages -as compared to \DeclareRobustCommand: +The etoolbox package offers the commands +\newrobustcmd, \newrobustcmd*, as well as the commands +\renewrobustcmd, \renewrobustcmd*, and the commands +\providerobustcmd, and \providerobustcmd*. These are +similar to \newcommand, \newcommand*, +\renewcommand, \renewcommand*, \providecommand, and +\providecommand*, but define a robust cmd with two +advantages as compared to \DeclareRobustCommand: They use the low-level e-&tex; protection mechanism rather than the higher level &latex; \protect mechanism, so they do not incur the slight loss of performance mentioned above, and @@ -1080,12 +1130,15 @@ commands, so they do not just make a log message when you redefine \InputIfFileExists{file name}{true code}{false code} \IfFileExists \InputIfFileExists -Execute true code if &latex; can find the file file -name and false code otherwise. In the second case it inputs the -file immediately after executing true code. Thus -\IfFileExists{img.pdf}{\includegraphics{img.pdf}}{\typeout{WARNING: -img.pdf not found}} will include the graphic img.pdf if it is -found but otherwise just give a warning. +Execute true code if &latex; finds the file file +name or false code otherwise. In the first case it executing +true code and then inputs the file. Thus the command + +\IfFileExists{img.pdf}{% + \includegraphics{img.pdf}}{\typeout{!! img.pdf not found} + +will include the graphic img.pdf if it is found and otherwise +give a warning. This command looks for the file in all search paths that &latex; uses, not only in the current directory. To look only in the current @@ -1110,12 +1163,14 @@ list]{class name}[release -If you request a release date and the date of -the package installed on your system is earlier, then you get a warning -on the screen and in the log like You have requested, on input -line 4, version `2038/01/19' of document class article, but only version -`2014/09/29 v1.4h Standard LaTeX document class' is available. +If you request a release date and the date of the package +installed on your system is earlier, then you get a warning on the +screen and in the log like this. +You have requested, on input line 4, version `2038/01/19' of +document class article, but only version `2014/09/29 v1.4h +Standard LaTeX document class' is available. + The command version \LoadClassWithOptions uses the list of options for the current class. This means it ignores any options passed to it via \PassOptionsToClass. This is a convenience command @@ -1147,10 +1202,11 @@ like ‘This file needs format `LaTeX2e' but this is `xxx'.format date on which those features were implemented. If present it must be in the form YYYY/MM/DD. If the format version installed on your system is earlier than -format date then you get a warning like ‘You have requested -release `2038/01/20' of LaTeX, but only release `2016/02/01' is -available.’ +format date then you get a warning like this. +You have requested release `2038/01/20' of LaTeX, but only +release `2016/02/01' is available. + \OptionNotUsed \OptionNotUsed Adds the current option to the list of unused options. Can only be used @@ -1180,17 +1236,20 @@ options.) If your own code is bringing in a package twice then you can collapse that to once, for example replacing the two -\RequirePackage[landscape]{geometry}\RequirePackage[margins=1in]{geometry} -with the single -\RequirePackage[landscape,margins=1in]{geometry}. But if you -are loading a package that in turn loads another package then you need -to queue up the options you desire for this other package. For -instance, suppose the package foo loads the package -geometry. Instead of -\RequirePackage{foo}\RequirePackage[draft]{graphics} you must -write \PassOptionsToPackage{draft}{graphics} -\RequirePackage{foo}. (If foo.sty loads an option in conflict -with what you want then you may have to look into altering its source.) +\RequirePackage[landscape]{geometry} and +\RequirePackage[margins=1in]{geometry} with the single command +\RequirePackage[landscape,margins=1in]{geometry}. + +However, imagine that you are loading firstpkg and inside that +package it loads secondpkg, and you need the second package to be +loaded with option draft. Then before doing the first package +you must queue up the options for the second package, like this. + +\PassOptionsToPackage{draft}{secondpkg} +\RequirePackage{firstpkg} + +(If firstpkg.sty loads an option in conflict with what you want +then you may have to alter its source.) These commands are useful for general users as well as class and package writers. For instance, suppose a user wants to load the graphicx @@ -1238,41 +1297,42 @@ options in the order specified in the calling commands, rather than in the order of declaration in the class or package. For a package this means that the global options are processed first. - \ProvidesClass{class name}[release date brief additional information] \ProvidesClass{class name}[release date] \ProvidesPackage{package name}[release date brief additional information] \ProvidesPackage{package name}[release date] \ProvidesClass \ProvidesPackage -Identifies the class or package, printing a message to the screen and the log file. +Identifies the class or package, printing a message to the screen and +the log file. -When a user writes \documentclass{smcmemo} then &latex; loads -the file smcmemo.cls. Similarly, a user writing -\usepackage{test} prompts &latex; to load the file -test.sty. If the name of the file does not match the declared -class or package name then you get a warning. Thus, if you invoke +When you load a class or package, for example with +\documentclass{smcmemo} or \usepackage{test}, &latex; +inputs a file. If the name of the file does not match the class or +package name declared in it then you get a warning. Thus, if you invoke \documentclass{smcmemo}, and the file smcmemo.cls has the statement \ProvidesClass{xxx} then you get a warning like You have requested document class `smcmemo', but the document class provides 'xxx'. This warning does not prevent &latex; from processing the rest of the class file normally. -If you include the optional argument, then you must include the date, before -the first space if any, and it must have the form YYYY/MM/DD. The rest -of the optional argument is free-form, although it traditionally identifies -the class, and is written to the screen during compilation and to the -log file. Thus, if your file smcmemo.cls contains the line -\ProvidesClass{smcmemo}[2008/06/01 v1.0 SMC memo class] and your -document’s first line is \documentclass{smcmemo} then you will -see Document Class: smcmemo 2008/06/01 v1.0 SMC memo class. +If you include the optional argument then you must include a date, +before any spaces, of the form YYYY/MM/DD. The rest of the +optional argument is free-form, although it traditionally identifies the +class, and is written to the screen during compilation and to the log +file. Thus, if your file smcmemo.cls contains the line +\ProvidesClass{smcmemo}[2008/06/01 v1.0 SMC memo class] and +your document’s first line is \documentclass{smcmemo} then you +will see Document Class: smcmemo 2008/06/01 v1.0 SMC memo class. The date in the optional argument allows class and package users to ask -to be warned if the version of the class or package installed on their -system is earlier than release date, by using the optional arguments -such as \documentclass{smcmemo}[2018/10/12] or -\usepackage{foo}[[2017/07/07]]. (Note that package users only -rarely include a date, and class users almost never do.) +to be warned if the version of the class or package is earlier than +release date. For instance, a user could enter +\documentclass{smcmemo}[2018/10/12] or +\usepackage{foo}[[2017/07/07]] to require a class or package +with certain features by specifying that it must be released no earlier +than the given date. (Although, in practice package users only rarely +include a date, and class users almost never do.) \ProvidesFile{file name}[additional information] \ProvidesFile @@ -1287,11 +1347,11 @@ file and you get in the log a string like File: test.config \RequirePackageWithOptions{package name}[release date] \RequirePackage \RequirePackageWithOptions -Load a package, like the document author command \usepackage. -See Additional packages. An example is -\RequirePackage[landscape,margin=1in]{geometry}. Note that the -&latex; development team strongly recommends use of these commands over -Plain &tex;’s \input; see the Class Guide. +Load a package, like the command \usepackage (see Additional +packages). The &latex; development team strongly recommends use of +these commands over Plain &tex;’s \input; see the Class +Guide. An example is +\RequirePackage[landscape,margin=1in]{geometry}. The option list, if present, is a comma-separated list. The release date, if present, must have the form YYYY/MM/DD. If @@ -1338,30 +1398,28 @@ and a style. The &latex; commands for doing this are described here. The following type style commands are supported by &latex;. -This first group of commands is typically used with an argument, as in -\textit{text}. In the table below, the corresponding -command in parenthesis is the “declaration form”, which takes no -arguments, as in {\itshape text}. The scope of the -declaration form lasts until the next type style command or the end of -the current group. +In the table below the listed commands, the \text... commands, +is used with an argument, as in \textit{text}. This is +the preferred form. But shown after it, in parenthesis, is the +corresponding declaration form, which is sometimes useful. This form +takes no arguments, as in {\itshape text}. The scope of +the declaration form lasts until the next type style command or the end +of the current group. In addition, each has an environment form such as +\begin{itshape}...\end{itshape}. -These commands, in both the argument form and the declaration form, -are cumulative; e.g., you can say either \sffamily\bfseries or -\bfseries\sffamily to get bold sans serif. - -You can alternatively use an environment form of the declarations; for -instance, \begin{ttfamily}...\end{ttfamily}. +These commands, in both the argument form and the declaration form, are +cumulative; for instance you can get bold sans serif by saying either of +\sffamily\bfseries or \bfseries\sffamily. \nocorrlist \nocorr -These font-switching commands automatically insert italic corrections -if needed. (See \/, for the details of italic corrections.) -Specifically, they insert the italic correction unless the following -character is in the list \nocorrlist, which by default consists -of a period and a comma. To suppress the automatic insertion of -italic correction, use \nocorr at the start or end of the -command argument, such as \textit{\nocorr text} or -\textsc{text \nocorr}. +One advantage of these commands is that they automatically insert italic +corrections if needed (see \/). Specifically, they insert the +italic correction unless the following character is in the list +\nocorrlist, which by default consists of a period and a comma. +To suppress the automatic insertion of italic correction, use +\nocorr at the start or end of the command argument, such as +\textit{\nocorr text} or \textsc{text \nocorr}. \textrm (\rmfamily) \textrm @@ -1424,10 +1482,14 @@ text \emph{middle text} en will be in roman. &latex; also provides the following commands, which unconditionally -switch to the given style, that is, are not cumulative. Also, -they are used differently than the above commands: -{\cmd...} instead of \cmd{...}. These -are two unrelated constructs. +switch to the given style, that is, are not cumulative. They are +used as declarations: {\cmd...} instead of +\cmd{...}. + +(The unconditional commands below are an older version of font +switching. The earlier commands are an improvement in most +circumstances. But sometimes an unconditional font switch is precisely +what you want.) \bf\bf bold font @@ -1468,13 +1530,6 @@ are two unrelated constructs. The \em command is the unconditional version of \emph. -(Some people consider the unconditional font-switching commands, such -as \tt, obsolete and that only the cumulative commands -(\texttt) should be used. Others think that both sets of -commands have their place and sometimes an unconditional font switch -is precisely what you want; for one example, -see description.) - The following commands are for use in math mode. They are not cumulative, so \mathbf{\mathit{symbol}} does not create a boldface and italic symbol; instead, it will just be in @@ -1561,7 +1616,7 @@ options). \huge \Huge -Command 10pt 11pt 12pt +Command 10pt 11pt 12pt \tiny 5 6 6 \scriptsize @@ -1583,10 +1638,19 @@ options). \Huge 24.88 24.88 24.88 -The commands as listed here are “declaration forms”. The scope of -the declaration form lasts until the next type style command or the -end of the current group. You can also use the environment form of -these commands; for instance, \begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}. +The commands are listed here in declaration forms. You use them by +declaring them, as with this example. + +\begin{quotation} \small + The Tao that can be named is not the eternal Tao. +\end{quotation} + +The scope of the \small lasts until the end of the +quotation environment. It would also end at the next type style +command or the end of the current group, so you could enclose it in +extra curly braces {\small We are here, we are here, we are +here!}. You can instead use the environment form of these commands; +for instance, \begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}. @@ -1602,7 +1666,7 @@ ones. -\fontencoding{encoding} +\fontencoding{encoding} \fontencoding Select the font encoding, the encoding of the output font. There are a large number of valid encodings. The most common are OT1, @@ -1613,16 +1677,16 @@ accented characters used by the most widespread European languages hyphenate words containing accented letters. For more, see https://ctan.org/pkg/encguide. -\fontfamily{family} +\fontfamily{family} \fontfamily families, of fonts font catalogue Select the font family. The web page http://www.tug.dk/FontCatalogue/ provides one way to browse through many of the fonts easily used with &latex;. Here are -examples of some common families: +examples of some common families. -pag +pag Avant Garde fvs Bitstream Vera Sans @@ -1664,7 +1728,7 @@ examples of some common families: Zapf Chancery -\fontseries{series} +\fontseries{series} \fontseries series, of fonts Select the font series. A series combines a weight and a @@ -1708,7 +1772,6 @@ combinations. Some common combined series values include: The possible values for width, individually, are (the meaning and relationship of these terms varies with individual typefaces): - uc Ultra condensed ec @@ -1728,7 +1791,6 @@ relationship of these terms varies with individual typefaces): ux Ultra expanded - When forming the series string from the weight and width, drop the m that stands for medium weight or medium width, unless both weight and width are m, in which case use just one @@ -1737,7 +1799,7 @@ weight and width are m, in which case use just one \fontshape{shape} \fontshape shapes, of fonts -Select font shape. Valid shapes are: +Select font shape. Valid shapes are: n Upright (normal) @@ -1752,11 +1814,10 @@ weight and width are m, in which case use just one ol Outline - The two last shapes are not available for most font families, and small caps are often missing as well. -\fontsize{size}{skip} +\fontsize{size}{skip} \fontsize font size \baselineskip @@ -1768,7 +1829,7 @@ the Computer Modern typeface is 1.2 times the \fontsize. Changing \baselineskip directly is inadvisable since its value is reset every time a size change happens; see \baselinestretch, next. -\baselinestretch +\baselinestretch \baselinestretch &latex; multiplies the line spacing by the value of the \baselinestretch parameter; the default factor is 1. A change @@ -1787,7 +1848,7 @@ options, this package keeps the line spacing single-spaced in places where that is typically desirable, such as footnotes and figure captions. See the package documentation. -\linespread{factor} +\linespread{factor} \linespread Equivalent to \renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{factor}, and @@ -1795,7 +1856,7 @@ therefore must be followed by \selectfont to have any effect. Best specified in the preamble, or use the setspace package, as just described. -\selectfont +\selectfont \selectfont The effects of the font commands described above do not happen until \selectfont is called, as in @@ -1806,7 +1867,7 @@ to put this in a macro: (see \newcommand & \renewcommand). -\usefont{enc}{family}{series}{shape} +\usefont{enc}{family}{series}{shape} \usefont The same as invoking \fontencoding, \fontfamily, \fontseries and \fontshape with the given parameters, @@ -1833,11 +1894,14 @@ followed by \selectfont. For example: \onecolumn one-column output +Synopsis: + +\onecolumn + Start a new page and produce single-column output. If the document is given the class option onecolumn then this is the default -behavior (see Document class options). - -This command is fragile (see \protect). +behavior (see Document class options). This command is fragile +(see \protect). @@ -1855,31 +1919,30 @@ behavior (see Document class options Start a new page and produce two-column output. If the document is given the class option twocolumn then this is the default -(see Document class options). +(see Document class options). This command is fragile +(see \protect). If the optional prelim one column text argument is present, it is typeset in one-column mode before the two-column typesetting starts. -This command is fragile (see \protect). - These parameters control typesetting in two-column output: \columnsep\columnsep -The distance between columns. The default is 35pt. Change it with a +The distance between columns. The default is 35pt. Change it with a command such as \setlength{\columnsep}{40pt} You must change it before the two column environment starts; in the preamble is a good place. \columnseprule\columnseprule -The width of the rule between columns. The rule appears halfway between +The width of the rule between columns. The rule appears halfway between the two columns. The default is 0pt, meaning that there is no rule. Change it with a command such as \setlength{\columnseprule}{0.4pt}, before the two-column environment starts. \columnwidth\columnwidth -The width of a single column. In one-column mode this is equal to +The width of a single column. In one-column mode this is equal to \textwidth. In two-column mode by default &latex; sets the width of each of the two columns to be half of \textwidth minus \columnsep. @@ -1891,7 +1954,7 @@ width of each of the two columns to be half of \textwidth min and see table). &latex; places starred floats at the top of a page. The following parameters control float behavior of two-column output. -\dbltopfraction\dbltopfraction +\dbltopfraction\dbltopfraction The maximum fraction at the top of a two-column page that may be occupied by two-column wide floats. The default is 0.7, meaning that the height of a table* or figure* environment must not @@ -1908,27 +1971,27 @@ the bulky float on a page by itself, as well as at the top of a page. Increase the value of \dbltopfraction to a suitably large number, to avoid going to float pages so soon. -You can redefine it, for instance with +You can redefine it, as with \renewcommand{\dbltopfraction}{0.9}. -\dblfloatpagefraction\dblfloatpagefraction +\dblfloatpagefraction\dblfloatpagefraction For a float page of two-column wide floats, this is the minimum fraction that must be occupied by floats, limiting the amount of blank space. &latex;’s default is 0.5. Change it with \renewcommand. -\dblfloatsep\dblfloatsep +\dblfloatsep\dblfloatsep On a float page of two-column wide floats, this length is the distance between floats, at both the top and bottom of the page. The default is 12pt plus2pt minus2pt for a document set at 10pt or 11pt, and 14pt plus2pt minus4pt for a document set at 12pt. -\dbltextfloatsep\dbltextfloatsep +\dbltextfloatsep\dbltextfloatsep This length is the distance between a multi-column float at the top or bottom of a page and the main text. The default is 20pt plus2pt minus4pt. -\dbltopnumber\dbltopnumber +\dbltopnumber\dbltopnumber On a float page of two-column wide floats, this counter gives the maximum number of floats allowed at the top of the page. The &latex; default is 2. @@ -2015,20 +2078,20 @@ option (see Document class options \columnsep \columnseprule \columnwidth -The distance between the two columns, the width of a rule between the +The distance between the two columns, the width of a rule between the columns, and the width of the columns, when the document class option twocolumn is in effect (see Document class options). See \twocolumn. \headheight\headheight \headheight -Height of the box that contains the running head. The default in the +Height of the box that contains the running head. The default in the article, report, and book classes is ‘12pt’, at all type sizes. \headsep\headsep \headsep -Vertical distance between the bottom of the header line and the top of +Vertical distance between the bottom of the header line and the top of the main text. The default in the article and report classes is ‘25pt’. In the book class the default is: if the document is set at 10pt then it is ‘0.25in’, and at 11pt and 12pt @@ -2036,7 +2099,7 @@ it is ‘0.275in’. \footskip\footskip \footskip -Distance from the baseline of the last line of text to the baseline of +Distance from the baseline of the last line of text to the baseline of the page footer. The default in the article and report classes is ‘30pt’. In the book class the default is: when the type size is 10pt the default is ‘0.35in’, while at 11pt it is @@ -2044,7 +2107,7 @@ the type size is 10pt the default is ‘0.35in’, wh \linewidth\linewidth \linewidth -Width of the current line, decreased for each nested list +Width of the current line, decreased for each nested list (see list). That is, the nominal value for \linewidth is to equal \textwidth but for each nested list the \linewidth is decreased by the sum of that list’s \leftmargin and @@ -2059,7 +2122,7 @@ is decreased by the sum of that list’s \leftmargin and \marginparpush \marginsep \marginparwidth -The minimum vertical space between two marginal notes, the horizontal +The minimum vertical space between two marginal notes, the horizontal space between the text body and the marginal notes, and the horizontal width of the notes. @@ -2087,7 +2150,7 @@ distance. \evensidemargin\evensidemargin \oddsidemargin \evensidemargin -The \oddsidemargin is the extra distance between the left side of +The \oddsidemargin is the extra distance between the left side of the page and the text’s left margin, on odd-numbered pages when the document class option twoside is chosen and on all pages when oneside is in effect. When twoside is in effect, on @@ -2100,21 +2163,21 @@ difference between \paperwidth and \textwidth \paperheight\paperheight \paperheight -The height of the paper, as distinct from the height of the print area. -It is normally set with a document class option, as in +The height of the paper, as distinct from the height of the print area. +Normally set with a document class option, as in \documentclass[a4paper]{article} (see Document class options). \paperwidth\paperwidth \paperwidth -The width of the paper, as distinct from the width of the print area. -It is normally set with a document class option, as in +The width of the paper, as distinct from the width of the print area. +Normally set with a document class option, as in \documentclass[a4paper]{article} (see Document class options). \textheight\textheight \textheight -The normal vertical height of the page body. If the document is set at +The normal vertical height of the page body. If the document is set at a nominal type size of 10pt then for an article or report the default is ‘43\baselineskip’, while for a book it is ‘41\baselineskip’. At a type size of 11pt the default is @@ -2123,7 +2186,7 @@ the default is ‘43\baselineskip’, while for a
  • \textwidth\textwidth \textwidth -The full horizontal width of the entire page body. For an +The full horizontal width of the entire page body. For an article or report document, the default is ‘345pt’ when the chosen type size is 10pt, the default is ‘360pt’ at 11pt, and it is ‘390pt’ at 12pt. For a book document, the default @@ -2143,14 +2206,14 @@ specified width, and revert to their normal values at the end of the minipage or \parbox. \hsize -\hsize -This entry is included for completeness: \hsize is the &tex; +\hsize\hsize +This entry is included for completeness: \hsize is the &tex; primitive parameter used when text is broken into lines. It should not be used in normal &latex; documents. \topmargin\topmargin topmargin -Space between the top of the &tex; page (one inch from the top of the +Space between the top of the &tex; page (one inch from the top of the paper, by default) and the top of the header. The value is computed based on many other parameters: \paperheight − 2in − \headheight − \headsep − \textheight − \footskip, @@ -2158,7 +2221,7 @@ and then divided by two. \topskip\topskip \topskip -Minimum distance between the top of the page body and the baseline of +Minimum distance between the top of the page body and the baseline of the first line of text. For the standard classes, the default is the same as the font size, e.g., ‘10pt’ at a type size of 10pt. @@ -2272,65 +2335,67 @@ non-float text (change them with \bottomfraction\bottomfraction \bottomfraction -The maximum fraction of the page allowed to be occupied by floats at +The maximum fraction of the page allowed to be occupied by floats at the bottom; default ‘.3’. \floatpagefraction\floatpagefraction \floatpagefraction -The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by floats; +The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by floats; default ‘.5’. \textfraction\textfraction \textfraction -Minimum fraction of a page that must be text; if floats take up too +Minimum fraction of a page that must be text; if floats take up too much space to preserve this much text, floats will be moved to a different page. The default is ‘.2’. \topfraction\topfraction \topfraction -Maximum fraction at the top of a page that may be occupied before +Maximum fraction at the top of a page that may be occupied before floats; default ‘.7’. -Parameters relating to vertical space around floats (change them with -\setlength{parameter}{length expression}): +Parameters relating to vertical space around floats (change them with a +command of the form \setlength{parameter}{length +expression}): \floatsep\floatsep \floatsep -Space between floats at the top or bottom of a page; default +Space between floats at the top or bottom of a page; default ‘12pt plus2pt minus2pt’. \intextsep\intextsep \intextsep -Space above and below a float in the middle of the main text; default +Space above and below a float in the middle of the main text; default ‘12pt plus2pt minus2pt’ for 10 point and 11 point documents, and ‘14pt plus4pt minus4pt’ for 12 point documents. \textfloatsep\textfloatsep \textfloatsep -Space between the last (first) float at the top (bottom) of a page; +Space between the last (first) float at the top (bottom) of a page; default ‘20pt plus2pt minus4pt’. -Counters relating to the number of floats on a page (change them with -\setcounter{ctrname}{natural number}): +Counters relating to the number of floats on a page (change them with a +command of the form \setcounter{ctrname}{natural +number}): bottomnumberbottomnumber bottomnumber -Maximum number of floats that can appear at the bottom of a text page; +Maximum number of floats that can appear at the bottom of a text page; default 1. dbltopnumberdbltopnumber dbltopnumber -Maximum number of full-sized floats that can appear at the top of a +Maximum number of full-sized floats that can appear at the top of a two-column page; default 2. topnumbertopnumber topnumber -Maximum number of floats that can appear at the top of a text page; +Maximum number of floats that can appear at the top of a text page; default 2. totalnumbertotalnumber totalnumber -Maximum number of floats that can appear on a text page; default 3. +Maximum number of floats that can appear on a text page; default 3. The principal &tex; FAQ entry relating to floats http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=floats contains @@ -2348,67 +2413,624 @@ influence the position of float environments like figure and table in Sectioning sectioning commands +part +chapter +section +subsection +paragraph +subparagraph +\part +\chapter +\section +\subsection +\paragraph +\subparagraph + +Structure your text into divisions: parts, chapters, sections, etc. All +sectioning commands have the same form, one of: + +sectioning-command{title} +sectioning-command*{title} +sectioning-command[toc-title]{title} + +For instance, declare the start of a subsection as with +\subsection{Motivation}. + +The table has each sectioning-command in &latex;. All are +available in all of &latex;’s standard document classes book, +report, and article, except that \chapter is +not available in article. + +Sectioning unit Command Level +Part +\part -1 (book, report), 0 (article) +Chapter +\chapter 0 +Section +\section 1 +Subsection +\subsection 2 +Subsubsection +\subsubsection 3 +Paragraph +\paragraph 4 +Subparagraph +\subparagraph 5 + +*-form of sectioning commands +All these commands have a *-form that prints title as usual +but is not numbered and does not make an entry in the table of contents. +An example of using this is for an appendix in an article . The +input \appendix\section{Appendix} gives the output ‘A +Appendix’ (see \appendix). You can lose the numbering ‘A’ +by instead entering \section*{Appendix} (articles often omit a +table of contents and have simple page headers so the other differences +from the \section command may not matter). + +The section title title provides the heading in the main text, but +it may also appear in the table of contents and in the running head or +foot (see Page styles). You may not want the same text in these +places as in the main text. All of these commands have an optional +argument toc-title for these other places. + +The level number in the table above determines which sectional units are +numbered, and which appear in the table of contents. If the sectioning +command’s level is less than or equal to the value of the counter +secnumdepth then the titles for this sectioning command will be +numbered (see Sectioning/secnumdepth). And, if level is less +than or equal to the value of the counter tocdepth then the table +of contents will have an entry for this sectioning unit +(see Sectioning/tocdepth). + +&latex; expects that before you have a \subsection you will have +a \section and, in a book, that before a \section you will +have a \chapter. Otherwise you can get a something like a +subsection numbered ‘3.0.1’. + +Two counters relate to the appearance of sectioning commands. + +secnumdepthsecnumdepth +secnumdepth counter +section numbers, printing +Controls which sectioning commands are +numbered. Suppress numbering of sectioning at any depth greater than +level \setcounter{secnumdepth}{level} +(see \setcounter). See the above table for the level numbers. For +instance, if the secnumdepth is 1 in an article then a +\section{Introduction} command will produce output like ‘1 +Introduction’ while \subsection{Discussion} will produce output +like ‘Discussion’, without the number. &latex;’s default +secnumdepth is 3 in article class and  2 in the +book and report classes. + +tocdepthtocdepth +tocdepth counter +table of contents, sectioning numbers printed +Controls which sectioning units are listed in the table of contents. +The setting \setcounter{tocdepth}{level} makes the +sectioning units at level be the smallest ones listed +(see \setcounter). See the above table for the level numbers. For +instance, if tocdepth is 1 then the table of contents will +list sections but not subsections. &latex;’s default +secnumdepth is 3 in article class and  2 in the +book and report classes. + + + + + +<literal>\part</literal> -Sectioning commands provide the means to structure your text into units: +\part +part +sectioning, part + +Synopsis, one of: + +\part{title} +\part*{title} +\part[toc-title]{title} + +Start a document part. The standard &latex; classes book, +report, and article, all have this command. -\part\part -\chapter\chapter -(report and book class only) -\section\section -\subsection\subsection -\subsubsection\subsubsection -\paragraph\paragraph -\subparagraph\subparagraph - -All sectioning commands take the same general form, e.g., +This produces a document part, in a book. -\chapter[toctitle]{title} +\part{VOLUME I \\ + PERSONAL MEMOIRS OF U.\ S.\ GRANT} +\chapter{ANCESTRY--BIRTH--BOYHOOD.} +My family is American, and has been for generations, +in all its branches, direct and collateral. -In addition to providing the heading title in the main text, the -section title can appear in two other places: +In each standard class the \part command outputs a part number +such as ‘Part I’, alone on its line, in boldface, and in large +type. Then &latex; outputs title, also alone on its line, in +bold and in even larger type. In class book, the &latex; +default puts each part alone on its own page. If the book is two-sided +then &latex; will skip a page if needed to have the new part on an +odd-numbered page. In report it is again alone on a page, but +&latex; won’t force it onto an odd-numbered page. In an article +&latex; does not put it on a fresh page, but instead outputs the part +number and part title onto the main document page. -The table of contents. -The running head at the top of the page. - -You may not want the same text in these places as in the main text. -To handle this, the sectioning commands have an optional argument -toctitle that, when given, specifies the text for these other -places. +The * form shows title +but it does not show the part number, does not increment the +part counter, and produces no table of contents entry. -*-form of sectioning commands -Also, all sectioning commands have *-forms that print -title as usual, but do not include a number and do not make an -entry in the table of contents. For instance: +The optional argument toc-title will appear as the part title in +the table of contents (see Table of contents etc.) and in running +headers (see Page styles). If it is not present then title +will be there. This example puts a line break in title but leaves +out the break in the table of contents. + +\part[Up from the bottom; my life]{Up from the bottom\\ my life} + +For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear in +the table of contents, the level number of a part is -1 +(see Sectioning/secnumdepth and see Sectioning/tocdepth). + +package, indentfirst +indentfirst package + +In the class article, if a paragraph immediately follows the part +title then it is not indented. To get an indent you can use the package +indentfirst. + +package, titlesec +titlesec package + +One package to change the behavior of \part is titlesec. +See its documentation on CTAN. + + + + +<literal>\chapter</literal> + +\chapter +chapter + +Synopsis, one of: + +\chapter{title} +\chapter*{title} +\chapter[toc-title]{title} + +Start a chapter. The standard &latex; classes book and +report have this command but article does not. + +This produces a chapter. + +\chapter{Loomings} +Call me Ishmael. +Some years ago---never mind how long precisely---having little or no +money in my purse, and nothing particular to interest me on shore, I +thought I would sail about a little and see the watery part of +the world. + +The &latex; default starts each chapter on a fresh page, an +odd-numbered page if the document is two-sided. It produces a chapter +number such as ‘Chapter 1’ in large boldface type (the size is +\huge). It then puts title on a fresh line, in boldface +type that is still larger (size \Huge). It also increments the +chapter counter, adds an entry to the table of contents +(see Table of contents etc.), and sets the running header +information (see Page styles). + +The * form shows title on a fresh line, in boldface. +But it does not show the chapter number, does not increment the +chapter counter, produces no table of contents entry, and does +not affect the running header. (If you use the page style +headings in a two-sided document then the header will be from the +prior chapter.) This example illustrates. + +\chapter*{Preamble} + +The optional argument toc-title will appear as the chapter title +in the table of contents (see Table of contents etc.) and in +running headers (see Page styles). If it is not present then +title will be there. This shows the full name in the chapter +title, + +\chapter[Weyl]{Hermann Klaus Hugo (Peter) Weyl (1885--1955)} + +but only ‘Weyl’ on the contents page. This puts a line break in +the title but that doesn’t work well with running headers so it omits +the break in the contents + +\chapter[Given it all\\ my story]{Given it all\\ my story} + +For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear in +the table of contents, the level number of a chapter is 0 +(see Sectioning/secnumdepth and see Sectioning/tocdepth). + +package, indentfirst +indentfirst package + +The paragraph that follows the chapter title is not indented, as is a +standard typographical practice. To get an indent use the package +indentfirst. + +You can change what is shown for the chapter number. To change it to +something like ‘Lecture 1’, put in the preamble either +\renewcommand{\chaptername}{Lecture} or this +(see \makeatletter & \makeatother). + +\makeatletter +\renewcommand{\@chapapp}{Lecture} +\makeatother + +package, babel +babel package + +To make this change because of the primary language for +the document, see the package babel. + +In a two-sided document &latex; puts a chapter on odd-numbered page, if +necessary leaving an even-numbered page that is blank except for any +running headers. To make that page completely blank, +see \clearpage & \cleardoublepage. + +package, titlesec +titlesec package + +To change the behavior of the \chapter command, you can copy its +definition from the &latex; format file and make adjustments. But +there are also many packages on CTAN that address this. One is +titlesec. See its documentation, but the example below gives a +sense of what it can do. + +\usepackage{titlesec} % in preamble +\titleformat{\chapter} + {\Huge\bfseries} % format of title + {} % label, such as 1.2 for a subsection + {0pt} % length of separation between label and title + {} % before-code hook + +This omits the chapter number ‘Chapter 1’ from the page but unlike +\chapter* it keeps the chapter in the table of contents and the +running headers. + + + + +<literal>\section</literal> + +\section +section + +Synopsis, one of: + +\section{title} +\section*{title} +\section[toc-title]{title} + +Start a section. The standard &latex; classes article, +book, and report all have this command. + +This produces a section. + +In this Part we tend to be more interested in the function, +in the input-output behavior, +than in the details of implementing that behavior. + +\section{Turing machines} +Despite this desire to downplay implementation, +we follow the approach of A~Turing that the +first step toward defining the set of computable functions +is to reflect on the details of what mechanisms can do. + +For the standard &latex; classes book and report the +default output is like ‘1.2 title’ (for chapter 1, +section 2), alone on its line and flush left, in boldface and a +larger type (the type size is \Large). The same holds in +article except that there are no chapters in that class so it +looks like ‘2 title’. + +The * form shows title. +But it does not show the section number, does not increment the +section counter, produces no table of contents entry, and does +not affect the running header. (If you use the page style +headings in a two-sided document then the header will be from the +prior section.) + +The optional argument toc-title will appear as the section title +in the table of contents (see Table of contents etc.) and in +running headers (see Page styles). If it is not present then +title will be there. This shows the full name in the title of the +section, + +\section[Elizabeth~II]{Elizabeth the Second, + by the Grace of God of the United Kingdom, + Canada and Her other Realms and Territories Queen, + Head of the Commonwealth, Defender of the Faith.} + +but only ‘Elizabeth II’ on the contents page and in the headers. +This has a line break in title but that does not work with headers +so it is omitted from the contents and headers. + +\section[Truth is, I cheated; my life story]{Truth is, + I cheated\\my life story} + +For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear in +the table of contents, the level number of a section is 1 +(see Sectioning/secnumdepth and see Sectioning/tocdepth). + +package, indentfirst +indentfirst package + +The paragraph that follows the section title is not indented, as is a +standard typographical practice. One way to get an indent is to use the +package indentfirst. + +package, titlesec +titlesec package + +In general, to change the behavior of the \section command, there +are a number of options. One is the \@startsection command +(see \@startsection). There are also many packages on CTAN that +address this, including titlesec. See the documentation but the +example below gives a sense of what they can do. + + +\usepackage{titlesec} % in preamble +\titleformat{\section} + {\normalfont\Large\bfseries} % format of title + {\makebox[1pc][r]{\thesection\hspace{1pc}}} % label + {0pt} % length of separation between label and title + {} % before-code hook +\titlespacing*{\section} + {-1pc}{18pt}{10pt}[10pc] + +That puts the section number in the margin. + + + + +<literal>\subsection</literal> + +\subsection +subsection + +Synopsis, one of: + +\subsection{title} +\subsection*{title} +\subsection[toc-title]{title} + +Start a subsection. The standard &latex; classes article, +book, and report all have this command. + +This produces a subsection. + +We will show that there are more functions than Turing machines and that +therefore some functions have no associated machine. + +\subsection{Cardinality} We will begin with two paradoxes that +dramatize the challenge to our intuition posed by comparing the sizes of +infinite sets. + +For the standard &latex; classes book and report the +default output is like ‘1.2.3 title’ (for chapter 1, +section 2, subsection 3), alone on its line and flush left, in +boldface and a larger type (the type size is \large). The same +holds in article except that there are no chapters in that class +so it looks like ‘2.3 title’. + +The * form shows title. +But it does not show the section number, does not increment the +section counter, and produces no table of contents entry. + +The optional argument toc-title will appear as the section title +in the table of contents (see Table of contents etc.). If it is +not present then title will be there. This shows the full name in +the title of the section, + +\subsection[$\alpha,\beta,\gamma$ paper]{\textit{The Origin of + Chemical Elements} by R.A.~Alpher, H.~Bethe, and G.~Gamow} + +but only ‘α,β,γ +paper’ on the contents page. + +For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear in +the table of contents, the level number of a subsection is 2 +(see Sectioning/secnumdepth and see Sectioning/tocdepth). + +package, indentfirst +indentfirst package + +The paragraph that follows the subsection title is not indented, as is a +standard typographical practice. One way to get an indent is to use the +package indentfirst. + +package, titlesec +titlesec package + +There are a number of ways to change the behavior of the +\subsection command. One is the \@startsection command +(see \@startsection). There are also many packages on CTAN that +address this, including titlesec. See the documentation but the +example below gives a sense of what they can do. + +\usepackage{titlesec} % in preamble +\titleformat{\subsection}[runin] + {\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries} % format of the title + {\thesubsection} % label + {0.6em} % space between label and title + {} % before-code hook + +That puts the subsection number and title in the first line of +text. + + + + + +<literal>\subsubsection</literal>, <literal>\paragraph</literal>, <literal>\subparagraph</literal> + +\subsubsection +subsubsection +\paragraph +paragraph +\subparagraph +subparagraph + +Synopsis, one of: + +\subsubsection{title} +\subsubsection*{title} +\subsubsection[toc-title]{title} + +or one of: + +\paragraph{title} +\paragraph*{title} +\paragraph[toc-title]{title} + +or one of: + +\subparagraph{title} +\subparagraph*{title} +\subparagraph[toc-title]{title} + +Start a subsubsection, paragraph, or subparagraph. The standard +&latex; classes article, book, and report all have +these commands, although they are not commonly used. -\section*{Preamble} +This produces a subsubsection. + +\subsubsection{Piston ring compressors: structural performance} +Provide exterior/interior wall cladding assemblies +capable of withstanding the effects of load and stresses from +consumer-grade gasoline engine piston rings. +The default output of each of the three does not change over the +standard &latex; classes article, book, and +report. For \subsubsection the title is alone on +its line, in boldface and normal size type. For \paragraph the +title is inline with the text, not indented, in boldface and +normal size type. For \subparagraph the title is inline +with the text, with a paragraph indent, in boldface and normal size type +(Because an article has no chapters its subsubsections are +numbered and so it looks like ‘1.2.3 title’, for +section 1, subsection 2, and subsubsection 3. The other +two divisions are not numbered.) + +The * form shows title. But it does not increment the +associated counter and produces no table of contents entry (and does not +show the number for \subsubsection). + +The optional argument toc-title will appear as the division title +in the table of contents (see Table of contents etc.). If it is +not present then title will be there. + +For determining which sectional units are numbered and which appear in +the table of contents, the level number of a subsubsection is 3, of +a paragraph is 4, and of a subparagraph is 5 +(see Sectioning/secnumdepth and see Sectioning/tocdepth). + +package, indentfirst +indentfirst package + +The paragraph that follows the subsubsection title is not indented, as is a +standard typographical practice. One way to get an indent is to use the +package indentfirst. + +package, titlesec +titlesec package + +There are a number of ways to change the behavior of the these commands. +One is the \@startsection command (see \@startsection). +There are also many packages on CTAN that address this, including +titlesec. See the documentation on CTAN. + + + + + +<literal>\appendix</literal> + \appendix -appendix, creating -The \appendix command changes the way following sectional units -are numbered. The \appendix command itself generates no text -and does not affect the numbering of parts. The normal use of this -command is something like - -\chapter{A Chapter} -… -\appendix -\chapter{The First Appendix} +appendix +appendices + +Synopsis: + +\appendix -secnumdepth counter -section numbers, printing -The secnumdepth counter controls printing of section numbers. -The setting +This does not directly produce any output. But in a book or report it +declares that subsequent \chapter commands start an appendix. In +an article it does the same, for \section commands. It also +resets the chapter and section counters to 0 in a +book or report, and in an article resets the section and +subsection counters. -\setcounter{secnumdepth}{level} +In this book + +\chapter{One} ... +\chapter{Two} ... + ... +\appendix +\chapter{Three} ... +\chapter{Four} ... -suppresses heading numbers at any depth > level, where -chapter is level zero. The default secnumdepth is 3 in -&latex;’s article class and 2 in the book and -report classes. (See \setcounter.) +the first two will generate output numbered ‘Chapter 1’ and +‘Chapter 2’. After the \appendix the numbering will be +‘Appendix A’ and ‘Appendix B’. See Larger book template +for another example. + +package, appendix +appendix package +The appendix package adds the command +\appendixpage to put a separate ‘Appendices’ in the document +body before the first appendix, and the command \addappheadtotoc +to do the same in the table of contents. You can reset the name +‘Appendix’ with a command like +\renewcommand{\appendixname}{Specification}, as well as a +number of other features. See the documentation on CTAN. + + + +<literal>\frontmatter</literal>, <literal>\mainmatter</literal>, <literal>\backmatter</literal> + +\frontmatter +book, front matter +\mainmatter +book, main matter +\backmatter +book, back matter +book, end matter + +Synopsis, one of: + +\frontmatter +\mainmatter +\backmatter + +Format a book class document differently according to which part +of the document is being produced. All three commands are optional. + +Traditionally, a book’s front matter contains such things as the title +page, an abstract, a table of contents, a preface, a list of notations, +a list of figures, and a list of tables. (Some of these front matter +pages, such as the title page, are traditionally not numbered.) The +back matter may contain such things as a glossary, notes, a +bibliography, and an index. + +The \frontmatter declaration makes the pages numbered in +lowercase roman, and makes chapters not numbered, although each +chapter’s title appears in the table of contents; if you use other +sectioning commands here, use the *-version (see Sectioning). +The \mainmatter changes the behavior back to the expected +version, and resets the page number. The \backmatter leaves the +page numbering alone but switches the chapters back to being not +numbered. See Larger book template for an example using the three. + - + + <literal>\@startsection</literal> \@startsection @@ -2430,10 +3052,24 @@ make such a command you may want to use the \secdef command. Technically, \@startsection has the form -\@startsection{name}{level}{indent}{beforeskip}{afterskip}{style}*[toctitle]{title} -(the star * is optional), so that issuing -\renewcommand{\section}{\@startsection{name}{level}{indent}{beforeskip}{afterskip}{style}} -redefines \section to have the form + +\@startsection{name} + {level} + {indent} + {beforeskip} + {afterskip} + {style}*[toctitle]{title} + +so that issuing + +\renewcommand{\section}{\@startsection{name} + {level} + {indent} + {beforeskip} + {afterskip} + {style}} + +redefines \section to have the form \section*[toctitle]{title} (here too, the star * is optional). See Sectioning. This implies that when you write a command like \renewcommand{section}{...}, @@ -2442,55 +3078,48 @@ the examples below. name -Name of the counter used to number the -sectioning header. This counter must be defined separately. Most -commonly this is either section, subsection, or -paragraph. Although in those three cases the counter name is the -same as the sectioning command itself, using the same name is not -required. +Name of the counter used to number the sectioning header. This counter +must be defined separately. Most commonly this is either +section, subsection, or paragraph. Although in +those cases the counter name is the same as the sectioning command +itself, you don’t have to use the same name. Then \thename displays the title number and \namemark is for the page headers. See the third example below. level -An integer giving the depth of the -sectioning command: 0 for chapter (only applies to the standard -book and report classes), 1 for section, 2 for -subsection, 3 for subsubsection, 4 for paragraph, -and 5 for subparagraph. In the book and report -classes part has level -1, while in the article class -part has level 0. - -If level is less than or equal to the value of secnumdepth -then the titles for this sectioning command will be numbered. For -instance, in an article, if secnumdepth is 1 then a -\section{Introduction} command will produce output like “1 +An integer giving the depth of the sectioning command. +See Sectioning for the list of standard level numbers. + +If level is less than or equal to the value of the counter +secnumdepth then titles for this sectioning command will be +numbered (see Sectioning/secnumdepth). For instance, if +secnumdepth is 1 in an article then the command +\section{Introduction} will produce output like “1 Introduction” while \subsection{Discussion} will produce output like “Discussion”, without the number prefix. -See Sectioning/secnumdepth. -If level is less than or equal to the value of tocdepth then -the table of contents will have an entry for this sectioning unit. -For instance, in an article, if tocdepth is 1 then the table of -contents will list sections but not subsections. - +If level is less than or equal to the value of the counter +tocdepth then the table of contents will have an entry for this +sectioning unit (see Sectioning/tocdepth). For instance, in an +article, if tocdepth is 1 then the table of contents will +list sections but not subsections. indent -A length giving the indentation of all -of the title lines with respect to the left margin. To have the title -flush with the margin use 0pt. A negative indentation such as --\parindent will move the title into the left margin. +A length giving the indentation of all of the title lines with respect +to the left margin. To have the title flush with the margin use +0pt. A negative indentation such as -\parindent will move +the title into the left margin. beforeskip -The absolute value of this length is -the amount of vertical space that is inserted before this sectioning -unit’s title. This space will be discarded if the sectioning unit -happens to start at the top of a fresh page. If this number is negative -then the first paragraph following the header is not indented, if it is -non-negative then the first paragraph is indented. (Note that the -negative of 1pt plus 2pt minus 3pt is -1pt plus -2pt minus --3pt.) +The absolute value of this length is the amount of vertical space that +is inserted before this sectioning unit’s title. This space will be +discarded if the sectioning unit happens to start at the top of a fresh +page. If this number is negative then the first paragraph following the +header is not indented, if it is non-negative then the first paragraph +is indented. (Note that the negative of 1pt plus 2pt minus 3pt +is -1pt plus -2pt minus -3pt.) For example, if beforeskip is -3.5ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex then to start the new sectioning unit, &latex; will add about 3.5 times @@ -2510,14 +3139,13 @@ where &latex; would put the baseline of the first text line on that page.) afterskip -This is a length. If afterskip -is non-negative then this is the vertical space inserted after the -sectioning unit’s title header. If it is negative then the title header -becomes a run-in header, so that it becomes part of the next paragraph. -In this case the absolute value of the length gives the horizontal space -between the end of the title and the beginning of the following -paragraph. (Note that the negative of 1pt plus 2pt minus 3pt is --1pt plus -2pt minus -3pt.) +This is a length. If afterskip is non-negative then this is the +vertical space inserted after the sectioning unit’s title header. If it +is negative then the title header becomes a run-in header, so that it +becomes part of the next paragraph. In this case the absolute value of +the length gives the horizontal space between the end of the title and +the beginning of the following paragraph. (Note that the negative of +1pt plus 2pt minus 3pt is -1pt plus -2pt minus -3pt.) As with beforeskip, using a rubber length, with plus and minus components, is good practice here since it gives &latex; @@ -2534,45 +3162,36 @@ header’s from standalone to run-in, you cannot use a negative afterskip to cancel part of the \parskip.) style -Controls the styling of the title. See -the examples below. Typical commands to use here are \centering, -\raggedright, \normalfont, \hrule, or -\newpage. The last command in style may be one such as -\MakeUppercase or \fbox that takes one argument. The +Controls the styling of the title. See the examples below. Typical +commands to use here are \centering, \raggedright, +\normalfont, \hrule, or \newpage. The last command +in style may be one that takes one argument, such as +\MakeUppercase or \fbox that takes one argument. The section title will be supplied as the argument to this command. For instance, setting style to \bfseries\MakeUppercase would -produce titles that are bold and upper case. +produce titles that are bold and uppercase. These are &latex;’s defaults for the first three sectioning units that are defined with \@startsection, for the article, -book, and report classes. - -section subsection subsubsection -name -section subsection subsubsection -level -1 2 3 -indent -0pt 0pt 0pt -beforeskip --3.5ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex --3.25ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex --3.25ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex -afterskip -2.3ex plus 0.2ex -1.5ex plus 0.2ex -1.5ex plus 0.2ex -style -\normalfont\Large\bfseries -\normalfont\large\bfseries -\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries - +book, and report classes. For section, the level is +1, the indent is 0pt, the beforeskip is -3.5ex +plus -1ex minus -0.2ex, the afterskip is 2.3ex plus 0.2ex, +and the style is \normalfont\Large\bfseries. For +subsection, the level is 2, the indent is 0pt, the +beforeskip is -3.25ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex, the +afterskip is 1.5ex plus 0.2ex, and the style is +\normalfont\large\bfseries. For subsubsection, the level +is 3, the indent is 0pt, the beforeskip is +-3.25ex plus -1ex minus -0.2ex, the afterskip is +1.5ex plus 0.2ex, and the style is +\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries. + Here are examples. They go either in a package or class file or in the preamble of a &latex; document. If you put them in the preamble they must go between a \makeatletter command and a \makeatother. (Probably the error message You can't use `\spacefactor' in vertical mode. means that you forgot this.) -See \makeatletter and \makeatother. +See \makeatletter & \makeatother. This will put section titles in large boldface type, centered. It says \renewcommand because &latex;’s standard classes have already @@ -2600,7 +3219,9 @@ defined a \section. For the same reason it does not define a {\scshape}% style } -The prior examples redefined existing sectional unit title commands. This defines a new one, illustrating the needed counter and macros to display that counter. +The prior examples redefined existing sectional unit title commands. +This defines a new one, illustrating the needed counter and macros to +display that counter. \setcounter{secnumdepth}{6}% show counters this far down @@ -2625,38 +3246,48 @@ defined a \section. For the same reason it does not define a cross references -One reason for numbering things such as figures and equations is to -refer the reader to them, as in “See Figure~3 for more details.” - label -Including the figure number in the source is poor practice since if that -number changes as the document evolves then you must remember to update -this reference by hand. Instead, &latex; has you write a label -like \label{eq:GreensThm} and refer to it with See -equation~\ref{eq:GreensThm}. - -&latex; writes the information from the labels to a file with the same -name as the file containing the \label{...} but with an -.aux extension. (The information has the format -\newlabel{label}{{currentlabel}{pagenumber}} -where currentlabel is the current value of the macro -\@currentlabel that is usually updated whenever you call -\refstepcounter{counter}.) +We often want something like ‘See Theorem~31’. But by-hand typing +the 31 is poor practice. Instead you should write a label such as +\label{eq:GreensThm} and then reference it, as with +See equation~\ref{eq:GreensThm}. &latex; will automatically +work out the number, put it into the output, and will change that number +later if needed. + +We will see this with Theorem~\ref{th:GreensThm}. % forward reference +... +\begin{theorem} \label{th:GreensThm} + ... +\end{theorem} +... +See Theorem~\ref{th:GreensThm} on page~\pageref{th:GreensThm}. + +&latex; tracks cross reference information in a file having the +extension .aux and with the same base name as the file containing +the \label. So if \label is in calculus.tex then +the information is in calculus.aux. &latex; puts the +information in that file every time it runs across a \label. forward reference reference, forward -The most common side effect of the prior paragraph happens when your -document has a forward reference, a \ref{key} that -appears earlier than the associated \label{key}; see the -example in the \pageref{...} description. &latex; gets the -information for references from the .aux file. If this is the -first time you are compiling the document then you will get a message -LaTeX Warning: Label(s) may have changed. Rerun to get -cross references right. and in the output the reference will appear as -two question marks ‘??’, in boldface. Or, if you change some -things so the references change then you get the same warning and the -output contains the old reference information. The solution in either -case is just to compile the document a second time. +The behavior described in the prior paragraph results in a quirk that +happens when your document has a forward reference, a \ref +that appears before the associated \label. If this is the first +time that you are compiling the document then you will get ‘LaTeX +Warning: Label(s) may have changed. Rerun to get cross references right’ +and in the output the forward reference will appear as two question +marks ‘??’, in boldface. A similar thing happens if you +change some things so the references changes; you get the same warning +and the output contains the old reference information. In both cases, +resolve this by compiling the document a second time. + +package, cleveref +cleveref package +The cleveref package enhances &latex;’s +cross referencing features. You can arrange that if you enter +\begin{thm}\label{th:Nerode}...\end{thm} then +\cref{th:Nerode} will output ‘Theorem 3.21’, without you +having to enter the “Theorem.” @@ -2682,28 +3313,37 @@ punctuation characters. Upper and lowercase letters are distinguished, as usual. A common convention is to use labels consisting of a prefix and a suffix -separated by a colon or period. This helps to avoid accidentally -creating two labels with the same name, and makes your source more -readable. Some commonly-used prefixes: +separated by a colon or period. Thus, \label{fig:Post} is a +label for a figure with a portrait of Emil Post. This helps to avoid +accidentally creating two labels with the same name, and makes your +source more readable. Some commonly-used prefixes: ch for chapters -sec + +sec +subsec for lower-level sectioning commands -fig + +fig for figures -tab + +tab for tables -eq + +eq for equations -Thus, \label{fig:Euler} is a label for a figure with a portrait -of the great man. +In the auxiliary file the reference information is kept as the text of +a command of the form +\newlabel{label}{{currentlabel}{pagenumber}}. +Here currentlabel is the current value of the macro +\@currentlabel that is usually updated whenever you call +\refstepcounter{counter}. -In this example below the key sec:test will get the number of the -current section and the key fig:test will get the number of the -figure. (Incidentally, put labels after captions in figures and -tables.) +Below, the key sec:test will get the number of the current +section and the key fig:test will get the number of the figure. +(Incidentally, put labels after captions in figures and tables.) \section{section name} \label{sec:test} @@ -2718,7 +3358,7 @@ See Figure~\ref{fig:test}. -<literal>\pageref{<replaceable>key</replaceable>}</literal> +<literal>\pageref</literal> \pageref cross referencing with page number @@ -2731,10 +3371,14 @@ See Figure~\ref{fig:test}. Produce the page number of the place in the text where the corresponding \label{key} command appears. -In this example the \label{eq:main} is used both for the -formula number and for the page number. (Note that the two references -are forward references, so this document would need to be compiled twice -to resolve those.) +If there is no \label{key} then you get something like +‘LaTeX Warning: Reference `th:GrensThm' on page 1 undefined on +input line 11.’ + +Below, the \label{eq:main} is used both for the formula number +and for the page number. (Note that the two references are forward +references so this document would need to be compiled twice to resolve +those.) The main result is formula~\ref{eq:main} on page~\pageref{eq:main}. ... @@ -2745,7 +3389,7 @@ to resolve those.) -<literal>\ref{<replaceable>key</replaceable>}</literal> +<literal>\ref</literal> \ref cross referencing, symbolic @@ -2763,9 +3407,13 @@ equation, footnote, figure, …, of the corresponding \label command (see \label). It does not produce any text, such as the word ‘Section’ or ‘Figure’, just the bare number itself. -In this example, the \ref{popular} produces ‘2’. Note -that it is a forward reference since it comes before -\label{popular}. +If there is no \label{key} then you get something like +‘LaTeX Warning: Reference `th:GrensThm' on page 1 undefined on +input line 11.’ + +In this example the \ref{popular} produces ‘2’. Note that +it is a forward reference since it comes before \label{popular} +so this document would have to be compiled twice. The most widely-used format is item number~\ref{popular}. \begin{enumerate} @@ -2774,6 +3422,12 @@ that it is a forward reference since it comes before \item Con\TeX t \end{enumerate} +package, cleveref +cleveref package + +The cleveref package includes text such as ‘Theorem’ in the +reference. See the documentation on CTAN. + @@ -2872,7 +3526,7 @@ a more flexible solution, use the package abstract). ... \end{array} -or +or: \begin{array}[pos]{cols} column 1 entry &column 2 entry ... &column n entry \\ @@ -2881,26 +3535,42 @@ a more flexible solution, use the package abstract). Produce a mathematical array. This environment can only be used in math mode, and normally appears within a displayed mathematics environment -such as equation (see equation). Column entries are -separated by an ampersand (&). Rows are terminated with -double-backslashes (see \\). - +such as equation (see equation). Inside of each row the +column entries are separated by an ampersand, (&). Rows are +terminated with double-backslashes (see \\). + +This example shows a three by three array. + +\begin{equation*} + \chi(x) = + \left| % vertical bar fence + \begin{array}{ccc} + x-a &-b &-c \\ + -d &x-e &-f \\ + -g &-h &x-i + \end{array} + \right| +\end{equation*} + The required argument cols describes the number of columns, their -alignment, and the formatting of the intercolumn regions. See -tabular for the complete description of cols, and of the +alignment, and the formatting of the intercolumn regions. For instance, +\begin{array}{rcl}...\end{array} gives three columns: the +first flush right, the second centered, and the third flush left. See +tabular for the complete description of cols and of the other common features of the two environments, including the optional pos argument. There are two ways that array diverges from tabular. The first is that array entries are typeset in math mode, in -textstyle (except if the cols definition specifies the column with -p{...}, which causes the entry to be typeset in text mode). -The second is that, instead of tabular’s parameter -\tabcolsep, &latex;’s intercolumn space in an array is governed -by +textstyle (see Modes) except if the cols definition specifies +the column with p{...}, which causes the entry to be typeset in +text mode. The second is that, instead of tabular’s parameter +\tabcolsep, &latex;’s intercolumn space in an array is +governed by \arraycolsep \arraycolsep, which gives half the width between columns. The -default for this is ‘5pt’. +default for this is ‘5pt’ so that between two columns comes +10pt of space. package, amsmath amsmath package @@ -2914,25 +3584,31 @@ an array surrounded by vertical bars |...|, and Vmatrix for an array surrounded by double vertical bars ||...||, along with a number of other array constructs. -Here is an example of an array: - -\begin{equation} - \begin{array}{cr} - \sqrt{y} &12.3 \\ - x^2 &3.4 - \end{array} -\end{equation} - -The next example works if \usepackage{amsmath} is in the -preamble: +package, amsmath +amsmath package + +The next example uses the amsmath package. -\begin{equation} - \begin{vmatrix}{cc} +\usepackage{amsmath} % in preamble + +\begin{equation} + \begin{vmatrix}{cc} % array with vert lines a &b \\ c &d \end{vmatrix}=ad-bc \end{equation} +package, array (package) +array (package) package + +package, dcolumn +dcolumn package + +There are many packages concerning arrays. The array package has +many useful extensions, including more column types. The dcolumn +package adds a column type to center on a decimal point. For both see +the documentation on CTAN. + @@ -2946,16 +3622,18 @@ preamble: Synopsis: \begin{center} - ... text ... + line1 \\ + line2 \\ + ... \end{center} Create a new paragraph consisting of a sequence of lines that are -centered within the left and right margins on the current page. Use -double-backslash to get a line break at a particular spot (see \\). +centered within the left and right margins. Use +double-backslash, \\, to get a line break (see \\). \\ (for center) -If some text environment body is too long to fit on a line, &latex; -will insert line breaks that avoid hyphenation and avoid stretching or -shrinking any interword space. +If some text is too long to fit on a line then &latex; will insert line +breaks that avoid hyphenation and avoid stretching or shrinking any +interword space. This environment inserts space above and below the text body. See \centering to avoid such space, for example inside a figure @@ -2982,7 +3660,11 @@ ending. I grew up in that belief. --Richard Burton \end{center} -A double backslash after the final line is optional. +A double backslash after the final line is optional. If present it +doesn’t add any vertical space. + +In a two-column document the text is centered in a column, not in the +entire page. @@ -2992,12 +3674,34 @@ ending. \centering centering text, declaration for -A declaration that causes material in its scope to be centered. It is -most often used inside an environment such as figure, or in a -parbox. + +Synopsis: + +{\centering ... } + +or + +\begin{group} + \centering ... +\end{group} + +Center the material in its scope. It is most often used inside an +environment such as figure, or in a parbox. + +This example’s \centering declaration causes the graphic to be +horizontally centered. + +\begin{figure} + \centering + \includegraphics[width=0.6\textwidth]{ctan_lion.png} + \caption{CTAN Lion} \label{fig:CTANLion} +\end{figure} + +The scope of this \centering ends with the \end{figure}. Unlike the center environment, the \centering command does -not add vertical space above and below the text. +not add vertical space above and below the text. That’s its advantage +in the above example; there is not an excess of space. It also does not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how &latex; formats paragraph units. If ww {\centering xx \\ yy} zz is @@ -3009,18 +3713,7 @@ environment such as figure or table that e paragraph unit. Thus, if {\centering xx \\ yy\par} zz is surrounded by blank lines then it makes a new paragraph with two centered lines ‘xx’ and ‘yy’, followed by a new paragraph with -‘zz’ that is formatted as usual. See also the following example. - -This example’s \centering causes the graphic to be horizontally -centered. - -\begin{figure} - \centering - \includegraphics[width=0.6\textwidth]{ctan_lion.png} - \caption{CTAN Lion} \label{fig:CTANLion} -\end{figure} - -The scope of the \centering ends with the \end{figure}. +‘zz’ that is formatted as usual. @@ -3037,26 +3730,27 @@ centered. Synopsis: \begin{description} -\item[label of first item] text of first item -\item[label of second item] text of second item - ... + \item[label of first item] text of first item + \item[label of second item] text of second item + ... \end{description} -Environment to make a labeled list of items. Each item’s label is -typeset in bold, and is flush left so that long labels continue into the +Environment to make a list of labeled items. Each item’s label is +typeset in bold and is flush left, so that long labels continue into the first line of the item text. There must be at least one item; having none causes the &latex; error ‘Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item’. This example shows the environment used for a sequence of definitions. -The labels ‘lama’ and ‘llama’ come out in boldface with their -left edges aligned on the left margin. \begin{definition} \item[lama] A priest. \item[llama] A beast. \end{definition} +The labels ‘lama’ and ‘llama’ are output in boldface, with the +left edge on the left margin. + \item Start list items with the \item command (see \item). Use the optional labels, as in \item[Main point], because there is @@ -3069,10 +3763,10 @@ may contain multiple paragraphs. change given in argument style (see Font styles) then it will come out bold. For instance, if the label text calls for typewriter with \item[\texttt{label text}] then it will appear in bold -typewriter, if that is available. The simplest way to get non-bold -typewriter is to use declarative style: \item[{\tt label -text}]. Similarly, get the standard roman font with \item[{\rm -label text}]. +typewriter, if that is available. The simplest way around this, in this +example to get non-bold typewriter, is to use declarative style: +\item[{\tt label text}]. Similarly, get the standard roman +font with \item[{\rm label text}]. For other major &latex; labelled list environments, see itemize and enumerate. Unlike those environments, nesting @@ -3102,7 +3796,7 @@ lists. Synopsis: \begin{displaymath} -math text + mathematical text \end{displaymath} Environment to typeset the math text on its own line, in display style @@ -3136,10 +3830,12 @@ different vertical spacing, and because the displaymath environment honors the fleqn option.) The output from this example is centered and alone on its line. -\begin{displaymath} + +\begin{displaymath} \int_1^2 x^2\,dx=7/3 \end{displaymath} -Also, the integral sign is larger than the inline version + +Also, the integral sign is larger than the inline version \( \int_1^2 x^2\,dx=7/3 \) produces. @@ -3211,9 +3907,9 @@ will be executed in the order that you gave them. Synopsis: \begin{enumerate} -\item[optional label of first item] text of first item -\item[optional label of second item] text of second item -... + \item[optional label of first item] text of first item + \item[optional label of second item] text of second item + ... \end{enumerate} Environment to produce a numbered list of items. The format of the @@ -3248,15 +3944,15 @@ default for the format at each nesting level, where 1 is the top level, the outermost level. arabic number followed by a period: ‘1.’, ‘2.’, … -lower case letter inside parentheses: ‘(a)’, ‘(b)’ … -lower case roman numeral followed by a period: ‘i.’, ‘ii.’, … -upper case letter followed by a period: ‘A.’, ‘B.’, … +lowercase letter inside parentheses: ‘(a)’, ‘(b)’ … +lowercase roman numeral followed by a period: ‘i.’, ‘ii.’, … +uppercase letter followed by a period: ‘A.’, ‘B.’, … \enumi \enumii \enumiii \enumiv -The enumerate environment uses the counters \enumi through +The enumerate environment uses the counters \enumi through \enumiv (see Counters). For other major &latex; labeled list environments, see @@ -3269,7 +3965,7 @@ useful for customizing lists. \labelenumii \labelenumiii \labelenumiv -To change the format of the label use \renewcommand +To change the format of the label use \renewcommand (see \newcommand & \renewcommand) on the commands \labelenumi through \labelenumiv. For instance, this first level list will be labelled with uppercase letters, in boldface, and without a trailing @@ -3299,17 +3995,16 @@ period. align environment, from amsmath amsmath package, replacing eqnarray Madsen, Lars -First, a caveat: the eqnarray environment is depreciated. It has -infelicities that cannot be overcome, including spacing that is -inconsistent with other mathematics elements (see the article “Avoid -eqnarray!” by Lars Madsen +The eqnarray environment is obsolete. It has infelicities, +including spacing that is inconsistent with other mathematics elements. +(See “Avoid eqnarray!” by Lars Madsen http://tug.org/TUGboat/tb33-1/tb103madsen.pdf). New documents should include the amsmath package and use the displayed mathematics environments provided there, such as the align -environment. +environment. We include a description only for completeness and for +working with old documents. -Nevertheless, for completeness and for a reference when working with old -documents, a synopsis: +Synopsis: \begin{eqnarray} first formula left &first formula middle &first formula right \\ @@ -3370,21 +4065,22 @@ while the third line has not entry on the left side. Synopsis: \begin{equation} - math text + mathematical text \end{equation} -Make a displaymath environment (see displaymath) with an -equation number in the right margin. - -The equation number is generated using the equation counter. +The same as a displaymath environment (see displaymath) +except that &latex; puts an equation number flush to the right margin. +The equation number is generated using the equation counter. You should have no blank lines between \begin{equation} and \begin{equation}, or &latex; will tell you that there is a -missing dollar sign, $$. +missing dollar sign. -Note that the amsmath package has extensive displayed equation -facilities. Those facilities are the best approach for such output in -new documents. +package, amsmath +amsmath package + +The package amsmath package has extensive displayed equation +facilities. New documents should include this package. @@ -3400,26 +4096,33 @@ new documents. Synopsis: \begin{figure}[placement] - figure body -\caption[loftitle]{title} -\label{label} + figure body + \caption[loftitle]{title} % optional + \label{label} % optional \end{figure} -or +or: \begin{figure*}[placement] - figure body -\caption[loftitle]{title} -\label{label} + figure body + \caption[loftitle]{title} % optional + \label{label} % optional \end{figure*} -A class of floats (see Floats). Because they cannot be split across -pages, they are not typeset in sequence with the normal text but instead -are “floated” to a convenient place, such as the top of a following -page. +Figures are for material that is not part of the normal text. An +example is material that you cannot have split between two pages, such +as a graphic. Because of this, &latex; does not typeset figures in +sequence with normal text but instead “floats” them to a convenient +place, such as the top of a following page (see Floats). -For the possible values of placement and their effect on the -float placement algorithm, see Floats. +The figure body can consist of imported graphics +(see Graphics), or text, &latex; commands, etc. It is typeset in a +parbox of width \textwidth. + +The possible values of placement are h for ‘here’, +t for ‘top’, b for ‘bottom’, and p for +‘on a separate page of floats’. For the effect of these options on +the float placement algorithm, see Floats. The starred form figure* is used when a document is in double-column mode (see \twocolumn). It produces a figure that @@ -3427,23 +4130,21 @@ spans both columns, at the top of the page. To add the possibility of placing at a page bottom see the discussion of placement b in Floats. -The figure body is typeset in a parbox of width \textwidth -and so it can contain text, commands, etc. - The label is optional; it is used for cross references (see Cross references). \caption The optional \caption command specifies caption text for the figure. By default it is numbered. If loftitle is present, it is -used in the list of figures instead of title (see Tables of -contents). +used in the list of figures instead of title (see Table of +contents etc.). -This example makes a figure out of a graphic. It requires one of the -packages graphics or graphicx. The graphic, with its -caption, will be placed at the top of a page or, if it is pushed to the +This example makes a figure out of a graphic. &latex; will place that +graphic and its caption at the top of a page or, if it is pushed to the end of the document, on a page of floats. -\begin{figure}[t] +\usepackage{graphicx} % in preamble + ... +\begin{figure}[t] \centering \includegraphics[width=0.5\textwidth]{CTANlion.png} \caption{The CTAN lion, by Duane Bibby} @@ -3522,17 +4223,34 @@ Article by \myname. left-justifying text, environment for ragged right text, environment for +Synopsis: + \begin{flushleft} -line1 \\ -line2 \\ -... + line1 \\ + line2 \\ + ... \end{flushleft} \\ for flushleft -The flushleft environment allows you to create a paragraph -consisting of lines that are flush to the left-hand margin and ragged -right. Each line must be terminated with the string \\. - +An environment that creates a paragraph whose lines are flush to the +left-hand margin, and ragged right. If you have lines that are too long +then &latex; will linebreak them in a way that avoids hyphenation and +stretching or shrinking spaces. To force a new line use a double +backslash, \\. For the declaration form +see \raggedright. + +This creates a box of text that is at most 3 inches wide, with the text +flush left and ragged right. + +\noindent\begin{minipage}{3in} +\begin{flushleft} + A long sentence that will be broken by \LaTeX{} + at a convenient spot. \\ + And, a fresh line forced by the double backslash. +\end{flushleft} +\end{minipage} + + @@ -3543,9 +4261,20 @@ right. Each line must be terminated with the string \\. left-justifying text justification, ragged right -The \raggedright declaration corresponds to the -flushleft environment. This declaration can be used inside an -environment such as quote or in a parbox. +Synopses: + +{\raggedright ... } + +or + +\begin{environment} \raggedright + ... +\end{environment} + +A declaration which causes lines to be flush to the left margin and +ragged right. It can be used inside an environment such as quote +or in a parbox. For the environment form +see flushleft. Unlike the flushleft environment, the \raggedright command does not start a new paragraph; it only changes how &latex; @@ -3553,6 +4282,17 @@ formats paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit’s format, the scope of the declaration must contain the blank line or \end command that ends the paragraph unit. +Here \raggedright in each second column keeps &latex; from doing +very awkward typesetting to fit the text into the narrow column. Note +that \raggedright is inside the curly braces {...} to +delimit its effect. + +\begin{tabular}{rp{2in}} + Team alpha &{\raggedright This team does all the real work.} \\ + Team beta &{\raggedright This team ensures that the water + cooler is never empty.} \\ +\end{tabular} + @@ -3566,15 +4306,20 @@ command that ends the paragraph unit. right-justifying text, environment for \begin{flushright} -line1 \\ -line2 \\ -... + line1 \\ + line2 \\ + ... \end{flushright} \\ (for flushright) -The flushright environment allows you to create a paragraph -consisting of lines that are flush to the right-hand margin and ragged -left. Each line must be terminated with the control sequence \\. +An environment that creates a paragraph whose lines are flush to the +right-hand margin and ragged left. If you have lines that are too long +to fit the margins then &latex; will linebreak them in a way that +avoids hyphenation and stretching or shrinking spaces. To force a new +line use a double backslash, \\. For the declaration form +see \raggedleft. + +For an example related to this environment, see flushleft. @@ -3586,9 +4331,20 @@ left. Each line must be terminated with the control sequence \\justification, ragged left right-justifying text -The \raggedleft declaration corresponds to the -flushright environment. This declaration can be used inside an -environment such as quote or in a parbox. +Synopses: + +{\raggedleft ... } + +or + +\begin{environment} \raggedleft + ... +\end{environment} + +A declaration which causes lines to be flush to the right margin and +ragged left. It can be used inside an environment such as quote +or in a parbox. For the environment form +see flushright. Unlike the flushright environment, the \raggedleft command does not start a new paragraph; it only changes how &latex; @@ -3596,6 +4352,8 @@ formats paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit’s format, the scope of the declaration must contain the blank line or \end command that ends the paragraph unit. +For an example related to this environment, see \raggedright. + @@ -3609,29 +4367,30 @@ command that ends the paragraph unit. lists of items unordered lists bulleted lists +bullet lists Synopsis: \begin{itemize} -\item[optional label of first item] text of first item -\item[optional label of second item] text of second item -... + \item[optional label of first item] text of first item + \item[optional label of second item] text of second item + ... \end{itemize} -The itemize environment produces an “unordered”, “bulleted” -list. The format of the label numbering depends on the nesting level of -this environment; see below. Each itemize list environment must -have at least one item; having none causes the &latex; error -‘Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item’. +Produce a list that is unordered, sometimes called a bullet list. The +environment must have at least one \item; having none causes the +&latex; error ‘Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item’. -This example gives a two-item list. As a top-level list each label -would come out as a bullet, •. +This gives a two-item list. \begin{itemize} \item Pencil and watercolor sketch by Cassandra \item Rice portrait \end{itemize} +As a top-level list each label would come out as a bullet, •. +The format of the labeling depends on the nesting level; see below. + \item Start list items with the \item command (see \item). If you give \item an optional argument by following it with square @@ -3645,11 +4404,11 @@ contain multiple paragraphs. \labelitemii \labelitemiii \labelitemiv -Itemized lists can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep. +Itemized lists can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep. They can also be nested within other paragraph-making environments, such as enumerate (see enumerate). The itemize environment uses the commands \labelitemi through \labelitemiv to -produce the default label (this also uses the convention of lower case +produce the default label (this also uses the convention of lowercase roman numerals at the end of the command names that signify the nesting level). These are the default marks at each level. @@ -3670,10 +4429,10 @@ the first level use diamonds. \leftmarginiv \leftmarginv \leftmarginvi -The distance between the left margin of the enclosing environment and +The distance between the left margin of the enclosing environment and the left margin of the itemize list is determined by the parameters \leftmargini through \leftmarginvi. (Note the -convention of using lower case roman numerals a the end of the command +convention of using lowercase roman numerals a the end of the command name to denote the nesting level.) The defaults are: 2.5em in level 1 (2em in two-column mode), 2.2em in level 2, 1.87em in level 3, and 1.7em in level 4, with smaller @@ -3695,7 +4454,7 @@ lists. space between items. Here is an example defining an itemize* environment with no extra spacing between items, or between paragraphs within a single item (\parskip is not list-specific, -see \parskip): +see \parindent & \parskip): \newenvironment{itemize*}% {\begin{itemize}% @@ -3728,34 +4487,33 @@ see \parskip): Synopsis: \begin{list}{labeling}{spacing} -\item[optional label of first item] text of first item -\item[optional label of second item] text of second item -... + \item[optional label of first item] text of first item + \item[optional label of second item] text of second item + ... \end{list} -The list environment is a generic environment for constructing -more specialized lists. It is most often used to create lists via the -description, enumerate, and itemize environments -(see description, enumerate, and itemize). +An environment for constructing lists. -Also, many standard &latex; environments that are not visually lists -are constructed using list, including quotation, -quote, center, verbatim, and plenty more -(see quotation and quote, see center, see flushright). +Note that this environment does not typically appear in the document +body. Most lists created by &latex; authors are the ones that come +standard: the description, enumerate, and itemize +environments (see description, enumerate, and itemize). -package, enumitem -enumitem package - -The third-party package enumitem is useful for customizing lists. -Here, we describe the list environment by defining a new custom +Instead, the list environment is most often used in macros. For +example, many standard &latex; environments that do not immediately +appear to be lists are in fact constructed using list, including +quotation, quote, and center (see quotation & +quote, see center). + +This uses the list environment to define a new custom environment. \newcounter{namedlistcounter} % number the items \newenvironment{named} {\begin{list} - {Item~\Roman{namedlistcounter}.} % labeling argument - {\usecounter{namedlistcounter} % spacing argument - \setlength{\leftmargin}{3.5em}} % still spacing arg + {Item~\Roman{namedlistcounter}.} % labeling + {\usecounter{namedlistcounter} % set counter + \setlength{\leftmargin}{3.5em}} % set spacing } {\end{list}} @@ -3765,54 +4523,55 @@ environment. \item Shows as ``Item~II.'' \end{named} -The list environment’s mandatory first argument, -labeling, specifies the default labeling of list items. It can -contain text and &latex; commands, as above where it contains both -‘Item’ and ‘\Roman{...}’. &latex; forms the label by -putting the labeling argument in a box of width -\labelwidth. If the label is wider than that, the additional -material extends to the right. When making an instance of a list you -can override the default labeling by giving \item an optional -argument by including square braces and the text, as in the above -\item[Special label.]; see \item. +The mandatory first argument labeling specifies the default +labeling of list items. It can contain text and &latex; commands, as +above where it contains both ‘Item’ and ‘\Roman{...}’. +&latex; forms the label by putting the labeling argument in a box +of width \labelwidth. If the label is wider than that, the +additional material extends to the right. When making an instance of a +list you can override the default labeling by giving \item an +optional argument by including square braces and the text, as in the +above \item[Special label.]; see \item. + +The mandatory second argument spacing has a list of commands. +This list can be empty. A command that can go in here is +\usecounter{countername} (see \usecounter). Use this +to tell &latex; to number the items using the given counter. The +counter will be reset to zero each time &latex; enters the environment, +and the counter is incremented by one each time &latex; encounters an +\item that does not have an optional argument. \makelabel -The label box is constructed by the command \makelabel. By -default it positions the contents flush right. It takes one argument, -the label. It typesets the contents in LR mode. An example of changing -its definition is that to the above example before the definition of the -named environment add +Another command that can go in spacing is +\makelabel, which constructs the label box. By default it puts +the contents flush right. Its only argument is the label, which it +typesets in LR mode (see Modes). One example of changing its +definition is that to the above named example, before the +definition of the environment add \newcommand{\namedmakelabel}[1]{\textsc{#1}}, and between the \setlength command and the parenthesis that closes the spacing argument also add \let\makelabel\namedmakelabel. Then the items will be typeset in small caps. Similarly, changing the second code line to \let\makelabel\fbox puts the labels inside a -framed box. Another example is at the bottom of this entry. - -The mandatory second argument spacing can have a list of -commands to redefine the spacing parameters for the list, such as -\setlength{\labelwidth}{2em}. If this argument is empty, -i.e., {}, then the list will have the default spacing given -below. To number the items using a counter, put -\usecounter{countername} in this argument -(see \usecounter). - -Below are the spacing parameters for list formatting. See also the -figure below. Each is a length (see Lengths). The vertical -spaces are normally rubber lengths, with plus and minus -components, to give &tex; flexibility in setting the page. Change -each with a command such as \setlength{itemsep}{2pt plus1pt -minus1pt}. For some effects these lengths should be zero or -negative. Default values for derived environments such as -itemize can be changed from the values shown here for the basic -list. +framed box. Another example of the \makelabel command is below, +in the definition of the redlabel environment. + +Also often in spacing are commands to redefine the spacing for the +list. Below are the spacing parameters with their default values. +(Default values for derived environments such as itemize can be +different than the values shown here.) See also the figure that follows +the list. Each is a length (see Lengths). The vertical spaces are +normally rubber lengths, with plus and minus components, +to give &tex; flexibility in setting the page. Change each with a +command such as \setlength{itemsep}{2pt plus1pt minus1pt}. +For some effects these lengths should be zero or negative. \itemindent\itemindent -Extra horizontal space indentation, beyond leftmargin, of the +Extra horizontal space indentation, beyond leftmargin, of the first line each item. Its default value is 0pt. \itemsep\itemsep -Vertical space between items, beyond the \parsep. The defaults +Vertical space between items, beyond the \parsep. The defaults for the first three levels in &latex;’s ‘article’, ‘book’, and ‘report’ classes at 10 point size are: 4pt plus2pt minus1pt, \parsep (that is, 2pt plus1pt minus1pt), and @@ -3824,12 +4583,12 @@ minus1pt, \parsep (that is, 2.5pt plus1pt \topsep (that is, 2.5pt plus1pt minus1pt). \labelsep\labelsep -Horizontal space between the label and text of an item. +Horizontal space between the label and text of an item. The default for &latex;’s ‘article’, ‘book’, and ‘report’ classes is 0.5em. \labelwidth\labelwidth -Horizontal width. The box containing the label is nominally this wide. +Horizontal width. The box containing the label is nominally this wide. If \makelabel returns text that is wider than this then the first line of the item will be indented to make room for this extra material. If \makelabel returns text of width less than or equal to @@ -3850,7 +4609,7 @@ label’s left edge coincide with the left margin of the enclosing environment. \leftmargin\leftmargin -Horizontal space between the left margin of the enclosing environment +Horizontal space between the left margin of the enclosing environment (or the left margin of the page if this is a top-level list), and the left margin of this list. It must be non-negative. @@ -3867,13 +4626,13 @@ error message ‘Too deeply nested’.) 2.2em, and \leftmarginiii is 1.87em. \listparindent\listparindent -Horizontal space of additional line indentation, beyond +Horizontal space of additional line indentation, beyond \leftmargin, for second and subsequent paragraphs within a list item. A negative value makes this an “outdent”. Its default value is 0pt. \parsep\parsep -Vertical space between paragraphs within an item. In the ‘book’ +Vertical space between paragraphs within an item. In the ‘book’ and ‘article’ classes The defaults for the first three levels in &latex;’s ‘article’, ‘book’, and ‘report’ classes at 10 point size are: 4pt plus2pt minus1pt, 2pt plus1pt @@ -3883,7 +4642,7 @@ minus1pt, and 0pt. The defaults at 11 point size a minus1pt, 2.5pt plus1pt minus1pt, and 0pt. \partopsep\partopsep -Vertical space added, beyond \topsep+\parskip, to the top +Vertical space added, beyond \topsep+\parskip, to the top and bottom of the entire environment if the list instance is preceded by a blank line. (A blank line in the &latex; source before the list changes spacing at both the top and bottom of the list; whether the line @@ -3898,20 +4657,20 @@ defaults at 12 point are: 3pt plus2pt minus3pt, 3pt minus2pt, and 1pt plus0pt minus1pt. \rightmargin\rightmargin -Horizontal space between the right margin of the list and the right +Horizontal space between the right margin of the list and the right margin of the enclosing environment. Its default value is 0pt. It must be non-negative. \topsep\topsep -Vertical space added to both the top and bottom of the list, in addition -to \parskip (see \parskip). The defaults for the first three -levels in &latex;’s ‘article’, ‘book’, and ‘report’ -classes at 10 point size are: 8pt plus2pt minus4pt, 4pt -plus2pt minus1pt, and 2pt plus1pt minus1pt. The defaults at 11 -point are: 9pt plus3pt minus5pt, 4.5pt plus2pt minus1pt, -and 2pt plus1pt minus1pt. The defaults at 12 point are: -10pt plus4pt minus6pt, 5pt plus2.5pt minus1pt, and -2.5pt plus1pt minus1pt. +Vertical space added to both the top and bottom of the list, in addition +to \parskip (see \parindent & \parskip). The defaults for +the first three levels in &latex;’s ‘article’, ‘book’, and +‘report’ classes at 10 point size are: 8pt plus2pt minus4pt, +4pt plus2pt minus1pt, and 2pt plus1pt minus1pt. The +defaults at 11 point are: 9pt plus3pt minus5pt, 4.5pt +plus2pt minus1pt, and 2pt plus1pt minus1pt. The defaults at 12 +point are: 10pt plus4pt minus6pt, 5pt plus2.5pt minus1pt, +and 2.5pt plus1pt minus1pt. This shows the horizontal and vertical distances. @@ -3956,6 +4715,9 @@ the list environment does not start a new paragraph, and appears in the source above the environment; whether a blank line appears in the source below the environment does not matter.) +h0 +\labelwidth + h1 \labelsep @@ -3989,17 +4751,23 @@ e.g., \@beginparpenalty=9999; a value of 10000 prohibits a page break. \@beginparpenalty\@beginparpenalty -The page breaking penalty for breaking before the list (default -51). +The page breaking penalty for breaking before the list (default -51). \@itempenalty\@itempenalty -The page breaking penalty for breaking before a list item (default -51). +The page breaking penalty for breaking before a list item (default -51). \@endparpenalty\@endparpenalty -The page breaking penalty for breaking after a list (default -51). +The page breaking penalty for breaking after a list (default -51). +package, enumitem +enumitem package + +The package enumitem is useful for customizing lists. + This example has the labels in red. They are numbered, and the left edge of the label lines up with the left edge of the item text. +See \usecounter. \usepackage{color} \newcounter{cnt} @@ -4027,7 +4795,8 @@ edge of the label lines up with the left edge of the item text. \item text of item or -\item[optional-label] text of item + +\item[optional-label] text of item An entry in a list. The entries are prefixed by a label, whose default depends on the list type. @@ -4130,24 +4899,114 @@ See Math formulas. minipage, creating a +Synopses: + +\begin{minipage}{width} + contents +\end{minipage} + +or + \begin{minipage}[position][height][inner-pos]{width} -text + contents +\end{minipage} + +Put contents into a box that is width wide. This is like a +small version of a page; it can contain its own footnotes, itemized +lists, etc. (There are some restrictions, including that it cannot have +floats.) This box will not be broken across pages. So minipage +is similar to \parbox (see \parbox) but here you can have +paragraphs. + +This example will be 3 inches wide, and has two paragraphs. + +\begin{minipage}{3in} + Stephen Kleene was a founder of the Theory of Computation. + + He was a student of Church, wrote three influential texts, + was President of the Association for Symbolic Logic, + and won the National Medal of Science. +\end{minipage} + +See below for a discussion of the paragraph indent inside a +minipage. + +The required argument width is a rigid length (see Lengths). +It gives the width of the box into which contents are typeset. + +There are three optional arguments, position, height, and +inner-pos. You need not include all three. For example, get the +default position and set the height with +\begin{minipage}[c][2.54cm] contents \end{minipage}. +(Get the natural height with an empty argument, [].) + +The optional argument position governs how the minipage +vertically aligns with the surrounding material. + +c +(synonym m) Default. Positions the minipage so its +vertical center lines up with the center of the adjacent text line (what +Plain &tex; calls \vcenter). + +t +Match the top line in the minipage with the baseline of the +surrounding text (Plain &tex;’s \vtop. + +b +Match the bottom line in the minipage with the baseline of the +surrounding text (Plain &tex;’s \vbox. + +To see the effects of these, contrast running this + +---\begin{minipage}[c]{0.25in} + first\\ second\\ third \end{minipage} -The minipage environment typesets its body text in a -block that will not be broken across pages. This is similar to the -\parbox command (see \parbox), but unlike \parbox, -other paragraph-making environments can be used inside a minipage. +with the results of changing c to b or t. + +The optional argument height is a rigid length (see Lengths). +It sets the height of the minipage. You can enter any value +larger than, or equal to, or smaller than the minipage’s natural +height and &latex; will not give an error or warning. You can also set +it to a height of zero or a negative value. + +The final optional argument inner-pos controls the placement of +content inside the box. These are the possible values are (the +default is the value of position). + +t +Place content at the top of the box. + +c +Place it in the vertical center. - -The arguments are the same as for \parbox (see \parbox). +b +Place it at the box bottom. + +s +Stretch contents out vertically; it must contain vertically +stretchable space. + + +The inner-pos argument makes sense when the height options +is set to a value larger than the minipage’s natural height. To +see the effect of the options, run this example with the various choices +in place of b. +Text before +\begin{center} + ---\begin{minipage}[c][3in][b]{0.25\textwidth} + first\\ second\\ third + \end{minipage} +\end{center} +Text after + indentation of paragraphs, in minipage paragraph indentation, in minipage \parindent -By default, paragraphs are not indented in the minipage -environment. You can restore indentation with a command such as -\setlength{\parindent}{1pc} command. +By default paragraphs are not indented in a minipage. Change +that with a command such as \setlength{\parindent}{1pc} at +the start of contents. footnotes in figures figures, footnotes in @@ -4158,9 +5017,46 @@ the bottom of the minipage instead of at the bottom of the page, and it uses the \mpfootnote counter instead of the ordinary footnote counter (see Counters). -However, don’t put one minipage inside another if you are using -footnotes; they may wind up at the bottom of the wrong minipage. +This puts the footnote at the bottom of the table, not the bottom of the +page. + +\begin{center} % center the minipage on the line +\begin{minipage}{2.5in} + \begin{center} % center the table inside the minipage + \begin{tabular}{ll} + \textsc{Monarch} &\textsc{Reign} \\ \hline + Elizabeth II &63 years\footnote{to date} \\ + Victoria &63 years \\ + George III &59 years + \end{tabular} + \end{center} +\end{minipage} +\end{center} + +If you nest minipages then there is an oddness when using footnotes. +Footnotes appear at the bottom of the text ended by the next +\end{minipage} which may not be their logical place. + +This puts a table containing data side by side with a map graphic. They +are vertically centered. +\newcommand*{\vcenteredhbox}[1]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}#1\end{tabular}} + ... +\begin{center} + \vcenteredhbox{\includegraphics[width=0.3\textwidth]{nyc.png}} + \hspace{0.1\textwidth} + \begin{minipage}{0.5\textwidth} + \begin{tabular}{r|l} + \multicolumn{1}{r}{Borough} &Pop (million) \\ \hline + The Bronx &$1.5$ \\ + Brooklyn &$2.6$ \\ + Manhattan &$1.6$ \\ + Queens &$2.3$ \\ + Staten Island &$0.5$ + \end{tabular} + \end{minipage} +\end{center} + @@ -4172,447 +5068,728 @@ footnotes; they may wind up at the bottom of the wrong minipage. creating pictures pictures, creating +Synopses: +\begin{picture}(width,height) + picture commands +\end{picture} + +or + \begin{picture}(width,height)(xoffset,yoffset) -… picture commands … + picture commands \end{picture} +An environment to create simple pictures containing lines, arrows, +boxes, circles, and text. Note that while this environment is not +obsolete, new documents typically use much more powerful graphics +creation systems, such as TikZ, PSTricks, MetaPost, +or Asymptote. These are not covered in this document; see CTAN. + +This shows the parallelogram law for adding vectors. + \unitlength -The picture environment allows you to create just about any -kind of picture you want containing text, lines, arrows and circles. -You tell &latex; where to put things in the picture by specifying -their coordinates. A coordinate is a number that may have a decimal -point and a minus sign—a number like 5, 0.3 or --3.1416. A coordinate specifies a length in multiples of the -unit length \unitlength, so if \unitlength has been set -to 1cm, then the coordinate 2.54 specifies a length of 2.54 -centimeters. +\setlength{\unitlength}{1cm} +\begin{picture}(6,6) % picture box will be 6cm wide by 6cm tall + \put(0,0){\vector(2,1){4}} % for every 2 over this vector goes 1 up + \put(2,1){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\ first leg}} + \put(4,2){\vector(1,2){2}} + \put(5,4){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\ second leg}} + \put(0,0){\line(1,1){6}} + \put(3,3){\makebox(0,0)[r]{sum\ }} +\end{picture} + +You can also use this environment to place arbitrary material at an +exact location. -You should only change the value of \unitlength, using the -\setlength command, outside of a picture environment. -The default value is 1pt. +\usepackage{color,graphicx} % in preamble + ... +\begin{center} +\setlength{\unitlength}{\textwidth} +\begin{picture}(1,1) % leave space, \textwidth wide and tall + \put(0,0){\includegraphics[width=\textwidth]{desertedisland.jpg}} + \put(0.25,0.35){\textcolor{red}{X Treasure here}} +\end{picture} +\end{center} + +The red X will be precisely a quarter of the \linewidth from +the left margin, and 0.35\linewidth up from the bottom. Another +example of this usage is to put similar code in the page header to get +repeat material on each of a document’s pages. -package, picture -picture package - -The picture package redefine the picture environment so -that everywhere a number is used in a picture commands to specify -a coordinate, one can use alternatively a length. Be aware however that -this will prevent scaling those lengths by changing \unitlength. +The picture environment has one required argument, a pair of +numbers (width,height). Multiply these by the value +\unitlength to get the nominal size of the output, the space that +&latex; reserves on the output page. This nominal size need not be how +large the picture really is; &latex; will draw things from the picture +outside the picture’s box. - -position, in picture -A position is a pair of coordinates, such as (2.4,-5), specifying -the point with x-coordinate 2.4 and y-coordinate -5. -Coordinates are specified in the usual way with respect to an origin, -which is normally at the lower-left corner of the picture. Note that -when a position appears as an argument, it is not enclosed in braces; -the parentheses serve to delimit the argument. - -The picture environment has one mandatory argument which is a -position (width,height), which specifies the size of the -picture. The environment produces a rectangular box with these -width and height. - -The picture environment also has an optional position argument -(xoffset,yoffset), following the size argument, that can -change the origin. (Unlike ordinary optional arguments, this argument -is not contained in square brackets.) The optional argument gives the -coordinates of the point at the lower-left corner of the picture -(thereby determining the origin). For example, if \unitlength -has been set to 1mm, the command +This environment also has an optional argument +(xoffset,yoffset). It is used to shift the origin. Unlike +most optional arguments, this one is not contained in square brackets. +As with the required argument, it consists of two real numbers. +Multiply these by \unitlength to get the point at the lower-left +corner of the picture. + +For example, if \unitlength has been set to 1mm, the +command \begin{picture}(100,200)(10,20) -produces a picture of width 100 millimeters and height 200 -millimeters, whose lower-left corner is the point (10,20) and whose -upper-right corner is therefore the point (110,220). When you first -draw a picture, you typically omit the optional argument, leaving the -origin at the lower-left corner. If you then want to modify your +produces a box of width 100 millimeters and height 200 millimeters. The +picture’s origin is the point (10mm,20mm) and so the lower-left corner +is there, and the upper-right corner is at (110mm,220mm). When you +first draw a picture you typically omit the optional argument, leaving +the origin at the lower-left corner. If you then want to modify your picture by shifting everything, you can just add the appropriate optional argument. -The environment’s mandatory argument determines the nominal size of the -picture. This need bear no relation to how large the picture really is; -&latex; will happily allow you to put things outside the picture, or even -off the page. The picture’s nominal size is used by &latex; in determining -how much room to leave for it. - -Everything that appears in a picture is drawn by the \put -command. The command +position, in picture +Each picture command tells &latex; where to put something by +naming its position. A position is a pair such as (2.4,-5) +giving the x- and y-coordinates. A coordinate is a not a length, +it is a real number (it may have a decimal point or a minus sign). It +specifies a length in multiples of the unit length \unitlength, +so if \unitlength has been set to 1cm, then the coordinate +2.54 specifies a length of 2.54 centimeters. + +&latex;’s default for \unitlength is 1pt. it is a rigid +length (see Lengths). Change it with the \setlength command +(see \setlength). Make this change only outside of a picture +environment. -\put (11.3,-.3){...} +Coordinates are given with respect to an origin, which is normally at +the lower-left corner of the picture. Note that when a position appears +as an argument, as with \put(1,2){...}, it is not enclosed in +braces since the parentheses serve to delimit the argument. Also, +unlike in some computer graphics systems, larger y-coordinates are +further up the page. + +There are four ways to put things in a picture: \put, +\multiput, \qbezier, and \graphpaper. The most +often used is \put. This + +\put(11.3,-0.3){...} + +places the object with its reference point at coordinates +(11.3,-0.3). The reference points for various objects will be +described below. +LR box +The \put command creates an LR box (see Modes). +Anything that can go in an \mbox (see \mbox & \makebox) can +go in the text argument of the \put command. The reference point +will be the lower left corner of the box. In this picture + +\setlength{\unitlength}{1cm} +...\begin{picture}(1,1) + \put(0,0){\line(1,0){1}} + \put(0,0){\line(1,1){1}} +\end{picture} + +the three dots are just slightly left of the point of the angle formed +by the two lines. (Also, \line(1,1){1} does not call for a +line of length one; rather the line has a change in the x coordinate of +1.) + +The \multiput, qbezier, and graphpaper commands are +described below. + +This draws a rectangle with a wavy top, using \qbezier for +that curve. + +\begin{picture}(3,1.5) + \put(0,0){\vector(1,0){8}} % x axis + \put(0,0){\vector(0,1){4}} % y axis + \put(2,0){\line(0,1){3}} % left side rectangle + \put(4,0){\line(0,1){3.5}} % right side + \qbezier(2,3)(2.5,2.9)(3,3.25) + \qbezier(3,3.25)(3.5,3.6)(4,3.5) + \thicklines % below here, lines are twice as thick + \put(2,3){\line(4,1){2}} + \put(4.5,2.5){\framebox{Trapezoidal Rule}} +\end{picture} -puts the object specified by ... in the -picture, with its reference point at coordinates (11.3,-.3). -The reference points for various objects will be described below. - -lR box -The \put command creates an LR box. You can put anything -that can go in an \mbox (see \mbox) in the text argument of -the \put command. When you do this, the reference point will -be the lower left corner of the box. - -The picture commands are described in the following sections. - - -<literal>\circle</literal> + +<literal>\put</literal> -\circle +\put Synopsis: -\circle[*]{diameter} +\put(xcoord,ycoord){content} -The \circle command produces a circle with a diameter as close -to the specified one as possible. The *-form of the command -draws a solid circle. +Place content at the coordinate (xcoord,ycoord). See +the discussion of coordinates and \unitlength in picture. +The content is processed in LR mode (see Modes) so it cannot +contain line breaks. + +This includes the text into the picture. -Circles up to 40pt can be drawn. +\put(4.5,2.5){Apply the \textit{unpoke} move} + +The reference point, the location (4.5,2.5), is the lower left of the +text, at the bottom left of the ‘A’. - -<literal>\makebox</literal> + +<literal>\multiput</literal> -\makebox (for picture) +\multiput Synopsis: -\makebox(width,height)[position]{text} +\multiput(x,y)(delta_x,delta_y){num-copies}{obj} -The \makebox command for the picture environment is similar to -the normal \makebox command except that you must specify a -width and height in multiples of \unitlength. - -The optional argument, [position], specifies the quadrant that -your text appears in. You may select up to two of the following: - -t -Moves the item to the top of the rectangle. - -b -Moves the item to the bottom. - -l -Moves the item to the left. - -r -Moves the item to the right. +Copy obj a total of num-copies times, with an increment of +delta_x,delta_y. The obj first appears at position +(x,y), then at (x+\delta_x,y+\delta_y), and so on. - -See \makebox. +This draws a simple grid with every fifth line in bold (see also +\graphpaper). +\begin{picture}(10,10) + \linethickness{0.05mm} + \multiput(0,0)(1,0){10}{\line(0,1){10}} + \multiput(0,0)(0,1){10}{\line(1,0){10}} + \linethickness{0.5mm} + \multiput(0,0)(5,0){3}{\line(0,1){10}} + \multiput(0,0)(0,5){3}{\line(1,0){10}} +\end{picture} + - -<literal>\framebox</literal> + +<literal>\qbezier</literal> -\framebox +\qbezier Synopsis: -\framebox(width,height)[pos]{...} +\qbezier(x1,y1)(x2,y2)(x3,y3) +\qbezier[num](x1,y1)(x2,y2)(x3,y3) -The \framebox command is like \makebox (see previous -section), except that it puts a frame around the outside of the box -that it creates. - -\fboxrule -\fboxsep -The \framebox command produces a rule of thickness -\fboxrule, and leaves a space \fboxsep between the rule -and the contents of the box. +Draw a quadratic Bezier curve whose control points are given by the +three required arguments (x1,y1), +(x2,y2), and (x3,y3). That is, +the curve runs from (x1,y1) to (x3,y3), is quadratic, and is +such that the tangent line at (x1,y1) passes through +(x2,y2), as does the tangent line at (x3,y3). - - - -<literal>\dashbox</literal> - -\dashbox - -Draws a box with a dashed line. Synopsis: +This draws a curve from the coordinate (1,1) to (1,0). -\dashbox{dlen}(rwidth,rheight)[pos]{text} +\qbezier(1,1)(1.25,0.75)(1,0) -\dashbox creates a dashed rectangle around text in a -picture environment. Dashes are dlen units long, and the -rectangle has overall width rwidth and height rheight. -The text is positioned at optional pos. +The curve’s tangent line at (1,1) contains (1.25,0.75), as does the +curve’s tangent line at (1,0). -A dashed box looks best when the rwidth and rheight are -multiples of the dlen. +The optional argument num gives the number of calculated +intermediate points. The default is to draw a smooth curve whose +maximum number of points is \qbeziermax (change this value with +\renewcommand). - -<literal>\frame</literal> - -\frame + +<literal>\graphpaper</literal> +\graphpaper Synopsis: -\frame{text} +\graphpaper(x_init,y_init)(x_dimen,y_dimen) +\graphpaper[spacing](x_init,y_init)(x_dimen,y_dimen) + +Draw a coordinate grid. Requires the graphpap package. +The grid’s origin is (x_init,y_init). +Grid lines come every spacing units (the default is 10). +The grid extends x_dimen units to the right and y_dimen units up. +All arguments must be positive integers. + +This make a grid with seven vertical lines and eleven horizontal lines. + +\usepackage{graphpap} % in preamble + ... +\begin{picture}(6,20) % in document body + \graphpaper[2](0,0)(12,20) +\end{picture} -The \frame command puts a rectangular frame around text. -The reference point is the bottom left corner of the frame. No extra -space is put between the frame and the object. +The lines are numbered every ten units. - + <literal>\line</literal> \line Synopsis: -\line(xslope,yslope){length} +\line(x_run,y_rise){travel} + +Draw a line. It slopes such that it vertically rises y_rise for +every horizontal x_run. The travel is the total horizontal +change — it is not the length of the vector, it is the change in +x. In the special case of vertical lines, where +(x_run,y_rise)=(0,1), the travel gives the change in +y. + +This draws a line starting at coordinates (1,3). + +\put(1,3){\line(2,5){4}} -The \line command draws a line with the given length and -slope xslope/yslope. +For every over 2, this line will go up 5. Because travel +specifies that this goes over 4, it must go up 10. Thus its +endpoint is (1,3)+(4,10)=(5,13). In particular, note that +travel=4 is not the length of the line, it is the change in +x. + +The arguments x_run and y_rise are integers that can be +positive, negative, or zero. (If both are 0 then &latex; treats the +second as 1.) With +\put(x_init,y_init){\line(x_run,y_rise){travel}}, +if x_run is negative then the line’s ending point has a first +coordinate that is less than x_init. If y_rise is negative +then the line’s ending point has a second coordinate that is less than +y_init. + +If travel is negative then you get LaTeX Error: Bad \line or +\vector argument. pict2e package graphics packages -Standard &latex; can only draw lines with slope = x/y, -where x and y have integer values from −6 -through 6. For lines of any slope, and plenty of other shapes, -see pict2e and many other packages on CTAN. +package, pict2e +pict2e package + +package, TikZ +TikZ package + +package, PSTricks +PSTricks package + +package, MetaPost +MetaPost package + +package, Asymptote +Asymptote package + +Standard &latex; can only draw lines with a limited range of slopes +because these lines are made by putting together line segments from +pre-made fonts. The two numbers x_run and y_rise must have +integer values from −6 through 6. Also, they must be +relatively prime, so that (x_run,y_rise) can be (2,1) but not +(4,2) (if you choose the latter then instead of lines you get sequences +of arrowheads; the solution is to switch to the former). To get lines +of arbitrary slope and plenty of other shapes in a system like +picture, see the package pict2e on CTAN. Another solution +is to use a full-featured graphics system such as TikZ, or +PSTricks, or MetaPost, or Asymptote - + <literal>\linethickness</literal> \linethickness -The \linethickness{dim} command declares the thickness -of horizontal and vertical lines in a picture environment to be -dim, which must be a positive length. +Synopsis: -\linethickness does not affect the thickness of slanted lines, -circles, or the quarter circles drawn by \oval. +\linethickness{dim} + +Declares the thickness of subsequent horizontal and vertical lines in a +picture to be dim, which must be a positive length +(see Lengths). It differs from \thinlines and +\thicklines in that it does not affect the thickness of slanted +lines, circles, or ovals. - -<literal>\thicklines</literal> + +<literal>\thinlines</literal> -\thicklines +\thinlines -The \thicklines command is an alternate line thickness for -horizontal and vertical lines in a picture environment; -cf. \linethickness and \thinlines. +Declaration to set the thickness of subsequent lines, circles, and ovals +in a picture environment to be 0.4pt. This is the default +thickness, so this command is unnecessary unless the thickness has been +changed with either \linethickness or \thicklines. - -<literal>\thinlines</literal> + +<literal>\thicklines</literal> -\thinlines +\thicklines -The \thinlines command is the default line thickness for -horizontal and vertical lines in a picture environment; -cf. \linethickness and \thicklines. +Declaration to set the thickness of subsequent lines, circles, and ovals +in a picture environment to be 0.8pt. See also +\linethickness and \thinlines. This command is illustrated +in the Trapezoidal Rule example of picture. - -<literal>\multiput</literal> + +<literal>\circle</literal> -\multiput +\circle Synopsis: -\multiput(x,y)(delta_x,delta_y){n}{obj} +\circle{diameter} +\circle*{diameter} + +Produces a circle with a diameter as close as possible to the specified +one. The * form produces a filled-in circle. + +This draws a circle of radius 6, centered at (5,7). + +\put(5,7){\circle{6}} -The \multiput command copies the object obj in a regular -pattern across a picture. obj is first placed at position -(x,y), then at (x+\delta x,y+\delta y), and so on, -n times. +The available radii for circle are, in points, the even +numbers from 2 to 20, inclusive. For circle* they are all the +integers from 1 to 15. - + <literal>\oval</literal> \oval Synopsis: -\oval(width,height)[portion] +\oval(width,height) +\oval(width,height)[portion] -The \oval command produces a rectangle with rounded corners. The -optional argument portion allows you to produce only half of the -oval via the following: +Produce a rectangle with rounded corners. The optional argument +portion allows you to produce only half or a quarter of the oval. +For half an oval take portion to be one of these. t -selects the top half; +top half b -selects the bottom half; +bottom half r -selects the right half; +right half l -selects the left half. +left half -It is also possible to produce only one quarter of the oval by setting -portion to tr, br, bl, or tl. +Produce only one quarter of the oval by setting portion to +tr, br, bl, or tl. -The “corners” of the oval are made with quarter circles with a -maximum radius of 20pt, so large “ovals” will look more like -boxes with rounded corners. +This draws the top half of an oval that is 3 wide and 7 tall. - - - -<literal>\put</literal> - -\put - -Synopsis: - -\put(xcoord,ycoord){ ... } +\put(5,7){\oval(3,7)[t]} -The \put command places the material specified by the -(mandatory) argument in braces at the given coordinate, -(xcoord,ycoord). +The (5,7) is the center of the entire oval, not just the center of the +top half. + +These shapes are not ellipses. They are rectangles whose corners are +made with quarter circles. These circles have a maximum radius of +20pt (see \circle for the sizes). Thus large ovals are just +boxes with a small amount of corner rounding. - + <literal>\shortstack</literal> \shortstack Synopsis: -\shortstack[position]{...\\...\\...} +\shortstack[position]{line 1 \\ ... } + +Produce a vertical stack of objects. + +This labels the y axis. + +\put(0,0){\vector(1,0){4}} % x axis +\put(0,0){\vector(0,1){2}} % y +\put(-0.25,2){\makebox[0][r]{\shortstack[r]{$y$\\ axis}}} -The \shortstack command produces a stack of objects. The valid -positions are: +For a short stack, the reference point is the lower left of the stack. +In the above example the \mbox & \makebox puts the stack flush +right in a zero width box so in total the short stack sits slightly to +the left of the y axis. + +The valid positions are: r -Move the objects to the right of the stack. +Make objects flush right l -Move the objects to the left of the stack +Make objects flush left c -Move the objects to the centre of the stack (default) +Center objects (default) \\ (for \shortstack objects) -Objects are separated with \\. +Separate objects into lines with \\. These stacks are short in +that, unlike in a tabular or array environment, here the +rows are not spaced out to be of even heights. Thus, in +\shortstack{X\\o\\o\\X} the first and last rows are taller than +the middle two. You can adjust row heights either by putting in the +usual interline spacing with \shortstack{X\\ \strut o\\o\\X}, +or by hand, via an explicit zero-width box \shortstack{X \\ +\rule{0pt}{12pt} o\\o\\X} or by using \\’s optional +argument \shortstack{X\\[2pt] o\\o\\X}. + +The \shortstack command is also available outside the +picture environment. - + <literal>\vector</literal> \vector Synopsis: -\vector(xslope,yslope){length} +\vector(x_run,y_rise){travel} -The \vector command draws a line with an arrow of the specified -length and slope. The xslope and yslope -values must lie between −4 and +4, inclusive. +Draw a line ending in an arrow. The slope of that line is: it +vertically rises y_rise for every horizontal x_run. The +travel is the total horizontal change — it is not the +length of the vector, it is the change in x. In the special case +of vertical vectors, if (x_run,y_rise)=(0,1), then +travel gives the change in y. + +For an example see picture. + +For elaboration on x_run and y_rise see \line. As +there, the values of x_run and y_rise are limited. For +\vector you must chooses integers between −4 and 4, +inclusive. Also, the two you choose must be relatively prime. Thus, +\vector(2,1){4} is acceptable but \vector(4,2){4} is +not (if you use the latter then you get a sequence of arrowheads). - - -<literal>quotation</literal> and <literal>quote</literal> + +<literal>\makebox</literal> (picture) -environment, quotation -quotation environment - -quoted text with paragraph indentation, displaying -displaying quoted text with paragraph indentation -paragraph indentations in quoted text -environment, quote -quote environment - -quoted text without paragraph indentation, displaying -displaying quoted text without paragraph indentation -paragraph indentations in quoted text, omitting +\makebox (for picture) Synopsis: -\begin{quotation} -text -\end{quotation} +\makebox(rec-width,rec-height){text} +\makebox(rec-width,rec-height)[position]{text} -or +Make a box to hold text. This command fits with the +picture environment, although you can use it outside of there, +because rec-width and rec-height are numbers specifying +distances in terms of the \unitlength (see picture). This +command is similar to the normal \makebox command (see \mbox & +\makebox) except here that you must specify the width and height. This +command is fragile (see \protect). -\begin{quote} -text -\end{quote} +This makes a box of length 3.5 times \unitlength and height 4 +times \unitlength. + +\put(1,2){\makebox(3.5,4){...}} -Include a quotation. +The optional argument position specifies where in the box +the text appears. The default is to center it, both horizontally +and vertically. To place it somewhere else, use a string with one or +two of these letters. -In both environments, margins are indented on both sides by -\leftmargin and the text is justified at both. As with the main -text, leaving a blank line produces a new paragraph. +t +Puts text the top of the box. -To compare the two: in the quotation environment, paragraphs are -indented by 1.5em and the space between paragraphs is small, -0pt plus 1pt. In the quote environment, paragraphs are -not indented and there is vertical space between paragraphs (it is the -rubber length \parsep). Thus, the quotation environment -may be more suitable for documents where new paragraphs are marked by an -indent rather than by a vertical separation. In addition, quote -may be more suitable for a short quotation or a sequence of short -quotations. +b +Put text at the bottom. -\begin{quotation} -\it Four score and seven years ago - ... shall not perish from the earth. -\hspace{1em plus 1fill}---Abraham Lincoln -\end{quotation} - +l +Put text on the left. + +r +Put text on the right. + + - - -<literal>tabbing</literal> + + +<literal>\framebox</literal> (picture) -environment, tabbing -tabbing environment - -tab stops, using -lining text up using tab stops -alignment via tabbing +\framebox Synopsis: -\begin{tabbing} -row1col1 \= row1col2 ... \\ -row2col1 \> row2col2 ... \\ -... -\end{tabbing} +\framebox(rec-width,rec-height){text} +\framebox(rec-width,rec-height)[position]{text} -The tabbing environment aligns text in columns. It works by -setting tab stops and tabbing to them much as was done on a typewriter. -It is best suited for cases where the width of each column is constant -and known in advance. +This is the same as \makebox (picture) except that it puts a frame +around the outside of the box that it creates. The reference point is +the bottom left corner of the frame. This command fits with the +picture environment, although you can use it outside of there, +because lengths are numbers specifying the distance in terms of the +\unitlength (see picture). This command is fragile +(see \protect). -This example has a first line where the tab stops are set to explicit -widths, ended by a \kill command (which is described below): +This example creates a frame 2.5 inches by 3 inches and puts +the text in the center. -\begin{tabbing} -\hspace{0.75in} \= \hspace{0.40in} \= \hspace{0.40in} \kill -Ship \> Guns \> Year \\ -\textit{Sophie} \> 14 \> 1800 \\ -\textit{Polychrest} \> 24 \> 1803 \\ -\textit{Lively} \> 38 \> 1804 \\ -\textit{Surprise} \> 28 \> 1805 \\ -\end{tabbing} +\setlength{\unitlength}{1in} +\framebox(2.5,3){test text} -Both the tabbing environment and the more widely-used -tabular environment put text in columns. The most important -distinction is that in tabular the width of columns is -determined automatically by &latex;, while in tabbing the user -sets the tab stops. Another distinction is that tabular -generates a box, but tabbing can be broken across pages. +The required arguments are that the rectangle has overall width +rect-width units and height rect-height units. + +The optional argument position specifies the position of +text; see \makebox (picture) for the values that it can +take. + +\fboxrule +\fboxsep +The rule has thickness \fboxrule and there is a blank space +\fboxsep between the frame and the contents of the box. + +For this command, you must specify the width and height. If +you want to just put a frame around some contents whose dimension is +determined in some other way then either use \fbox (see \fbox +& \framebox) or \frame (see \frame). + + + + +<literal>\frame</literal> + +\frame + +Synopsis: + +\frame{contents} + +Puts a rectangular frame around contents. The reference point is +the bottom left corner of the frame. In contrast to \framebox +(see \framebox (picture)), this command puts no extra space is put +between the frame and the object. It is fragile (see \protect). + + + + +<literal>\dashbox</literal> + +\dashbox + +Synopsis: + +\dashbox{dash-len}(rect-width,rect-height){text} +\dashbox{dash-len}(rect-width,rect-height)[position]{text} + +Create a dashed rectangle around text. This command fits with the +picture environment, although you can use it outside of there, +because lengths are numbers specifying the distance in terms of the +\unitlength (see picture). + +The required arguments are: dashes are dash-len units long, with +the same length gap, and the rectangle has overall width +rect-width units and height rect-height units. + +The optional argument position specifies the position of +text; see \makebox (picture) for the values that it can +take. + +This shows that you can use non-integer value for dash-len. + +\put(0,0){\dashbox{0.1}(5,0.5){My hovercraft is full of eels.}} + +Each dash will be 0.1\unitlength long, the box’s width is +5\unitlength and its height is 0.5\unitlength. + +As in that example, a dashed box looks best when rect-width and +rect-height are multiples of the dash-len. + + + + + +<literal>quotation</literal> & <literal>quote</literal> + +environment, quotation +quotation environment + +quoted text with paragraph indentation, displaying +displaying quoted text with paragraph indentation +paragraph indentations in quoted text +environment, quote +quote environment + +quoted text without paragraph indentation, displaying +displaying quoted text without paragraph indentation +paragraph indentations in quoted text, omitting + +Synopsis: + +\begin{quotation} + text +\end{quotation} + +or + +\begin{quote} + text +\end{quote} + +Include a quotation. Both environments indent margins on both sides by +\leftmargin and the text is right-justified. + +They differ in how they treat paragraphs. In the quotation +environment, paragraphs are indented by 1.5em and the space +between paragraphs is small, 0pt plus 1pt. In the quote +environment, paragraphs are not indented and there is vertical space +between paragraphs (it is the rubber length \parsep). + +\begin{quotation} \small\it + Four score and seven years ago + ... shall not perish from the earth. + \hspace{1em plus 1fill}---Abraham Lincoln +\end{quotation} + + + + +<literal>tabbing</literal> + +environment, tabbing +tabbing environment + +tab stops, using +lining text up using tab stops +alignment via tabbing + +Synopsis: + +\begin{tabbing} +row1col1 \= row1col2 ... \\ +row2col1 \> row2col2 ... \\ +... +\end{tabbing} + +Align text in columns, by setting tab stops and tabbing to them much as +was done on a typewriter. This is less often used than the environments +tabular (see tabular) or array (see array) because +in those the width of each column need not be constant and need not be +known in advance. + +This example has a first line where the tab stops are set to explicit +widths, ended by a \kill command (which is described below): + +\begin{tabbing} +\hspace{0.75in} \= \hspace{0.40in} \= \hspace{0.40in} \kill +Ship \> Guns \> Year \\ +\textit{Sophie} \> 14 \> 1800 \\ +\textit{Polychrest} \> 24 \> 1803 \\ +\textit{Lively} \> 38 \> 1804 \\ +\textit{Surprise} \> 28 \> 1805 \\ +\end{tabbing} + +Both the tabbing environment and the more widely-used +tabular environment put text in columns. The most important +distinction is that in tabular the width of columns is +determined automatically by &latex;, while in tabbing the user +sets the tab stops. Another distinction is that tabular +generates a box, but tabbing can be broken across pages. Finally, while tabular can be used in any mode, tabbing can be used only in paragraph mode and it starts a new paragraph. @@ -4724,8 +5901,9 @@ function \= fact(n : integer) : integer;\\ end;\\ \end{tabbing} -The output looks like this: -function fact(n : integer) : integer; +The output looks like this. + +function fact(n : integer) : integer; begin if n > 1 then fact := n * fact(n-1); @@ -4743,13 +5921,11 @@ function \= fact(n : integer) : integer;\\ package, fancyvrb fancyvrb package - -(The above example is just for illustration of the environment. To -actually typeset computer code in typewriter like this, a verbatim -environment (see verbatim) would normally suffice. For -pretty-printed code, there are quite a few packages, including -algorithm2e, fancyvrb, listings, and -minted.) +This example is just for illustration of the environment. To actually +typeset computer code in typewriter like this, a verbatim environment +(see verbatim) would normally be best. For pretty-printed code, +there are quite a few packages, including algorithm2e, +fancyvrb, listings, and minted. @@ -4765,29 +5941,46 @@ pretty-printed code, there are quite a few packages, including Synopsis: \begin{table}[placement] - table body -\caption[loftitle]{title} -\label{label} + table body + \caption[loftitle]{title} % optional + \label{label} % also optional \end{table} -A class of floats (see Floats). Because they cannot be split across -pages, they are not typeset in sequence with the normal text but instead -are “floated” to a convenient place, such as the top of a following -page. +A class of floats (see Floats). They cannot be split across pages +and so they are not typeset in sequence with the normal text but instead +are floated to a convenient place, such as the top of a following page. + +This example table environment contains a tabular + +\begin{table} + \centering\small + \begin{tabular}{ll} + \multicolumn{1}{c}{\textit{Author}} + &\multicolumn{1}{c}{\textit{Piece}} \\ \hline + Bach &Cello Suite Number 1 \\ + Beethoven &Cello Sonata Number 3 \\ + Brahms &Cello Sonata Number 1 + \end{tabular} + \caption{Top cello pieces} + \label{tab:cello} +\end{table} + +but you can put many different kinds of content in a table, +including text, &latex; commands, etc. For the possible values of placement and their effect on the float placement algorithm, see Floats. -The table body is typeset in a parbox of width \textwidth -and so it can contain text, commands, etc. +The table body is typeset in a parbox of width \textwidth. +It can contain text, commands, graphics, etc. The label is optional; it is used for cross references (see Cross references). \caption -The optional \caption command specifies caption text for the -table. By default it is numbered. If lottitle is present, it is -used in the list of tables instead of title (see Tables of -contents). +The \caption command is also optional. It specifies caption text +for the table. By default it is numbered. If its optional +lottitle is present then that text is used in the list of tables +instead of title (see Table of contents etc.). In this example the table and caption will float to the bottom of a page, unless it is pushed to a float page at the end. @@ -4817,20 +6010,20 @@ unless it is pushed to a float page at the end. Synopsis: \begin{tabular}[pos]{cols} -column 1 entry &column 2 entry ... &column n entry \\ + column 1 entry &column 2 entry ... &column n entry \\ ... \end{tabular} or \begin{tabular*}{width}[pos]{cols} -column 1 entry &column 2 entry ... &column n entry \\ + column 1 entry &column 2 entry ... &column n entry \\ ... \end{tabular*} -These environments produce a table, a box consisting of a sequence of -horizontal rows. Each row consists of items that are aligned vertically -in columns. This illustrates many of the features. +Produce a table, a box consisting of a sequence of horizontal rows. +Each row consists of items that are aligned vertically in columns. This +illustrates many of the features. \begin{tabular}{l|l} \textit{Player name} &\textit{Career home runs} \\ @@ -4839,27 +6032,21 @@ in columns. This illustrates many of the features. Babe Ruth &714 \end{tabular} -The vertical format of two left-aligned columns, with a vertical bar -between them, is specified in tabular’s argument {l|l}. +The output will have two left-aligned columns with a vertical bar +between them. This is specified in tabular’s argument +{l|l}. & -Columns are separated with an ampersand &. A horizontal rule -between two rows is created with \hline. +Put the entries into different columns by separating them with an +ampersand, &. The end of each row is marked with a double +backslash, \\. Put a horizontal rule below a row, after a double +backslash, with \hline. \\ for tabular -The end of each row is marked with a double backslash \\. This \\ is optional after the last row unless an \hline command follows, to put a rule below the table. The required and optional arguments to tabular consist of: -width -Required for tabular*, not allowed for tabular. Specifies -the width of the tabular* environment. The space between columns -should be rubber, as with @{\extracolsep{\fill}}, to allow -the table to stretch or shrink to make the specified width, or else you -are likely to get the Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in alignment -... warning. - -pos +pos Optional. Specifies the table’s vertical position. The default is to align the table so its vertical center matches the baseline of the surrounding text. There are two other possible alignments: t @@ -4888,25 +6075,28 @@ column and intercolumn material. A vertical line the full height and depth of the environment. @{text or space} -This inserts text or space at this location in every row. The -text or space material is typeset in LR mode. This text is -fragile (see \protect). +Insert text or space at this location in every row. The text +or space material is typeset in LR mode. This text is fragile +(see \protect). -This specifier is optional: with no @-expression, &latex;’s +If between two columns there is no @-expression then &latex;’s book, article, and report classes will put on -either side of each column a space of length \tabcolsep, which -by default is ‘6pt’. That is, by default adjacent columns are -separated by 12pt (so \tabcolsep is misleadingly-named since it -is not the separation between tabular columns). By implication, a -space of 6pt also comes before the first column and after the final -column, unless you put a @{...} or | there. - -If you override the default and use an @-expression then you must -insert any desired space yourself, as in @{\hspace{1em}}. - -An empty expression @{} will eliminate the space, including -the space at the start or end, as in the example below where the tabular -lines need to lie on the left margin. +either side of each column a space of length \tabcolsep, which by +default is 6pt. That is, by default adjacent columns are +separated by 12pt (so \tabcolsep is misleadingly named +since it is only half of the separation between tabular columns). In +addition, a space of 6pt also comes before the first column and +after the final column, unless you put a @{...} or | +there. + +If you override the default and use an @-expression then &latex; does +not insert \tabcolsep so you must insert any desired space +yourself, as in @{\hspace{1em}}. + +An empty expression @{} will eliminate the space. In +particular, sometimes you want to eliminate the the space before the +first column or after the last one, as in the example below where the +tabular lines need to lie on the left margin. \begin{flushleft} \begin{tabular}{@{}l} @@ -4914,8 +6104,8 @@ lines need to lie on the left margin. \end{tabular} \end{flushleft} -This example shows text, a decimal point, between the columns, arranged -so the numbers in the table are aligned on that decimal point. +The next example shows text, a decimal point between the columns, +arranged so the numbers in the table are aligned on it. \begin{tabular}{r@{$.$}l} $3$ &$14$ \\ @@ -4925,19 +6115,17 @@ so the numbers in the table are aligned on that decimal point. \extracolsep An \extracolsep{wd} command in an @-expression causes an extra space of width wd to appear to the left of all subsequent -columns, until countermanded by another \extracolsep command. -Unlike ordinary intercolumn space, this extra space is not suppressed by -an @-expression. An \extracolsep command can be used only in an +columns, until countermanded by another \extracolsep. Unlike +ordinary intercolumn space, this extra space is not suppressed by an +@-expression. An \extracolsep command can be used only in an @-expression in the cols argument. Below, &latex; inserts the right amount of intercolumn space to make the entire table 4 inches wide. -\begin{center} - \begin{tabular*}{4in}{l@{\ \ldots\extracolsep{\fill}}l} - Seven times down, eight times up - &such is life! - \end{tabular*} -\end{center} +\begin{tabular*}{4in}{l@{\extracolsep{\fill}}l} + Seven times down, eight times up \ldots + &such is life! +\end{tabular*} To insert commands that are automatically executed before a given column, load the array package and use the >{...} @@ -4945,45 +6133,56 @@ specifier. p{wd} -Each item in the column is typeset in a parbox of width wd. +Each item in the column is typeset in a parbox of width wd, as if +it were the argument of a \parbox[t]{wd}{...} command. -Note that a line break double backslash \\ may not appear in the -item, except inside an environment like minipage, array, -or tabular, or inside an explicit \parbox, or in the scope -of a \centering, \raggedright, or \raggedleft +A line break double backslash \\ may not appear in the item, +except inside an environment like minipage, array, or +tabular, or inside an explicit \parbox, or in the scope of +a \centering, \raggedright, or \raggedleft declaration (when used in a p-column element these declarations must appear inside braces, as with {\centering .. \\ ..}). Otherwise &latex; will misinterpret the double backslash as -ending the row. +ending the row. Instead, to get a line break in there use +\newline (see \newline). *{num}{cols} Equivalent to num copies of cols, where num is a -positive integer and cols is a list of specifiers. Thus -\begin{tabular}{|*{3}{l|r}|} is equivalent to -\begin{tabular}{|l|rl|rl|r|}. Note that cols may -contain another *-expression. +positive integer and cols is a list of specifiers. Thus the +specifier \begin{tabular}{|*{3}{l|r}|} is equivalent to +the specifier \begin{tabular}{|l|rl|rl|r|}. Note that +cols may contain another *-expression. - + +width +Required for tabular*, not allowed for tabular. Specifies +the width of the tabular* environment. The space between columns +should be rubber, as with @{\extracolsep{\fill}}, to allow +the table to stretch or shrink to make the specified width, or else you +are likely to get the Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in alignment +... warning. + + Parameters that control formatting: \arrayrulewidth\arrayrulewidth -A length that is the thickness of the rule created by |, +A length that is the thickness of the rule created by |, \hline, and \vline in the tabular and array environments. The default is ‘.4pt’. Change it as in \setlength{\arrayrulewidth}{0.8pt}. \arraystretch\arraystretch -A factor by which the spacing between rows in the tabular and +A factor by which the spacing between rows in the tabular and array environments is multiplied. The default is ‘1’, for no scaling. Change it as \renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.2}. \doublerulesep\doublerulesep -A length that is the distance between the vertical rules produced by the +A length that is the distance between the vertical rules produced by the || specifier. The default is ‘2pt’. \tabcolsep\tabcolsep -A length that is half of the space between columns. The default is +A length that is half of the space between columns. The default is ‘6pt’. Change it with \setlength. @@ -5013,8 +6212,9 @@ entry. spanned by the single heading ‘Name’. \begin{tabular}{lccl} - \textit{ID} &\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textit{Name}} &\textit{Age} \\ \hline % row one - 978-0-393-03701-2 &O'Brian &Patrick &55 \\ % row two + \textit{ID} &\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textit{Name}} &\textit{Age} \\ + \hline + 978-0-393-03701-2 &O'Brian &Patrick &55 \\ ... \end{tabular} @@ -5092,23 +6292,23 @@ used in an @-expression, although its synonym vertical bar | is more common. This command is rarely used in the body of a table; typically a table’s vertical lines are specified in tabular’s cols argument and overridden as needed with -\multicolumn. +\multicolumn (see tabular). -This example illustrates some pitfalls. In the first line’s second +The example below illustrates some pitfalls. In the first row’s second entry the \hfill moves the \vline to the left edge of the cell. But that is different than putting it halfway between the two -columns, so in that row between the first and second columns there are -two vertical rules, with the one from the {c|cc} specifier -coming before the one produced by the \vline\hfill. In contrast, -the first line’s third entry shows the usual way to put a vertical bar -between two columns. In the second line, the ghi is the widest -entry in its column so in the \vline\hfill the \hfill has -no effect and the vertical line in that entry appears immediately next -to the g, with no whitespace. +columns, so between the first and second columns there are two vertical +rules, with the one from the {c|cc} specifier coming before the +one produced by the \vline\hfill. In contrast, the first row’s +third entry shows the usual way to put a vertical bar between two +columns. In the second row, the ghi is the widest entry in its +column so in the \vline\hfill the \hfill has no effect and +the vertical line in that entry appears immediately next to the +g, with no whitespace. \begin{tabular}{c|cc} - x &\vline\hfill y &\multicolumn{1}{|r}{z} \\ - abc &def &\vline\hfill ghi + x &\vline\hfill y &\multicolumn{1}{|r}{z} \\ % row 1 + abc &def &\vline\hfill ghi % row 2 \end{tabular} @@ -5122,10 +6322,10 @@ to the g, with no whitespace. \cline{i-j} -Draw a horizontal rule in an array or tabular environment -beginning in column i and ending in column j. The -dash - must appear in the mandatory argument. To span a -single column use the number twice. +In an array or tabular environment, draw a horizontal rule +beginning in column i and ending in column j. The +dash, -, must appear in the mandatory argument. To span a single +column use the number twice, as with \cline{2-2}. This example puts two horizontal lines between the first and second rows, one line in the first column only, and the other spanning the @@ -5144,7 +6344,7 @@ height. \hline -Draws a horizontal line the width of the enclosing tabular or +Draw a horizontal line the width of the enclosing tabular or array environment. It’s most commonly used to draw a line at the top, bottom, and between the rows of a table. @@ -5173,41 +6373,57 @@ is required. Synopsis: \begin{thebibliography}{widest-label} -\bibitem[label]{cite_key} -... + \bibitem[label]{cite_key} + ... \end{thebibliography} -The thebibliography environment produces a bibliography or -reference list. - -In the article class, this reference list is labelled -‘References’ and the label is stored in macro \refname; in -the report class, it is labelled ‘Bibliography’ and the -label is stored in macro \bibname. +Produce a bibliography or reference list. There are two ways to produce +bibliographic lists. This environment is suitable when you have only a +few references and can maintain the list by hand. See Using BibTeX +for a more sophisticated approach. -You can change the label by redefining the command \refname or -\bibname, whichever is applicable depending on the class: +This shows the environment with two entries. -\bibname -For standard classes whose top level sectioning is \chapter -(such as book and report), the label is in the macro -\bibname; +This work is based on \cite{latexdps}. +Together they are \cite{latexdps, texbook}. + ... +\begin{thebibliography}{9} +\bibitem{latexdps} + Leslie Lamport. + \textit{\LaTeX{}: a document preparation system}. + Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1993. +\bibitem{texbook} + Donald Ervin Knuth. + \textit{The \TeX book}. + Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1983. +\end{thebibliography} + +This styles the first reference as ‘[1] Leslie ...’, and so that +\cite{latexdps} produces the matching ‘... based on [1]’. +The second \cite produces ‘[1, 2]’. You must compile the +document twice to resolve these references. + +The mandatory argument widest-label is text that, when typeset, is +as wide as the widest item label produced by the \bibitem +commands. The tradition is to use 9 for bibliographies with less +than 10 references, 99 for ones with less than 100, etc. + +The bibliographic list is headed by a title such as ‘Bibliography’. +To change it there are two cases. In the book and report +classes, where the top level sectioning is \chapter and the +default title is ‘Bibliography’, that title is in the macro +\bibname. For article, where the class’s top level +sectioning is \section and the default is ‘References’, the +title is in macro \refname. Change it by redefining the command, +as with \renewcommand{\refname}{Cited references} after +\begin{document}. -\refname -For standard classes whose the top level sectioning is \section -(such as article), the label is in macro \refname. - package, babel babel package -Typically it is neither necessary nor desirable to directly redefine -\refname or \bibname; language support packages like -babel do this. - -The mandatory widest-label argument is text that, when typeset, -is as wide as the widest item label produced by the \bibitem -commands. It is typically given as 9 for bibliographies with -less than 10 references, 99 for ones with less than 100, etc. +Language support packages such as babel will automatically +redefine \refname or \bibname to fit the selected +language. @@ -5218,21 +6434,62 @@ less than 10 references, 99 for ones with less than 100, etc. Synopsis: +\bibitem{cite_key} + +or + \bibitem[label]{cite_key} -The \bibitem command generates an entry labelled by label. -If the label argument is missing, a number is automatically -generated using the enumi counter. The cite_key is a +Generate an entry labeled by label. The default is for &latex; to +generates a number using the enumi counter. The citation key citation key -citation key consisting in any sequence of -letters, numbers, and punctuation symbols not containing a comma. +cite_key is a string of +letters, numbers, and punctuation symbols (but not comma). + +See thebibliography for an example. + +The optional label changes the default label from an integer to the +given string. With this + +\begin{thebibliography} +\bibitem[Lamport 1993]{latexdps} + Leslie Lamport. + \textit{\LaTeX{}: a document preparation system}. + Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1993. +\bibitem{texbook} + Donald Ervin Knuth. + \textit{The \TeX book}. + Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1983. +\end{thebibliography} + +the first entry will be styled as ‘[Lamport 1993] Leslie ...’ (The +amount of horizontal space that &latex; leaves for the label depends on +the widest-label argument of the thebibliography +environment; see thebibliography.) Similarly, ... based on +\cite{latexdps} will produce ‘... based on [Lamport 1994]’. + +If you mix \bibitem entries having a label with those that +do not then &latex; will number the unlabelled ones sequentially. In +the example above the texbook entry will appear as ‘[1] +Donald ...’, despite that it is the second entry. + +If you use the same cite_key twice then you get ‘LaTeX +Warning: There were multiply-defined labels’. + +Under the hood, &latex; remembers the cite_key and label +information because \bibitem writes it to the auxiliary file +filename.aux. For instance, the above example causes +\bibcite{latexdps}{Lamport, 1993} and +\bibcite{texbook}{1} to appear in that file. The .aux +file is read by the \begin{document} command and then the +information is available for \cite commands. This explains why +you need to run &latex; twice to resolve references: once to write it +out and once to read it in. -This command writes an entry to the .aux file containing the -item’s cite_key and label. When the .aux file is -read by the \begin{document} command, the item’s label is -associated with cite_key, causing references to cite_key -with a \cite command (see \cite) to produce the associated -label. +Because of this two-pass algorithm, when you add a \bibitem or +change its cite_key you may get ‘LaTeX Warning: Label(s) may +have changed. Rerun to get cross-references right’. Fix it by +recompiling. @@ -5243,16 +6500,48 @@ with a \cite command (see \cite
  • Synopsis:
    +\cite{keys} + +or + \cite[subcite]{keys} -The keys argument is a list of one or more citation keys -(see \bibitem), separated by commas. This command generates an -in-text citation to the references associated with keys by entries -in the .aux file. +Generate as output a citation to the references associated with +keys. The mandatory keys is a citation key, or a +comma-separated list of citation keys (see \bibitem). + +This + +The ultimate source is \cite{texbook}. + ... +\begin{thebibliography} +\bibitem{texbook} + Donald Ervin Knuth. + \textit{The \TeX book}. + Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1983. +\end{thebibliography} + +produces the output ‘... source is [1]’. + +The optional argument subcite is appended to the citation. For +example, See 14.3 in \cite[p.~314]{texbook} might produce +‘See 14.3 in [1, p. 314]’. -The text of the optional subcite argument appears after the -citation. For example, \cite[p.~314]{knuth} might produce -‘[Knuth, p. 314]’. +If keys is not in your bibliography information then you get +‘LaTeX Warning: There were undefined references’, and in the output +the citation shows as a boldface question mark between square brackets. +There are two possible causes. If you have mistyped something, as in +\cite{texbok} then you need to correct the spelling. On the +other hand, if you have just added or modified the bibliographic +information and so changed the .aux file (see \bibitem) then +the fix may be to just run &latex; again. + +In addition to what appears in the output, \cite writes +information to the auxiliary file filename.aux. For +instance, \cite{latexdps} writes ‘\citation{latexdps}’ +to that file. This information is used by Bib&tex; to include in your +reference list only those works that you have actually cited; see +\nocite also. @@ -5265,8 +6554,13 @@ citation. For example, \cite[p.~314]{knuth} might produce \nocite{keys} -The \nocite command produces no text, but writes keys, -which is a list of one or more citation keys, to the .aux file. +Produces no output but writes keys to the auxiliary file +doc-filename.aux. + +The mandatory argument keys is a comma-separated list of one or +more citation keys (see \bibitem). This information is used by +Bib&tex; to include these works in your reference list even though you +have not cited them (see \cite). @@ -5279,41 +6573,62 @@ which is a list of one or more citation keys, to the .aux f \bibliographystyle \bibliography -If you use the Bib&tex; program by Oren Patashnik (highly -recommended if you need a bibliography of more than a couple of -titles) to maintain your bibliography, you don’t use the -thebibliography environment (see thebibliography). Instead, -you include the lines +As described in thebibliography (see thebibliography), a +sophisticated approach to managing bibliographies is provided by the +Bib&tex; program. This is only an introduction; see the full +documentation on CTAN. + +With Bib&tex;, you don’t use thebibliography +(see thebibliography). Instead, include these lines. \bibliographystyle{bibstyle} -\bibliography{bibfile1,bibfile2} +\bibliography{bibfile1, bibfile2, ...} -The \bibliographystyle command does not produce any output of -its own. Rather, it defines the style in which the bibliography will -be produced: bibstyle refers to a file -bibstyle.bst, which defines how your citations will look. -The standard bibstyle names distributed with Bib&tex; are: +The bibstyle refers to a file bibstyle.bst, which +defines how your citations will look. The standard bibstyle’s +distributed with Bib&tex; are: alpha -Sorted alphabetically. Labels are formed from name of author and year of -publication. +Labels are formed from name of author and year of publication. +The bibliographic items are sorted alphabetically. plain -Sorted alphabetically. Labels are numeric. +Labels are integers. +Sort the bibliographic items alphabetically. unsrt Like plain, but entries are in order of citation. abbrv Like plain, but more compact labels. -In addition, numerous other Bib&tex; style files exist tailored to -the demands of various publications. See +Many, many other Bib&tex; style files exist, +tailored to the demands of various publications. See CTAN’s listing http://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib. The \bibliography command is what actually produces the -bibliography. The argument to \bibliography refers to files -named bibfile1.bib, bibfile2.bib, …, -which should contain your database in -Bib&tex; format. Only the entries referred to via \cite and -\nocite will be listed in the bibliography. +bibliography. Its argument is a comma-separated list, referring to +files named bibfile1.bib, bibfile2.bib, +… These contain your database in Bib&tex; format. This shows a +typical couple of entries in that format. + +@book{texbook, + title = {The {{\TeX}}book}, + author = {D.E. Knuth}, + isbn = {0201134489}, + series = {Computers \& typesetting}, + year = {1983}, + publisher = {Addison-Wesley} +} +@book{sexbook, + author = {W.H. Masters and V.E. Johnson}, + title = {Human Sexual Response}, + year = {1966}, + publisher = {Bantam Books} +} + +Only the bibliographic entries referred to via \cite and +\nocite will be listed in the document’s bibliography. Thus you +can keep all your sources together in one file, or a small number of +files, and rely on Bib&tex; to include in this document only those that +you used. @@ -5329,13 +6644,35 @@ Bib&tex; format. Only the entries referred to via \cite and Synopsis: \begin{theorem} -theorem-text + theorem body \end{theorem} -The theorem environment produces “Theorem n” in -boldface followed by theorem-text, where the numbering -possibilities for n are described under \newtheorem -(see \newtheorem). +Produces ‘Theorem n’ in boldface followed by theorem +body in italics. The numbering possibilities for n are described under +\newtheorem (see \newtheorem). + +\newtheorem{lem}{Lemma} % in preamble +\newtheorem{thm}{Theorem} + ... +\begin{lem} % in document body + text of lemma +\end{lem} + +The next result follows immediately. +\begin{thm}[Gauss] % put `Gauss' in parens after theorem head + text of theorem +\end{thm} + +package, amsmath +amsmath package + +package, amsthm +amsthm package + +Most new documents use the packages amsthm and amsmath +from the American Mathematical Society. Among other things these +packages include a large number of options for theorem environments, +such as styling options. @@ -5354,14 +6691,11 @@ possibilities for n are described under \new ... text and spacing ... \end{titlepage} -Create a title page, a page with no printed page number or heading. The -following page will be numbered page one. - -To instead produce a standard title page without a titlepage -environment you can use \maketitle (see \maketitle). +Create a title page, a page with no printed page number or heading and +with succeeding pages numbered starting with page one. -Notice in this example that all formatting, including vertical spacing, -is left to the author. +In this example all formatting, including vertical spacing, is left to +the author. \begin{titlepage} \vspace*{\stretch{1}} @@ -5384,6 +6718,9 @@ is left to the author. \vspace{\stretch{2}} \end{titlepage} +To instead produce a standard title page without a titlepage +environment, use \maketitle (see \maketitle). + @@ -5404,15 +6741,52 @@ is left to the author. literal-text \end{verbatim} -The verbatim environment is a paragraph-making environment in -which &latex; produces exactly what you type in; for instance the -\ character produces a printed ‘\’. It turns &latex; -into a typewriter with carriage returns and blanks having the same -effect that they would on a typewriter. - -The verbatim environment uses a monospaced typewriter-like font +A paragraph-making environment in which &latex; produces as output +exactly what you type as input. For instance inside literal-text +the backslash \ character does not start commands, it +produces a printed ‘\’, and carriage returns and blanks are taken +literally. The output appears in a monospaced typewriter-like font (\tt). +\begin{verbatim} +Symbol swearing: %&$#?!. +\end{verbatim} + +The only restriction on literal-text is that it cannot include +the string \end{verbatim}. + +package, cprotect +cprotect package + +You cannot use the verbatim environment in the argument to macros, for +instance in the argument to a \section. This is not the same as +commands being fragile (see \protect), instead it just cannot appear +there. (But the cprotect package can help with this.) + +package, listings +listings package + +package, minted +minted package + +One common use of verbatim input is to typeset computer code. There are +packages that are an improvement the verbatim environment. For +instance, one improvement is to allow the verbatim inclusion of external +files, or parts of those files. Such packages include listings, +and minted. + +package, fancyvrb +fancyvrb package + +package, verbatimbox +verbatimbox package + +A package that provides many more options for verbatim environments is +fancyvrb. Another is verbatimbox. + +For a list of all the relevant packages, see CTAN. + + <literal>\verb</literal> @@ -5422,18 +6796,61 @@ effect that they would on a typewriter. Synopsis: -\verbcharliteral-textchar -\verb*charliteral-textchar +\verb char literal-text char +\verb* char literal-text char + +Typeset literal-text as it is input, including special characters +and spaces, using the typewriter (\tt) font. + +This example shows two different invocations of \verb. + +This is \verb!literally! the biggest pumpkin ever. +And this is the best squash, \verb+literally!+ -The \verb command typesets literal-text as it is input, -including special characters and spaces, using the typewriter -(\tt) font. No spaces are allowed between \verb or -\verb* and the delimiter char, which begins and ends the -verbatim text. The delimiter must not appear in literal-text. +The first \verb has its literal-text surrounded with +exclamation point, !. The second instead uses plus, +, +because the exclamation point is part of literal-text. + +The single-character delimiter char surrounds +literal-text — it must be the same character before and +after. No spaces come between \verb or \verb* and +char, or between char and literal-text, or between +literal-text and the second occurrence of char (the synopsis +shows a space only to distinguish one component from the other). The +delimiter must not appear in literal-text. The literal-text +cannot include a line break. visible space -The *-form differs only in that spaces are printed with a -“visible space” character. +The *-form differs only in that spaces are printed with a visible +space character. + +The output from this will include a character showing the spaces. + +The commands's first argument is \verb*!filename with extension! and ... + +package, url +url package + +For typesetting Internet addresses, urls, the package url +provides an option that is better than the \verb command, since +it allows line breaks. + +package, listings +listings package + +package, minted +minted package + +For computer code there are many packages with advantages over +\verb. One is listings, another is minted. + +package, cprotect +cprotect package + +You cannot use \verb in the argument to a macro, for instance in +the argument to a \section. It is not a question of \verb +being fragile (see \protect), instead it just cannot appear there. +(But the cprotect package can help with this.) @@ -5449,19 +6866,36 @@ verbatim text. The delimiter must not appear in literal-textSynopsis: \begin{verse} -line1 \\ -line2 \\ -... + line1 \\ + line2 \\ + ... \end{verse} -The verse environment is designed for poetry, though you may find -other uses for it. +An environment for poetry. + +Here are two lines from Shakespeare’s Romeo and Juliet. +Then plainly know my heart's dear love is set \\ +On the fair daughter of rich Capulet. + \\ for verse -The margins are indented on the left and the right, paragraphs are not -indented, and the text is not justified. Separate the lines of each -stanza with \\, and use one or more blank lines to separate the -stanzas. +Separate the lines of each stanza with \\, and use one or more +blank lines to separate the stanzas. + +\begin{verse} +\makebox[\linewidth][c]{\textit{Shut Not Your Doors} ---Walt Whitman} + \\[1\baselineskip] +Shut not your doors to me proud libraries, \\ +For that which was lacking on all your well-fill'd shelves, \\ +\qquad yet needed most, I bring, \\ +Forth from the war emerging, a book I have made, \\ +The words of my book nothing, the drift of it every thing, \\ +A book separate, not link'd with the rest nor felt by the intellect, \\ +But you ye untold latencies will thrill to every page. +\end{verse} + +The output has margins indented on the left and the right, paragraphs +are not indented, and the text is not right-justified. @@ -5480,6 +6914,12 @@ produce a printed document, this sequence must be broken into lines &latex; usually does the line (and page) breaking in the text body for you but in some environments you manually force line breaks. +A common workflow is to get a final version of the document content +before taking a final pass through and considering line breaks (and page +breaks). This differs from word processing, where you are formatting +text as you input it. Putting these off until the end prevents a lot of +fiddling with breaks that will change anyway. + @@ -5489,35 +6929,71 @@ you but in some environments you manually force line breaks. new line, starting line break, forcing -Synopsis: +Synopsis, one of: -\\[morespace] +\\ +\\[morespace] -or +or one of: -\\*[morespace] +\\* +\\*[morespace] -Start a new line. The optional argument morespace specifies extra -vertical space to be insert before the next line. This can be a -negative length. The text before the break is set at its normal length, -that is, it is not stretched to fill out the line width. - -Explicit line breaks in the text body are unusual in &latex;. In -particular, to start a new paragraph instead leave a blank line. This -command is mostly used outside of the main flow of text such as in -a tabular or array environment. +End the current line. The optional argument morespace specifies +extra vertical space to be inserted before the next line. This is a +rubber length (see Lengths) and can be negative. The text before +the line break is set at its normal length, that is, it is not stretched +to fill out the line width. This command is fragile (see \protect). -Under ordinary circumstances (e.g., outside of a p{...} column -in a tabular environment) the \newline command is a synonym for -\\ (see \newline). - -In addition to starting a new line, the starred form \\* tells -&latex; not to start a new page between the two lines, by issuing a -\nobreak. +The starred form, \\*, tells &latex; not to start a new page +between the two lines, by issuing a \nobreak. \title{My story: \\[0.25in] a tale of woe} +Explicit line breaks in the main text body are unusual in &latex;. In +particular, don’t start new paragraphs with \\. Instead leave a +blank line between the two paragraphs. And don’t put in a sequence of +\\’s to make vertical space. Instead use +\vspace{length}, or +\leavevmode\vspace{length}, or +\vspace*{length} if you want the space to not be thrown +out at the top of a new page (see \vspace). + +The \\ command is mostly used outside of the main flow of text +such as in a tabular or array environment or in an +equation environment. + +The \\ command is a synonym for \newline +(see \newline) under ordinary circumstances (an example of an +exception is the p{...} column in a tabular +environment; see tabular). + + +The \\ command is a macro, and its definition changes by context +so that its definition in normal text, a center environment, a +flushleft environment, and a tabular are all different. +In normal text when it forces a linebreak it is essentially a shorthand +for \newline. It does not end horizontal mode or end the +paragraph, it just inserts some glue and penalties so that when the +paragraph does end a linebreak will occur at that point, with the short +line padded with white space. + +You get ‘LaTeX Error: There's no line here to end’ if you use +\\ to ask for a new line, rather than to end the current line. +An example is if you have \begin{document}\\ or, more likely, +something like this. + +\begin{center} + \begin{minipage}{0.5\textwidth} + \\ + In that vertical space put your mark. + \end{minipage} +\end{center} + +Fix it by replacing the double backslash with something like +\vspace{\baselineskip}. + @@ -5527,12 +7003,42 @@ in a tabular environment) the \newline com \restorecr new line, output as input -The \obeycr command makes a return in the input file -(‘^^M’, internally) the same as \\ (followed by -\relax). So each new line in the input will also be a new line -in the output. +The \obeycr command makes a return in the input file (‘^^M’, +internally) the same as \\, followed by \relax. So each +new line in the input will also be a new line in the output. The +\restorecr command restores normal line-breaking behavior. + +This is not the way to show verbatim text or computer code. +See verbatim instead. + +With &latex;’s usual defaults, this + +aaa +bbb + +\obeycr +ccc +ddd + eee + +\restorecr +fff +ggg + +hhh +iii + +produces output like this. -\restorecr restores normal line-breaking behavior. + aaa bbb + ccc +ddd +eee + +fff ggg + hhh iii + +The indents are paragraph indents. @@ -5542,14 +7048,18 @@ in the output. \newline new line, starting (paragraph mode) -In ordinary text this is equivalent to double-backslash (see \\); it -breaks a line, with no stretching of the text before it. +In ordinary text, this ends a line in a way that does not right-justify +the line, so the prior text is not stretched. That is, in paragraph mode +(see Modes), the \newline command is equivalent to +double-backslash (see \\). This command is fragile +(see \protect). -Inside a tabular or array environment, in a column with a -specifier producing a paragraph box, like typically p{...}, -\newline will insert a line break inside of the column, that is, -it does not break the entire row. To break the entire row use \\ -or its equivalent \tabularnewline. +However, the two commands are different inside a tabular or +array environment. In a column with a specifier producing a +paragraph box such as typically p{...}, \newline will +insert a line end inside of the column; that is, it does not break the +entire tabular row. To break the entire row use \\ or its +equivalent \tabularnewline. This will print ‘Name:’ and ‘Address:’ as two lines in a single cell of the table. @@ -5568,16 +7078,39 @@ single cell of the table. \- (hyphenation) hyphenation, forcing -The \- command tells &latex; that it may hyphenate the word at -that point. &latex; is pretty good at hyphenating, and usually finds -most of the correct hyphenation points, while almost never using an -incorrect one. The \- command is used for the exceptional -cases. +Tell &latex; that it may hyphenate the word at that point. When you +insert \- commands in a word, the word will only be hyphenated at +those points and not at any of the hyphenation points that &latex; +might otherwise have chosen. This command is robust (see \protect). + +&latex; is good at hyphenating and usually finds most of the correct +hyphenation points, while almost never using an incorrect one. The +\- command is for exceptional cases. + +For example, &latex; does not ordinarily hyphenate words containing a +hyphen. Below, the long and hyphenated word means &latex; has to put +in unacceptably large spaces to set the narrow column. + +\begin{tabular}{rp{1.75in}} + Isaac Asimov &The strain of + anti-intellectualism + % an\-ti-in\-tel\-lec\-tu\-al\-ism + has been a constant thread winding its way through our + political and cultural life, nurtured by + the false notion that democracy means that + `my ignorance is just as good as your knowledge'. +\end{tabular} + +Commenting out the third line and uncommenting the fourth makes a much +better fit. -When you insert \- commands in a word, the word will only be -hyphenated at those points and not at any of the hyphenation points -that &latex; might otherwise have chosen. +The \- command only allows &latex; to break there, it does not +require that it break there. You can insist on a split with something +like Hef-\linebreak feron. Of course, if you later change the +text then this forced break may look very odd, so this approach requires +care. + <literal>\discretionary</literal> (generalized hyphenation point) @@ -5586,39 +7119,82 @@ that &latex; might otherwise have chosen. Synopsis: -\discretionary{pre-break-text}{post-break-text}{no-break-text} +\discretionary{pre-break}{post-break}{no-break} - +Handle word changes around hyphens. This command is not often used in +&latex; documents. + +If a line break occurs at the point where \discretionary appears +then &tex; puts pre-break at the end of the current line and puts +post-break at the start of the next line. If there is no line +break here then &tex; puts no-break + +In ‘difficult’ the three letters ffi form a ligature. But +&tex; can nonetheless break between the two f’s with this. + +di\discretionary{f-}{fi}{ffi}cult + +Note that users do not have to do this. It is typically handled +automatically by &tex;’s hyphenation algorithm. + - -<literal>\fussy</literal> + +<literal>\fussy</literal> & <literal>\sloppy</literal> \fussy +\sloppy +line breaks, changing -The declaration \fussy (which is the default) makes &tex; -picky about line breaking. This usually avoids too much space between -words, at the cost of an occasional overfull box. +Declarations to make &tex; more picky or less picky about line +breaking. Declaring \fussy usually avoids too much space between +words, at the cost of an occasional overfull box. Conversely, +\sloppy avoids overfull boxes while suffering loose interword +spacing. -This command cancels the effect of a previous \sloppy command -(see \sloppy). +The default is \fussy. Line breaking in a paragraph is +controlled by whichever declaration is current at the blank line, or +\par, or displayed equation ending that paragraph. So to affect +the line breaks, include that paragraph-ending material in the scope of +the command. - - -<literal>\sloppy</literal> -\sloppy + +<literal>sloppypar</literal> + +sloppypar +sloppypar environment -The declaration \sloppy makes &tex; less fussy about line -breaking. This will avoid overfull boxes, at the cost of loose -interword spacing. +Synopsis: + +\begin{sloppypar} + ... paragraphs ... +\end{sloppypar} + +Typeset the paragraphs with \sloppy in effect (see \fussy & +\sloppy). Use this to locally adjust line breaking, to avoid +‘Overfull box’ or ‘Underfull box’ errors. -Lasts until a \fussy command is issued (see \fussy). +The example is simple. +\begin{sloppypar} + Her plan for the morning thus settled, she sat quietly down to her + book after breakfast, resolving to remain in the same place and the + same employment till the clock struck one; and from habitude very + little incommoded by the remarks and ejaculations of Mrs.\ Allen, + whose vacancy of mind and incapacity for thinking were such, that + as she never talked a great deal, so she could never be entirely + silent; and, therefore, while she sat at her work, if she lost her + needle or broke her thread, if she heard a carriage in the street, + or saw a speck upon her gown, she must observe it aloud, whether + there were anyone at leisure to answer her or not. +\end{sloppypar} + + - + <literal>\hyphenation</literal> \hyphenation @@ -5626,20 +7202,22 @@ interword spacing. Synopsis: -\hyphenation{word-one word-two} +\hyphenation{word1 ...} -The \hyphenation command declares allowed hyphenation points -with a - character in the given words. The words are separated -by spaces. &tex; will only hyphenate if the word matches exactly, no -inflections are tried. Multiple \hyphenation commands -accumulate. Some examples (the default &tex; hyphenation patterns -misses the hyphenations in these words): +Declares allowed hyphenation points within the words in the list. The +words in that list are separated by spaces. Show permitted points for +hyphenation with a dash character, -. + +Here is an example: -\hyphenation{ap-pen-dix col-umns data-base data-bases} +\hyphenation{hat-er il-lit-e-ra-ti tru-th-i-ness} +Use lowercase letters. &tex; will only hyphenate if the word matches +exactly. Multiple \hyphenation commands accumulate. + - + <literal>\linebreak</literal> & <literal>\nolinebreak</literal> \linebreak @@ -5647,21 +7225,37 @@ misses the hyphenations in these words): line breaks, forcing line breaks, preventing -Synopses: +Synopses, one of: + +\linebreak +\linebreak[zero-to-four] + +or one of these. -\linebreak[priority] -\nolinebreak[priority] +\nolinebreak +\nolinebreak[zero-to-four] -By default, the \linebreak (\nolinebreak) command forces -(prevents) a line break at the current position. For -\linebreak, the spaces in the line are stretched out so that it -extends to the right margin as usual. +Encourage or discourage a line break. The optional zero-to-four +is an integer that allows you to soften the instruction. The default is +4, so that without the optional argument these commands entirely force +or prevent the break. But for instance, \nolinebreak[1] is a +suggestion that another place may be better. The higher the number, the +more insistent the request. Both commands are fragile +(see \protect). + +Here we tell &latex; that a good place to put a linebreak is after the +standard legal text. -With the optional argument priority, you can convert the command -from a demand to a request. The priority must be a number from -0 to 4. The higher the number, the more insistent the request. +\boilerplatelegal{} \linebreak[2] +We especially encourage applications from members of traditionally +underrepresented groups. + +When you issue \linebreak, the spaces in the line are stretched +out so that it extends to the right margin. See \\ +and \newline to have the spaces not stretched out. + @@ -5670,72 +7264,160 @@ from a demand to a request. The priority must be a n page breaking breaking pages -&latex; starts new pages asynchronously, when enough material has -accumulated to fill up a page. Usually this happens automatically, -but sometimes you may want to influence the breaks. - - - - -<literal>\cleardoublepage</literal> - -\cleardoublepage -starting on a right-hand page - -The \cleardoublepage command ends the current page and causes all -the pending floating figures and tables that have so far appeared in the -input to be printed. In a two-sided printing style, it also makes the -next page a right-hand (odd-numbered) page, producing a blank page if -necessary. - - - - -<literal>\clearpage</literal> +Ordinarily &latex; automatically takes care of breaking output into +pages with its usual aplomb. But if you are writing commands, or +tweaking the final version of a document, then you may need to +understand how to influence its actions. + + +&latex;’s algorithm for splitting a document into pages is more complex +than just waiting until there is enough material to fill a page and +outputting the result. Instead, &latex; typesets more material than +would fit on the page and then chooses a break that is optimal in some +way (it has the smallest badness). An example of the advantage of this +approach is that if the page has some vertical space that can be +stretched or shrunk, such as with rubber lengths between paragraphs, +then &latex; can use that to avoid widow lines (where a new page starts +with the last line of a paragraph; &latex; can squeeze the extra line +onto the first page) and orphans (where the first line of paragraph is +at the end of a page; &latex; can stretch the material of the first +page so the extra line falls on the second page). Another example is +where &latex; uses available vertical shrinkage to fit on a page not +just the header for a new section but also the first two lines of that +section. + +But &latex; does not optimize over the entire document’s set of page +breaks. So it can happen that the first page break is great but the +second one is lousy; to break the current page &latex; doesn’t look as +far ahead as the next page break. So occasionally you may want to +influence page breaks while preparing a final version of a document. + +See Layout for more material that is relevant to page breaking. + + + + +<literal>\clearpage</literal> & <literal>\cleardoublepage</literal> \clearpage flushing floats and starting a page starting a new page and clearing floats +\cleardoublepage +starting on a right-hand page -The \clearpage command ends the current page and causes all the -pending floating figures and tables that have so far appeared in the -input to be printed. +Synopsis: + +\clearpage + +or + +\cleardoublepage + +End the current page and output all of the pending floating figures and +tables (see Floats). If there are too many floats to fit on the +page then &latex; will put in extra pages containing only floats. In +two-sided printing, \cleardoublepage also makes the next page of +content a right-hand page, an odd-numbered page, if necessary inserting +a blank page. The \clearpage command is robust while +\cleardoublepage is fragile (see \protect). + +&latex;’s page breaks are optimized so ordinarily you only use this +command in a document body to polish the final version, or inside +commands. + + +The \cleardoublepage command will put in a blank page, but it +will have the running headers and footers. To get a really blank +page, use this command. + +\let\origdoublepage\cleardoublepage +\newcommand{\clearemptydoublepage}{% + \clearpage + {\pagestyle{empty}\origdoublepage}% +} + +If you want &latex;’s standard \chapter command to do this then +add the line \let\cleardoublepage\clearemptydoublepage. +The command \newpage (see \newpage) also ends the current +page, but without clearing pending floats. And, if &latex; is in +two-column mode then \newpage ends the current column while +\clearpage and \cleardoublepage end the current page. + + - + <literal>\newpage</literal> \newpage new page, starting starting a new page -The \newpage command ends the current page, but does not clear -floats (see \clearpage). +Synopsis: + +\newpage + +End the current page. This command is robust (see \protect). + +&latex;’s page breaks are optimized so ordinarily you only use this +command in a document body to polish the final version, or inside +commands. + +While the commands \clearpage and \cleardoublepage also +end the current page, in addition they clear pending floats +(see \clearpage & \cleardoublepage). And, if &latex; is in +two-column mode then \clearpage and \cleardoublepage end +the current page, possibly leaving an empty column, while +\newpage only ends the current column. + +In contrast with \pagebreak (see \pagebreak & \nopagebreak), +the \newpage command will cause the new page to start right where +requested. This + +Four score and seven years ago our fathers brought forth on this +continent, +\newpage +\noindent a new nation, conceived in Liberty, and dedicated to the +proposition that all men are created equal. + +makes a new page start after ‘continent,’ and the cut-off line is +not right justified. In addition, \newpage does not vertically +stretch out the page, as \pagebreak does. - + <literal>\enlargethispage</literal> \enlargethispage enlarge current page -\enlargethispage{size} +Synopsis, one of: + +\enlargethispage{size} +\enlargethispage*{size} + +Enlarge the \textheight for the current page. The required +argument size must be a rigid length (see Lengths). It may be +positive or negative. This command is fragile (see \protect). -\enlargethispage*{size} +A common strategy is to wait until you have the final text of a +document, and then pass through it tweaking line and page breaks. This +command allows you some page size leeway. -Enlarge the \textheight for the current page by the specified -amount; e.g., \enlargethispage{\baselineskip} will allow one -additional line. +This will allow one extra line on the current page. -The starred form tries to squeeze the material together on the page as -much as possible. This is normally used together with an explicit -\pagebreak. +\enlargethispage{\baselineskip} + +The starred form \enlargesthispage* tries to squeeze the material +together on the page as much as possible, for the common use case of +getting one more line on the page. This is often used together with an +explicit \pagebreak. - + <literal>\pagebreak</literal> & <literal>\nopagebreak</literal> \pagebreak @@ -5745,18 +7427,43 @@ much as possible. This is normally used together with an explicit Synopses: -\pagebreak[priority] -\nopagebreak[priority] +\pagebreak +\pagebreak[zero-to-four] + +or + +\nopagebreak +\nopagebreak[zero-to-four] -By default, the \pagebreak (\nopagebreak) command forces -(prevents) a page break at the current position. With -\pagebreak, the vertical space on the page is stretched out -where possible so that it extends to the normal bottom margin. +Encourage or discourage a page break. The optional zero-to-four +is an integer that allows you to soften the request. The default is 4, +so that without the optional argument these commands entirely force or +prevent the break. But for instance \nopagebreak[1] suggests to +&latex; that another spot might be preferable. The higher the number, +the more insistent the request. Both commands are fragile +(see \protect). + +&latex;’s page endings are optimized so ordinarily you only use this +command in a document body to polish the final version, or inside +commands. + +If you use these inside a paragraph, they apply to the point following +the line in which they appear. So this -With the optional argument priority, you can convert the -\pagebreak command from a demand to a request. The number must -be a number from 0 to 4. The higher the number, the more -insistent the request is. +Four score and seven years ago our fathers brought forth on this +continent, +\pagebreak +a new nation, conceived in Liberty, and dedicated to the proposition +that all men are created equal. + +does not give a page break at ‘continent,’ but instead at +‘nation,’ since that is where &latex; breaks that line. In +addition, with \pagebreak the vertical space on the page is +stretched out where possible so that it extends to the normal bottom +margin. This can look strange, and if \flushbottom is in effect +this can cause you to get ‘Underfull \vbox (badness 10000) has +occurred while \output is active’. See \newpage for a command that +does not have these effects. @@ -5766,21 +7473,22 @@ insistent the request is. footnotes, creating -Place a numbered footnote at the bottom of the current page, as here. +Place a footnote at the bottom of the current page, as here. Noël Coward quipped that having to read a footnote is like having to go downstairs to answer the door, while in the midst of making -love.\footnote{I wouldn't know, I don't read footnotes.} +love.\footnote{% + I wouldn't know, I don't read footnotes.} -You can place multiple footnotes on a page. If the text becomes too long -it will flow to the next page. +You can put multiple footnotes on a page. If the footnote text becomes +too long then it will flow to the next page. You can also produce footnotes by combining the \footnotemark and the \footnotetext commands, which is useful in special circumstances. To make bibliographic references come out as footnotes you need to -include a bibliographic style with that behavior. +include a bibliographic style with that behavior (see Using BibTeX). @@ -5789,47 +7497,77 @@ include a bibliographic style with that behavior. \footnote -Synopsis: +Synopsis, one of: -\footnote[number]{text} +\footnote{text} +\footnote[number]{text} -Place a numbered footnote text at the bottom of the current page. +Place a footnote text at the bottom of the current page. There are over a thousand footnotes in Gibbon's -\textit{Decline and Fall of the Roman Empire}.\footnote{After -reading an early version with endnotes David Hume complained, -``One is also plagued with his Notes, according to the present Method -of printing the Book'' and suggested that they ``only to be printed -at the Margin or the Bottom of the Page.''} +\textit{Decline and Fall of the Roman Empire}.\footnote{% + After reading an early version with endnotes David Hume complained, + ``One is also plagued with his Notes, according to the present Method + of printing the Book'' and suggested that they ``only to be printed + at the Margin or the Bottom of the Page.''} -The optional argument number allows you to specify the footnote -number. If you use this option then the footnote number counter is not -incremented, and if you do not use it then the counter is incremented. +The optional argument number allows you to specify the number of +the footnote. If you use this then &latex; does not increment the +footnote counter. footnotes, symbols instead of numbers \fnsymbol, and footnotes \@fnsymbol -Change how &latex; shows the footnote counter with something like +By default, &latex; uses arabic numbers as footnote markers. Change +this with something like \renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}}, which uses a sequence of symbols (see \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol). To make this change global put that in the preamble. If you make the change local then you may want to reset the counter with -\setcounter{footnote}{0}. By default &latex; uses arabic -numbers. +\setcounter{footnote}{0}. + +&latex; determines the spacing of footnotes with two parameters. + +footnote parameters +parameters, for footnotes + +\footnoterule\footnoterule +Produces the rule separating the main text on a page from the page’s +footnotes. Default dimensions in the standard document classes (except +slides, where it does not appear) is: vertical thickness of +0.4pt, and horizontal size of 0.4\columnwidth long. +Change the rule with something like this. + + +\renewcommand{\footnoterule}{% Kerns avoid vertical space + \kern -3pt % This -3 is negative + \hrule width \textwidth height 1pt % of the sum of this 1 + \kern 2pt} % and this 2 + +\footnotesep\footnotesep +The height of the strut placed at the beginning of the footnote +(see \strut). By default, this is set to the normal strut for +\footnotesize fonts (see Font sizes), therefore there is no +extra space between footnotes. This is ‘6.65pt’ for ‘10pt’, +‘7.7pt’ for ‘11pt’, and ‘8.4pt’ for ‘12pt’. Change +it as with \setlength{\footnotesep}{11pt}. + + +The \footnote command is fragile (see \protect). &latex;’s default puts many restrictions on where you can use a \footnote; for instance, you cannot use it in an argument to a sectioning command such as \chapter (it can only be used in outer -paragraph mode). There are some workarounds; see following sections. - +paragraph mode; see Modes). There are some workarounds; see +following sections. Footnotes, in a minipage mpfootnote counter -In a minipage environment the \footnote -command uses the mpfootnote counter instead of the -footnote counter, so they are numbered independently. They are -shown at the bottom of the environment, not at the bottom of the page. -And by default they are shown alphabetically. See minipage. +In a minipage environment the \footnote command uses the +mpfootnote counter instead of the footnote counter, so +they are numbered independently. They are shown at the bottom of the +environment, not at the bottom of the page. And by default they are +shown alphabetically. See minipage and Footnotes in a table. @@ -5843,14 +7581,25 @@ And by default they are shown alphabetically. See minip \footnotemark \footnotemark[number] -Put the current footnote number in the -text. (See \footnotetext for giving the text of the footnote -separately.) The version with the optional argument number uses -that number to determine the mark printed. This command can be used in -inner paragraph mode. +Put the current footnote mark in the text. To specify associated text +for the footnote see \footnotetext. The optional argument +number causes the command to use that number to determine the +footnote mark. This command can be used in inner paragraph mode +(see Modes). + +If you use \footnotemark without the optional argument then it +increments the footnote counter but if you use the optional number +then it does not. The next example produces several consecutive footnote +markers referring to the same footnote. -This example gives the same institutional affiliation to both the first -and third authors (\thanks is a version of footnote). +The first theorem\footnote{Due to Gauss.} +and the second theorem\footnotemark[\value{footnote}] +and the third theorem.\footnotemark[\value{footnote}] + +If there are intervening footnotes then you must remember the value of the +common mark. This example gives the same institutional affiliation to +both the first and third authors (\thanks is a version of +footnote), by-hand giving the number of the footnote. \title{A Treatise on the Binomial Theorem} \author{J Moriarty\thanks{University of Leeds} @@ -5859,15 +7608,38 @@ and third authors (\thanks is a version of footnote< \begin{document} \maketitle -If you use \footnotemark without the optional argument then it -increments the footnote counter but if you use the optional number -then it does not. This produces several consecutive footnote markers -referring to the same footnote. +This uses a counter to remember the footnote number. The third sentence +is followed by the same footnote marker as the first. -The first theorem\footnote{Due to Gauss.} -and the second theorem\footnotemark[\value{footnote}] -and the third theorem.\footnotemark[\value{footnote}] +\newcounter{footnoteValueSaver} +All babies are illogical.\footnote{% + Lewis Carroll.}\setcounter{footnoteValueSaver}{\value{footnote}} +Nobody is despised who can manage a crocodile.\footnote{% + Captain Hook.} +Illogical persons are despised.\footnotemark[\value{footnoteValueSaver}] +Therefore, anyone who can manage a crocodile is not a baby. + +package, cleveref +cleveref package + +package, hyperref +hyperref package + +This example accomplishes the same by using the package cleveref. + + +\usepackage{cleveref}[2012/02/15] % in preamble +\crefformat{footnote}{#2\footnotemark[#1]#3} +... +The theorem is from Evers.\footnote{\label{fn:TE}Tinker, Evers, 1994.} +The corollary is from Chance.\footnote{Evers, Chance, 1990.} +But the key lemma is from Tinker.\cref{fn:TE} +package, hyperref +hyperref package + +It will work with the package hyperref. + @@ -5880,156 +7652,136 @@ and the third theorem.\footnotemark[\value{footnote}] \footnotetext{text} \footnotetext[number]{text} -Place text at the bottom of the page as a footnote. This command -can come anywhere after the \footnotemark command. The optional -argument number changes the displayed footnote number. The -\footnotetext command must appear in outer paragraph mode. +Place text at the bottom of the page as a footnote. It pairs with +\footnotemark (see \footnotemark) and can come anywhere after +that command, but must appear in outer paragraph mode (see Modes). +The optional argument number changes the number of the footnote +mark. + +See \footnotemark and Footnotes in a table for usage +examples. + + + + +Footnotes in section headings + +footnote, in section headings +table of contents, avoiding footnotes + +Putting a footnote in a section heading, as in: + +\section{Full sets\protect\footnote{This material due to ...}} + +causes the footnote to appear at the bottom of the page where the +section starts, as usual, but also at the bottom of the table of +contents, where it is not likely to be desired. The simplest way +to have it not appear on the table of contents is to use the optional +argument to \section + +\section[Please]{Please\footnote{% + Don't footnote in chapter and section headers!}} + +No \protect is needed in front of \footnote here because +what gets moved to the table of contents is the optional argument. - + Footnotes in a table -Footnotes, in a table +footnote, in a table -Inside a table environment the \footnote command does not -work. For instance, if the code below appears on its own then the -footnote simply disappears; there is a footnote mark in the table cell -but nothing is set at the bottom of the page. +Inside a tabular or array environment the \footnote +command does not work; there is a footnote mark in the table cell but +the footnote text does not appear. The solution is to use a +minipage environment as here (see minipage). \begin{center} + \begin{minipage}{\textwidth} \centering \begin{tabular}{l|l} - \textsc{Ship} &\textsc{Book} \\ \hline - \textit{HMS Sophie} &Master and Commander \\ - \textit{HMS Polychrest} &Post Captain \\ - \textit{HMS Lively} &Post Captain \\ - \textit{HMS Surprise} &A number of books\footnote{Starting with - HMS Surprise.} + \textsc{Ship} &\textsc{Book} \\ \hline + \textit{HMS Sophie} &Master and Commander \\ + \textit{HMS Polychrest} &Post Captain \\ + \textit{HMS Lively} &Post Captain \\ + \textit{HMS Surprise} &A number of books\footnote{% + Starting with HMS Surprise.} \end{tabular} + \end{minipage} \end{center} -The solution is to surround the tabular environment with a -minipage environment, as here (see minipage). +Inside a minipage, footnote marks are lowercase letters. Change +that with something like +\renewcommand{\thempfootnote}{\arabic{mpfootnote}} +(see \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol). -\begin{center} - \begin{minipage}{.5\textwidth} - ... tabular material ... - \end{minipage} +The footnotes in the prior example appear at the bottom of the +minipage. To have them appear at the bottom of the main page, as +part of the regular footnote sequence, use the \footnotemark and +\footnotetext pair and make a new counter. + +\newcounter{mpFootnoteValueSaver} +\begin{center} + \begin{minipage}{\textwidth} + \setcounter{mpFootnoteValueSaver}{\value{footnote}} \centering + \begin{tabular}{l|l} + \textsc{Woman} &\textsc{Relationship} \\ \hline + Mona &Attached\footnotemark \\ + Diana Villiers &Eventual wife \\ + Christine Hatherleigh Wood &Fiance\footnotemark + \end{tabular} + \end{minipage}% percent sign keeps footnote text close to minipage + \stepcounter{mpFootnoteValueSaver}% + \footnotetext[\value{mpFootnoteValueSaver}]{% + Little is known other than her death.}% + \stepcounter{mpFootnoteValueSaver}% + \footnotetext[\value{mpFootnoteValueSaver}]{% + Relationship is unresolved in XXI.} \end{center} -The same technique will work inside a floating table environment -(see table). To get the footnote at the bottom of the page use the -tablefootnote package, as illustrated in this example. If you -put \usepackage{tablefootnote} in the preamble and use the code -shown then the footnote appears at the bottom and is numbered in -sequence with other footnotes. +For a floating table environment (see table), use the +tablefootnote package. -\begin{table} +\usepackage{tablefootnote} % in preamble + ... +\begin{table} \centering \begin{tabular}{l|l} \textsc{Date} &\textsc{Campaign} \\ \hline 1862 &Fort Donelson \\ 1863 &Vicksburg \\ - 1865 &Army of Northern Virginia\footnote{Ending the war.} + 1865 &Army of Northern Virginia\tablefootnote{% + Ending the war.} \end{tabular} \caption{Forces captured by US Grant} \end{table} - - - -Footnotes in section headings - -footnotes, in section headings -table of contents, avoiding footnotes -Putting a footnote in a section heading, as in: - -\section{Full sets\protect\footnote{This material due to ...}} - -package, footmisc -footmisc package - -stable option to footmisc package -causes the footnote to appear at the bottom of the page where the -section starts, as usual, but also at the bottom of the table of -contents, where it is not likely to be desired. To have it not appear -on the table of contents use the package footmisc with the -stable option. - -\usepackage[stable]{footmisc} -... -\begin{document} -... -\section{Full sets\footnote{This material due to ...}} - -Note that the \protect is gone; including it would cause the -footnote to reappear on the table of contents. +The footnote appears at the page bottom and is numbered in sequence with +other footnotes. Footnotes of footnotes +footnote, of a footnote + +package, bigfoot +bigfoot package + Particularly in the humanities, authors can have multiple classes of footnotes, including having footnotes of footnotes. The package bigfoot extends &latex;’s default footnote mechanism in many ways, including allow these two, as in this example. -\usepackage{bigfoot} +\usepackage{bigfoot} % in preamble \DeclareNewFootnote{Default} \DeclareNewFootnote{from}[alph] % create class \footnotefrom{} ... -\begin{document} -... The third theorem is a partial converse of the -second.\footnotefrom{First noted in Wilson.\footnote{Second edition only.}} -... - - - - -Multiple references to footnotes - -You can refer to a single footnote more than once. This example -uses the package cleverref. - - -\usepackage{cleveref}[2012/02/15] % this version of package or later -\crefformat{footnote}{#2\footnotemark[#1]#3} -... -\begin{document} -... -The theorem is from Evers.\footnote{\label{fn:TE}Tinker and Evers, 1994.} -The corollary is from Chance.\footnote{Evers and Chance, 1990.} -But the key lemma is from Tinker.\cref{fn:TE} -... +second.\footnotefrom{% + First noted in Wilson.\footnote{Second edition only.}} -This solution will work with the package hyperref. -See \footnotemark for a simpler solution in the common case -of multiple authors with the same affiliation. - - - - -Footnote parameters - -footnote parameters -parameters, for footnotes - -\footnoterule\footnoterule -Produces the rule separating the main text on a page from the page’s -footnotes. Default dimensions: 0.4pt thick (or wide), and -0.4\columnwidth long in the standard document classes (except -slides, where it does not appear). - -\footnotesep\footnotesep -The height of the strut placed at the beginning of the footnote. By -default, this is set to the normal strut for \footnotesize -fonts (see Font sizes), therefore there is no extra space between -footnotes. This is ‘6.65pt’ for ‘10pt’, ‘7.7pt’ for -‘11pt’, and ‘8.4pt’ for ‘12pt’. - - @@ -6040,9 +7792,6 @@ footnotes. This is ‘6.65pt’ for ‘ &latex; has support for making new commands of many different kinds. - - - @@ -6054,101 +7803,136 @@ footnotes. This is ‘6.65pt’ for ‘ defining a new command new commands, defining -\newcommand and \renewcommand define and redefine a -command, respectively. Synopses: +Synopses, one of: + +\newcommand{\cmd}{defn} +\newcommand{\cmd}[nargs]{defn} +\newcommand{\cmd}[nargs][optargdefault]{defn} +\newcommand*{\cmd}{defn} +\newcommand*{\cmd}[nargs]{defn} +\newcommand*{\cmd}[nargs][optargdefault]{defn} + +or one of these. - \newcommand{\cmd}[nargs][optargdefault]{defn} - \newcommand*{\cmd}[nargs][optargdefault]{defn} +\renewcommand{\cmd}[nargs]{defn} +\renewcommand{\cmd}[nargs]{defn} \renewcommand{\cmd}[nargs][optargdefault]{defn} +\renewcommand*{\cmd}{defn} +\renewcommand*{\cmd}[nargs]{defn} \renewcommand*{\cmd}[nargs][optargdefault]{defn} +Define or redefine a command. See also the discussion of +\DeclareRobustCommand in Class and package commands. starred form, defining new commands *-form, defining new commands -The starred form of these two commands requires that the arguments not -contain multiple paragraphs of text (not \long, in plain &tex; -terms). +The starred form of these two requires that the arguments not contain +multiple paragraphs of text (in plain &tex; terms that it not be +\long). + +These are the parameters: cmd -Required; \cmd is the command name. For \newcommand, it -must not be already defined and must not begin with \end. For -\renewcommand, it must already be defined. + +Required; the command name. It must begin with a backslash, \, +and must not begin with the four letter string \end. For +\newcommand, it must not be already defined. For +\renewcommand, this name must already be defined. nargs Optional; an integer from 0 to 9, specifying the number of arguments -that the command can take, including any optional argument. If this -argument is not present, the default is for the command to have no -arguments. When redefining a command, the new version can have a +that the command takes, including any optional argument. Omitting this +argument is the same as specifying 0, meaning that the command has no +arguments. If you redefine a command, the new version can have a different number of arguments than the old version. optargdefault -Optional; if this argument is present then the first argument of defined -command \cmd is optional, with default value optargdefault +Optional; if this argument is present then the first argument of +\cmd is optional, with default value optargdefault (which may be the empty string). If this argument is not present then \cmd does not take an optional argument. positional parameter -That is, if \cmd is used with square brackets following, -as in \cmd[myval], then within defn the first -positional parameter #1 expands myval. On the -other hand, if \cmd is called without square brackets -following, then within defn the positional parameter #1 -expands to the default optargdefault. In either case, any -required arguments will be referred to starting with #2. - -Omitting [myval] in a call is different from having the -square brackets with no contents, as in []. The former results -in #1 expanding to optargdefault; the latter results in -#1 expanding to the empty string. +That is, if \cmd is used with square brackets, as in +\cmd[optval]{...}..., then within defn the +parameter #1 is set to the value of optval. On the +other hand, if \cmd is called without the square brackets +then within defn the parameter #1 is set to the value of +optargdefault. In either case, the required arguments start with +#2. + +Omitting [optargdefault] is different from having the +square brackets with no contents, as in []. The former sets +#1 to the value of optargdefault; the latter sets #1 +to the empty string. defn -The text to be substituted for every occurrence of \cmd; the -positional parameter #n in defn is replaced by -the text of the nth argument. +Required; the text to be substituted for every occurrence of +\cmd. The parameters #1, #2, +... #nargs are replaced by the values that you supply when +you call the command (or by the default value if there is an optional +argument and you don’t exercise the option). &tex; ignores spaces in the source following an alphabetic control sequence, as in ‘\cmd ’. If you actually want a space there, one -solution is to type {} after the command (‘\cmd{} ’; +solution is to type {} after the command (‘\cmd{} ’, and another solution is to use an explicit control space (‘\cmd\ ’). A simple example of defining a new command: -\newcommand{\RS}{Robin Smith} results in -\RS being replaced by the longer text. - -Redefining an existing command is similar: +\newcommand{\RS}{Robin Smith} results in \RS being +replaced by the longer text. Redefining an existing command is similar: \renewcommand{\qedsymbol}{{\small QED}}. -Here’s a command definition with one required argument: +If you try to define a command and the name has already been used then +you get something like ‘LaTeX Error: Command \fred already +defined. Or name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual’. If you try +to redefine a command and the name has not yet been used then you get +something like ‘LaTeX Error: \hank undefined’. + +Here the first command definition has no arguments, and the second has +one required argument. -\newcommand{\defref}[1]{Definition~\ref{#1}} +\newcommand{\student}{Ms~O'Leary} +\newcommand{\defref}[1]{Definition~\ref{#1}} -Then, \defref{def:basis} expands to -Definition~\ref{def:basis}, which will ultimately expand to +Use the first as in I highly recommend \student{} to you. The +second has a variable, so that \defref{def:basis} expands to +Definition~\ref{def:basis}, which ultimately expands to something like ‘Definition~3.14’. -An example with two required arguments: +Similarly, but with two required arguments: \newcommand{\nbym}[2]{$#1 \times #2$} is invoked as \nbym{2}{k}. -An example with an optional argument: +This example has an optional argument. \newcommand{\salutation}[1][Sir or Madam]{Dear #1:} -Then, \salutation gives ‘Dear Sir or Madam:’ while +Then \salutation gives ‘Dear Sir or Madam:’ while \salutation[John] gives ‘Dear John:’. And \salutation[] gives ‘Dear :’. -The braces around defn do not define a group, that is, they do -not delimit the scope of the result of expanding defn. So -\newcommand{\shipname}[1]{\it #1} is problematic; in this -sentence, +This example has an optional argument and two required arguments. + +\newcommand{\lawyers}[3][company]{#2, #3, and~#1} +I employ \lawyers[Howe]{Dewey}{Cheatem}. + +The output is ‘I employ Dewey, Cheatem, and Howe’. The optional +argument, the Howe, is associated with #1, while +Dewey and Cheatem are associated with #2 +and #3. Because of the optional argument, +\lawyers{Dewey}{Cheatem} will give the output ‘I employ +Dewey, Cheatem, and company’. + +The braces around defn do not define a group, that is, they do not +delimit the scope of the result of expanding defn. For example, +with \newcommand{\shipname}[1]{\it #1}, in this sentence, The \shipname{Monitor} met the \shipname{Merrimac}. -the words ‘met the’ would incorrectly be in italics. Another -pair of braces in the definition is needed, like this: -\newcommand{\shipname}[1]{{\it #1}}. Those braces are -part of the definition and thus do define a group. +the words ‘met the’ would incorrectly be in italics. The solution +is to put another pair of braces inside the definition: +\newcommand{\shipname}[1]{{\it #1}}. @@ -6160,17 +7944,30 @@ part of the definition and thus do define a group. defining a new command new commands, defining -Defines a command, as long as no command of this name already exists. -Synopses: +Synopses, one of: -\providecommand{cmd}[nargs][optargdefault]{defn} +\providecommand{cmd}{defn} +\providecommand{cmd}[nargs]{defn} +\providecommand{cmd}[nargs][optargdefault]{defn} +\providecommand*{cmd}{defn} +\providecommand*{cmd}[nargs]{defn} \providecommand*{cmd}[nargs][optargdefault]{defn} -If no command of this name already exists then this has the same effect -as \newcommand (see \newcommand & \renewcommand). If a -command of this name already exists then this definition does nothing. -This is particularly useful in a style file, or other file that may be -loaded more than once. +Defines a command, as long as no command of this name already exists. +If no command of this name already exists then this has the same effect +as \newcommand. If a command of this name already exists then +this definition does nothing. This is particularly useful in a file +that may be loaded more than once, such as a style file. +See \newcommand & \renewcommand for the description of the arguments. + +This example + +\providecommand{\myaffiliation}{Saint Michael's College} +\providecommand{\myaffiliation}{Saint Michael's College} +From \myaffiliation. + +outputs ‘From Saint Michael's College’. Unlike \newcommand, +the repeated use of \providecommand does not give an error. @@ -6185,27 +7982,46 @@ loaded more than once. \newcounter{countername} \newcounter{countername}[supercounter] -Globally defines a new counter named countername and initialize -the new counter to zero. +Globally defines a new counter named countername and initialize it +to zero (see Counters). -The name countername must consists of letters only, and does not +The name countername must consist of letters only. It does not begin with a backslash. This name must not already be in use by another counter. -When you use the optional argument [supercounter] then -countername will be numbered within, or subsidiary to, the -existing counter supercounter. For example, ordinarily -subsection is numbered within section so that any time -supercounter is incremented with \stepcounter +When you use the optional argument [supercounter] then the +counter countername will be reset to zero whenever +supercounter is incremented. For example, ordinarily +subsection is numbered within section so that any time you +increment section, either with \stepcounter (see \stepcounter) or \refstepcounter -(see \refstepcounter) then countername is reset to zero. +(see \refstepcounter), then &latex; will reset subsection to +zero. + +This example + +\newcounter{asuper} \setcounter{asuper}{1} +\newcounter{asub}[asuper] \setcounter{asub}{3} % Note `asuper' +The value of asuper is \arabic{asuper} and of asub is \arabic{asub}. +\stepcounter{asuper} +Now asuper is \arabic{asuper} while asub is \arabic{asub}. + +produces ‘The value of asuper is 1 and that of asub is 3’ and +‘Now asuper is 2 while asub is 0’. + +If the counter already exists, for instance by entering asuper +twice, then you get something like ‘LaTeX Error: Command \c@asuper +already defined. Or name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual.’. -See Counters, for more information about counters. +If you use the optional argument then the super counter must already +exist. Entering \newcounter{jh}[lh] when lh is not a +defined counter will get you ‘LaTeX Error: No counter 'lh' +defined. -<literal>\newlength</literal>: Allocating a length +<literal>\newlength</literal> \newlength lengths, allocating new @@ -6213,39 +8029,57 @@ existing counter supercounter. For example, ordinari skip register, plain &tex; glue register, plain &tex; -Allocate a new length register. Synopsis: +Synopsis: -\newlength{\arg} +\newlength{arg} -This command takes one required argument, which must begin with a -backslash (‘\’). It creates a new length register named -\arg, which is a place to hold (rubber) lengths such as -1in plus.2in minus.1in (what plain &tex; calls a skip -register). The register gets an initial value of zero. The control -sequence \arg must not already be defined. +Allocate a new length register (see Lengths). The required argument +arg must begin with a backslash, \. The new register holds +rubber lengths such as 72.27pt or 1in plus.2in minus.1in +(a &latex; length register is what plain &tex; calls a skip +register). The initial value is zero. The control sequence +\arg must not be already defined. + +An example: -See Lengths, for more about lengths. +\newlength{\graphichgt} + +If you forget the backslash then you get ‘Missing control sequence +inserted’. If the command sequence already exists then you get +something like ‘LaTeX Error: Command \graphichgt already defined. +Or name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual’. -<literal>\newsavebox</literal>: Allocating a box +<literal>\newsavebox</literal> \newsavebox box, allocating new -Allocate a “bin” for holding a box. Synopsis: +Synopsis: -\newsavebox{\cmd} +\newsavebox{cmd} -Defines \cmd to refer to a new bin for storing boxes. -Such a box is for holding typeset material, to use multiple times -(see Boxes) or to measure or manipulate. The name -\cmd must start with a backslash (‘\’), and must not -be already defined. +Define \cmd to refer to a new “bin” for storing boxes. +Such a box is for holding typeset material, to use multiple times or to +measure or manipulate (see Boxes). The required bin name +cmd must start with a backslash, \, and must not +already be defined. This command is fragile (see \protect). -The allocation of a box is global. This command is fragile -(see \protect). +The first line here sets you up to save the material for later use. + +\newsavebox{\logobox} +\savebox{\logobox}{LoGo} +Our logo is \usebox{\logobox}. + +The output is ‘Our logo is LoGo’. + +If there is an already defined bin then you get something like +‘LaTeX Error: Command \logobox already defined. Or name +\end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual’. + +The allocation of a box is global. @@ -6258,23 +8092,36 @@ be already defined. defining new environments redefining environments -These commands define or redefine an environment env, that is, -\begin{env} body \end{env}. Synopses: +Synopses, one of: + +\newenvironment{env}{begdef}{enddef} +\newenvironment{env}[nargs]{begdef}{enddef} +\newenvironment{env}[nargs][optargdefault]{begdef}{enddef} +\newenvironment*{env}{begdef}{enddef} +\newenvironment*{env}[nargs]{begdef}{enddef} +\newenvironment*{env}[nargs][optargdefault]{begdef}{enddef} + +or one of these. - \newenvironment{env}[nargs][optargdefault]{begdefn}{enddefn} - \newenvironment*{env}[nargs][optargdefault]{begdefn}{enddefn} - \renewenvironment{env}[nargs][optargdefault]{begdefn}{enddefn} -\renewenvironment*{env}[nargs][optargdefault]{begdefn}{enddefn} +\renewenvironment{env}{begdef}{enddef} +\renewenvironment{env}[nargs]{begdef}{enddef} +\renewenvironment{env}[nargs][optargdefault]{begdef}{enddef} +\renewenvironment*{env}{begdef}{enddef} +\renewenvironment*{env}[nargs]{begdef}{enddef} +\renewenvironment*{env}[nargs][optargdefault]{begdef}{enddef} +Define or redefine the environment env, that is, create the +construct \begin{env} ... body ... \end{env}. + *-form of environment commands The starred form of these commands requires that the arguments not -contain multiple paragraphs of text. The body of these environments can -still contain multiple paragraphs. +contain multiple paragraphs of text. However, the body of these +environments can contain multiple paragraphs. env Required; the environment name. It consists only of letters or the -* character, and thus does not begin with backslash -(\). It must not begin with the string end. For +* character, and thus does not begin with backslash, \. +It must not begin with the string end. For \newenvironment, the name env must not be the name of an already existing environment, and also the command \env must be undefined. For \renewenvironment, env must be the @@ -6282,54 +8129,60 @@ name of an existing environment. nargs Optional; an integer from 0 to 9 denoting the number of arguments of -that the environment will take. When the environment is used these +that the environment takes. When you use the environment these arguments appear after the \begin, as in -\begin{env}{arg1}…{argn}. If this -argument is not present then the default is for the environment to have -no arguments. When redefining an environment, the new version can have -a different number of arguments than the old version. +\begin{env}{arg1} ... {argn}. Omitting +this is equivalent to setting it to 0; the environment will have no +arguments. When redefining an environment, the new version can have a +different number of arguments than the old version. optargdefault -Optional; if this argument is present then the first argument of the -defined environment is optional, with default value optargdefault -(which may be the empty string). If this argument is not present then -the environment does not take an optional argument. - -That is, when [optargdefault] is present in the -environment definition, if \begin{env} is used with -square brackets following, as in -\begin{env}[myval], then, within begdefn, -the positional parameter #1 expands to myval. If -\begin{env} is called without square brackets -following, then, within within begdefn, the positional parameter -#1 expands to the default optargdefault. In either case, -any required arguments will be referred to starting with #2. - -Omitting [myval] in the call is different from having the +Optional; if this is present then the first argument of the defined +environment is optional, with default value optargdefault (which +may be the empty string). If this is not in the definition then the +environment does not take an optional argument. + +That is, when optargdefault is present in the definition of the +environment then you can start the environment with square brackets, as +in \begin{env}[optval]{...} ... \end{env}. +In this case, within begdefn the parameter #1 is set to the +value of optval. If you call \begin{env} without +square brackets, then within begdefn the parameter #1 is +set to the value of the default optargdefault. In either case, +any required arguments start with #2. + +Omitting [myval] in the call is different than having the square brackets with no contents, as in []. The former results in #1 expanding to optargdefault; the latter results in #1 expanding to the empty string. -begdefn +
    begdef Required; the text expanded at every occurrence of -\begin{env}. Within begdef, the nth -positional parameter (i.e., #n) is replaced by the text -of the nth argument. +\begin{env}. Within begdef, the parameters +#1, #2, ... #nargs, are replaced by the +values that you supply when you call the environment; see the examples +below. -enddefn +enddef Required; the text expanded at every occurrence of -\end{env}. This may not contain any positional -parameters, so #n cannot be used here (but see the final +\end{env}. This may not contain any parameters, that is, +you cannot use #1, #2, etc., here (but see the final example below).
    -All environments, that is to say the begdefn code, the environment -body and the enddefn code, are processed within a group. Thus, in +All environments, that is to say the begdef code, the environment +body, and the enddef code, are processed within a group. Thus, in the first example below, the effect of the \small is limited to the quote and does not extend to material following the environment. +If you try to define an environment and the name has already been used +then you get something like ‘LaTeX Error: Command \fred already +defined. Or name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual’. If you try +to redefine an environment and the name has not yet been used then you +get something like ‘LaTeX Error: Environment hank undefined.’. + This example gives an environment like &latex;’s quotation -except that it will be set in smaller type: +except that it will be set in smaller type. \newenvironment{smallquote}{% \small\begin{quotation} @@ -6337,8 +8190,16 @@ except that it will be set in smaller type: \end{quotation} } -This one shows the use of arguments; it gives a quotation environment -that cites the author: +This has an argument, which is set in boldface at the start of a +paragraph. + +\newenvironment{point}[1]{% + \noindent\textbf{#1} +}{% +} + +This one shows the use of a optional argument; it gives a quotation +environment that cites the author. \newenvironment{citequote}[1][Shakespeare]{% \begin{quotation} @@ -6347,15 +8208,15 @@ that cites the author: \end{quotation} } -The author’s name is optional, and defaults to ‘Shakespeare’. -In the document, use the environment like this: +The author’s name is optional, and defaults to ‘Shakespeare’. In +the document, use the environment like this. \begin{citequote}[Lincoln] ... \end{citequote} The final example shows how to save the value of an argument to use in -enddefn, in this case in a box (see \sbox): +enddef, in this case in a box (see \sbox & \savebox). \newsavebox{\quoteauthor} \newenvironment{citequote}[1][Shakespeare]{% @@ -6377,31 +8238,30 @@ In the document, use the environment like this: theorem-like environment environment, theorem-like -Define a new theorem-like environment. Synopses: +Synopses: \newtheorem{name}{title} \newtheorem{name}{title}[numbered_within] \newtheorem{name}[numbered_like]{title} -Using the first form, \newtheorem{name}{title} -creates an environment that will be labelled with title. See the -first example below. +Define a new theorem-like environment. You can specify one of +numbered_within and numbered_like, or neither, but not both. + +The first form, \newtheorem{name}{title}, creates +an environment that will be labelled with title; see the first +example below. -The second form -\newtheorem{name}{title}[numbered_within] +The second form, +\newtheorem{name}{title}[numbered_within], creates an environment whose counter is subordinate to the existing -counter numbered_within (its counter will be reset when -numbered_within is reset). +counter numbered_within, so this counter will be reset when +numbered_within is reset. See the second example below. - The third form \newtheorem{name}[numbered_like]{title}, -with optional argument between the two required arguments, will create -an environment whose counter will share the previously defined counter -numbered_like. - -You can specify one of numbered_within and numbered_like, -or neither, but not both. +with optional argument between the two required arguments, creates an +environment whose counter will share the previously defined counter +numbered_like. See the third example. This command creates a counter named name. In addition, unless the optional argument numbered_like is used, inside of the @@ -6413,12 +8273,13 @@ theorem-like environment the current \ref value will be that Arguments: name -The name of the environment. It must not begin with a backslash -(‘\’). It must not be the name of an existing environment; indeed, -the command name \name must not already be defined as anything. +The name of the environment. It is a string of letters. It must not +begin with a backslash, \. It must not be the name of an +existing environment, and the command name \name must not +already be defined. title -The text printed at the beginning of the environment, before the +The text to be printed at the beginning of the environment, before the number. For example, ‘Theorem’. numbered_within @@ -6452,10 +8313,10 @@ output. Second def \end{defn} -Because the next example specifies the optional argument -numbered_within to \newtheorem as section, the -example, with the same document body, gives ‘Definition 1.1’ -and ‘Definition 2.1’. +This example has the same document body as the prior one. But here +\newtheorem’s optional argument numbered_within is given as +section, so the output is like ‘Definition 1.1’ and +‘Definition 2.1’. \newtheorem{defn}{Definition}[section] \begin{document} @@ -6494,43 +8355,41 @@ by ‘Theorem 2.1’ and ‘Definit -<literal>\newfont</literal>: Define a new font (obsolete) +<literal>\newfont</literal> \newfont fonts, new commands for defining new fonts -\newfont, now obsolete, defines a command that will switch fonts. -Synopsis: + +This command is obsolete. This description is here only to help with old +documents. New documents should define fonts in families through the +New Font Selection Scheme which allows you to, for example, associate a +boldface with a roman (see Fonts). + + + + +Synopsis: \newfont{\cmd}{font description} -This defines a control sequence \cmd that will change the -current font. &latex; will look on your system for a file named -fontname.tfm. The control sequence must must not already -be defined. It must begin with a backslash (‘\’). - -.fd file -This command is obsolete. It is a low-level command for setting up an -individual font. Today fonts are almost always defined in families -(which allows you to, for example, associate a boldface with a roman) -through the so-called “New Font Selection Scheme”, either by using -.fd files or through the use of an engine that can access -system fonts such as Xe&latex; (see &tex; engines). - +Define a command \cmd that will change the current font. +The control sequence must must not already be defined. It must begin +with a backslash, \. at clause, in font definitions design size, in font definitions -But since it is part of &latex;, here is an explanation: the -font description consists of a fontname and an optional -at clause; this can have the form either at dimen -or scaled factor, where a factor of ‘1000’ -means no scaling. For &latex;’s purposes, all this does is scale all -the character and other font dimensions relative to the font’s design -size, which is a value defined in the .tfm file. +The font description consists of a fontname and an optional +at clause. &latex; will look on your system for a file named +fontname.tfm. The at clause can have the form either +at dimen or scaled factor, where a +factor of ‘1000’ means no scaling. For &latex;’s purposes, +all this does is scale all the character and other font dimensions +relative to the font’s design size, which is a value defined in the +.tfm file. -This example defines two equivalent fonts and typesets a few -characters in each: +This defines two equivalent fonts and typesets a few characters in each. \newfont{\testfontat}{cmb10 at 11pt} \newfont{\testfontscaled}{cmb10 scaled 1100} @@ -6631,12 +8490,14 @@ the command and the question text. \newcommand{\points}[1]{\makebox[0pt]{\makebox[10em][l]{#1~pts}} \begin{enumerate} \item\points{10}no extra space output here - \item\points{15} extra space output between the number and the word `extra' + \item\points{15} extra space between the number and the `extra' \end{enumerate} -The solution is to change to -\newcommand{\points}[1]{\makebox[0pt]{\makebox[10em][l]{#1~pts}}\ignorespaces}. +The solution is to change to this. +\newcommand{\points}[1]{% + \makebox[0pt]{\makebox[10em][l]{#1~pts}}\ignorespaces} + A second example shows spaces being removed from the front of text. The commands below allow a user to uniformly attach a title to names. But, as given, if a title accidentally starts with a space then @@ -6644,7 +8505,7 @@ as given, if a title accidentally starts with a space then \makeatletter \newcommand{\honorific}[1]{\def\@honorific{#1}} % remember title -\newcommand{\fullname}[1]{\@honorific~#1} % recall title; put before name +\newcommand{\fullname}[1]{\@honorific~#1} % put title before name \makeatother \begin{tabular}{|l|} \honorific{Mr/Ms} \fullname{Jones} \\ % no extra space here @@ -6710,6 +8571,8 @@ inside of a minipage (see minipage). The counte through enumiv are used in the enumerate environment, for up to four levels of nesting (see enumerate). +Counters can have any integer value but they are typically positive. + New counters are created with \newcounter. See \newcounter. @@ -6722,7 +8585,7 @@ up to four levels of nesting (see enumerate). Print the value of a counter, in a specified style. For instance, if the counter counter has the value 1 then a -\alph{counter} in your source will result in a lower case +\alph{counter} in your source will result in a lowercase letter a appearing in the output. All of these commands take a single counter as an argument, for @@ -6730,46 +8593,54 @@ instance, \alph{enumi}. Note that the counter name does not start with a backslash. \alph{counter}\alph{counter} -Print the value of counter in lowercase letters: ‘a’, ‘b’, ... +Print the value of counter in lowercase letters: ‘a’, ‘b’, +... If the counter’s value is less than 1 or more than 26 then +you get ‘LaTeX Error: Counter too large. \Alph{counter}\Alph{counter} -Print in uppercase letters: ‘A’, ‘B’, ... +Print in uppercase letters: ‘A’, ‘B’, ... If the counter’s value +is less than 1 or more than 26 then you get ‘LaTeX Error: Counter +too large. \arabic{counter}\arabic{counter} -Print in Arabic numbers: ‘1’, ‘2’, ... +Print in Arabic numbers such as ‘5’ or ‘-2’. \roman{counter}\roman{counter} -Print in lowercase roman numerals: ‘i’, ‘ii’, ... +Print in lowercase roman numerals: ‘i’, ‘ii’, ... If the +counter’s value is less than 1 then you get no warning or error but +&latex; does not print anything in the output. \Roman{counter}\Roman{counter} -Print in uppercase roman numerals: ‘I’, ‘II’, ... +Print in uppercase roman numerals: ‘I’, ‘II’, ... If the +counter’s value is less than 1 then you get no warning or error but +&latex; does not print anything in the output. \fnsymbol{counter}\fnsymbol{counter} -Prints the value of counter in a specific sequence of nine -symbols (conventionally used for labeling footnotes). The value of -counter must be between 1 and 9, inclusive. +Prints the value of counter using a sequence of nine symbols that +are traditionally used for labeling footnotes. The value of +counter should be between 1 and 9, inclusive. If the +counter’s value is less than 0 or more than 9 then you get ‘LaTeX +Error: Counter too large’, while if it is 0 then you get no error or +warning but &latex; does not output anything. Here are the symbols: -NameCommandEquivalent Unicode symbol and/or numeric code point -asterisk\ast* -dagger\dagger† -ddagger\ddagger‡ -section-sign\S§ -paragraph-sign\P¶ -double-vert\parallel‖ -double-asterisk\ast\ast** -double-dagger\dagger\dagger†† -double-ddagger\ddagger\ddagger‡‡ +NumberNameCommandSymbol +1asterisk\ast* +2dagger\dagger† +3ddagger\ddagger‡ +4section-sign\S§ +5paragraph-sign\P¶ +6double-vert\parallel‖ +7double-asterisk\ast\ast** +8double-dagger\dagger\dagger†† +9double-ddagger\ddagger\ddagger‡‡ -<literal>\usecounter{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</literal> +<literal>\usecounter</literal> \usecounter list items, specifying counter @@ -6779,15 +8650,16 @@ symbols (conventionally used for labeling footnotes). The value of \usecounter{counter} -In the list environment, when used in the second argument, this -command sets up counter to number the list items. It initializes -counter to zero, and arranges that when \item is called -without its optional argument then counter is incremented by -\refstepcounter, making its value be the current ref -value. This command is fragile (see \protect). +Used in the second argument of the list environment +(see list), this declares that list items will be numbered by +counter. It initializes counter to zero, and arranges that +when \item is called without its optional argument then +counter is incremented by \refstepcounter, making its value +be the current ref value (see \ref). This command is fragile +(see \protect). -Put in the preamble, this makes a new list environment enumerated with -testcounter: +Put in the document preamble, this example makes a new list environment +enumerated with testcounter: \newcounter{testcounter} \newenvironment{test}{% @@ -6801,7 +8673,7 @@ value. This command is fragile (see \protect -<literal>\value{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</literal> +<literal>\value</literal> \value counters, getting value of @@ -6810,13 +8682,8 @@ value. This command is fragile (see \protect \value{counter} -This command expands to the value of counter. It is often used -in \setcounter or \addtocounter, but \value can -be used anywhere that &latex; expects a number. It must not be -preceded by \protect (see \protect). - -The \value command is not used for typesetting the value of the -counter. See \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol. +Expands to the value of the counter counter. (Note that the name +of a counter does not begin with a backslash.) This example outputs ‘Test counter is 6. Other counter is 5.’. @@ -6828,6 +8695,14 @@ is 5.’. Test counter is \arabic{test}. Other counter is \arabic{other}. +The \value command is not used for typesetting the value of the +counter. For that, see \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol. + +It is often used in \setcounter or \addtocounter but +\value can be used anywhere that &latex; expects a number, such +as in \hspace{\value{foo}\parindent}. It must not be +preceded by \protect (see \protect). + This example inserts \hspace{4\parindent}. \setcounter{myctr}{3} \addtocounter{myctr}{1} @@ -6836,7 +8711,7 @@ Other counter is \arabic{other}. -<literal>\setcounter{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}{<replaceable>value</replaceable>}</literal> +<literal>\setcounter</literal> \setcounter counters, setting @@ -6846,24 +8721,29 @@ Other counter is \arabic{other}. \setcounter{counter}{value} -The \setcounter command globally sets the value of counter -to the value argument. Note that the counter name does not start -with a backslash. +Globally set the counter counter to have the value of the +value argument, which must be an integer. Thus, you can set a +counter’s value as \setcounter{section}{5}. Note that the +counter name does not start with a backslash. -In this example the section value appears as ‘V’. +In this example if the counter theorem has value 12 then the +second line will print ‘XII’. -\setcounter{section}{5} -Here it is in Roman: \Roman{section}. +\setcounter{exercise}{\value{theorem}} +Here it is in Roman: \Roman{exercise}. -<literal>\addtocounter{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}{<replaceable>value</replaceable>}</literal> +<literal>\addtocounter</literal> \addtocounter -The \addtocounter command globally increments counter by -the amount specified by the value argument, which may be negative. +Synopsis: + +\addtocounter{counter}{value  +Globally increment counter by the amount specified by the +value argument, which may be negative. In this example the section value appears as ‘VII’. @@ -6874,15 +8754,18 @@ Here it is in Roman: \Roman{section}. -<literal>\refstepcounter{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</literal> +<literal>\refstepcounter</literal> \refstepcounter -The \refstepcounter command works in the same way as -\stepcounter (see \stepcounter): it globally increments the -value of counter by one and resets the value of any counter -numbered within it. (For the definition of “counters numbered -within”, see \newcounter.) +Synopsis: + +\refstepcounter{counter} + +Globally increments the value of counter by one, as does +\stepcounter (see \stepcounter). The difference is that this +command resets the value of any counter numbered within it. (For the +definition of “counters numbered within”, see \newcounter.) In addition, this command also defines the current \ref value to be the result of \thecounter. @@ -6893,31 +8776,47 @@ locally, i.e., inside the current group. -<literal>\stepcounter{<replaceable>counter</replaceable>}</literal> +<literal>\stepcounter</literal> \stepcounter -The \stepcounter command globally adds one to counter and -resets all counters numbered within it. (For the definition of -“counters numbered within”, see \newcounter.) +Synopsis: + +\stepcounter{counter} + +Globally adds one to counter and resets all counters numbered +within it. (For the definition of “counters numbered within”, +see \newcounter.) + +This command differs from \refstepcounter in that this one does +not influence references — it does not define the current +\ref value to be the result of \thecounter +(see \refstepcounter). - -<literal>\day \month \year</literal>: Predefined counters + +<literal>\day</literal> & <literal>\month</literal> & <literal>\year</literal> \day \month \year -&latex; defines counters for the day of the month (\day, -1–31), month of the year (\month, 1–12), and year -(\year, Common Era). When &tex; starts up, they are -set to the current values on the system where &tex; is running. They -are not updated as the job progresses. +&latex; defines the counter \day for the day of the month +(nominally with value between 1 and 31), \month for the month of +the year (nominally with value between 1 and 12), and year \year. +When &tex; starts up, they are set from the current values on the +system. The related command \today produces a string +representing the current day (see \today). -The related command \today produces a string representing the -current day (see \today). +They counters are not updated as the job progresses so in principle they +could be incorrect by the end. In addition, &tex; does no sanity +check: + +\day=-2 \month=13 \year=-4 \today + +gives no error or warning and results in the output ‘-2, -4’ (the +bogus month value produces no output). @@ -6930,32 +8829,99 @@ current day (see \today). A length is a measure of distance. Many &latex; commands take a length as an argument. +This shows a box of the given length. + +\newcommand{\blackbar}[1]{\rule{#1}{10pt}} % make a bar +\newcommand{\showhbox}[2]{\fboxsep=0pt\fbox{\hbox to #1{#2}}} % box it +XXX\showhbox{100pt}{\blackbar{100pt}}YYY + +It produces a black bar 100 points long between ‘XXX’ and +‘YYY’. + Lengths come in two types. A rigid length (what Plain &tex; -calls a dimen) such as 10pt cannot contain a plus or -minus component. A rubber length (what Plain &tex; calls -a skip) can contain those, as with 1cm plus0.05cm -minus0.01cm. These give the ability to stretch or shrink; the length -in the prior sentence could appear in the output as long as 1.05 cm -or as short as 0.99 cm, depending on what &tex;’s typesetting -algorithm finds optimum. +calls a dimen) such as 10pt does not contain a plus +or minus component. The above example shows a rigid length. A +rubber length (what Plain &tex; calls a skip) can contain +those components, as with 1cm plus0.05cm minus0.01cm. Here the +1cm is the natural length while the other two, the +plus and minus components, allow the length to stretch or +shrink. + +Shrinking is simpler: with 1cm minus 0.05cm, the natural length +is 1cm but if smaller is needed then &tex; can shrink it down as +far as 0.95cm. Beyond that, &tex; refuses to shrink any more. +Thus, below the first one works fine, producing a space of +98 points between the two bars. + +XXX\showhbox{300pt}{% + \blackbar{101pt}\hspace{100pt minus 2pt}\blackbar{101pt}}YYY + +XXX\showhbox{300pt}{% + \blackbar{105pt}\hspace{100pt minus 1pt}\blackbar{105pt}}YYY + +But the second one gets a warning like ‘Overfull \hbox (1.0pt too +wide) detected at line 17’. In the output the first ‘Y’ is +overwritten by the end of the black bar, because the box’s material is +wider than the 300pt allocated, as &tex; has refused to shrink +the total to less than 309 points. + +Stretching is like shrinking except that if &tex; is asked to stretch +beyond the given amount, it won’t refuse. Here the first line is fine, +producing a space of 110 points between the bars. + +XXX\showhbox{300pt}{% + \blackbar{95pt}\hspace{100pt plus 10pt}\blackbar{95pt}}YYY + +XXX\showhbox{300pt}{% + \blackbar{95pt}\hspace{100pt plus 1pt}\blackbar{95pt}}YYY + +In the second line &tex; needs a stretch of 10 points and only +1 point was specified. In this situation, &tex; stretches the +space to the required length, but it complains with a warning like +‘Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) detected at line 22’. (We won’t +discuss badness; the point is that the system was not given as much +stretch as needed.) + +You can put both stretch and shrink in the same length, as in +1ex plus 0.05ex minus 0.02ex. + +If &tex; is setting two or more rubber lengths then it allocates the +stretch or shrink in proportion. + +XXX\showhbox{300pt}{\blackbar{100pt}% left + \hspace{0pt plus 50pt}\blackbar{80pt}\hspace{0pt plus 10pt}% middle + \blackbar{100pt}}YYY % right + +The outside bars take up 100 points, so the middle needs another +100. In the middle the bar takes up 80 points, so the two +\hspace’s must stretch 20 points. Because the two say +plus 50pt and plus 10pt, &tex; gets 5/6 of the +stretch from the first space and 1/6 from the second. The plus or minus component of a rubber length can contain a fill component, as in 1in plus2fill. This gives the -length infinite stretchability or shrinkability, so that the length in -the prior sentence can be set by &tex; to any distance greater than or -equal to 1 inch. &tex; actually provides three infinite glue -components fil, fill, and filll, such that the -later ones overcome the earlier ones, but only the middle value is -ordinarily used. See \hfill, See \vfill. - -Multiplying an entire rubber length by a number turns it into a rigid -length, so that after \setlength{\ylength}{1in plus 0.2in} -and \setlength{\zlength}{3\ylength} then the value of +length infinite stretchability or shrinkability so that &tex; could set +it to any distance. Here the two figures will be equal-spaced across +the page. + +\begin{minipage}{\linewidth} + \hspace{0pt plus 1fill}\includegraphics{godel.png}% + \hspace{0pt plus 1fill}\includegraphics{einstein.png}% + \hspace{0pt plus 1fill} +\end{minipage} + +&tex; actually has three infinite glue components fil, +fill, and filll. The later ones are more infinite than +the earlier ones. Ordinarily document authors only use the middle one +(see \hfill and see \vfill). + +Multiplying a rubber length by a number turns it into a rigid length, so +that after \setlength{\ylength}{1in plus 0.2in} and +\setlength{\zlength}{3\ylength} then the value of \zlength is 3in. - Units of length @@ -6967,49 +8933,49 @@ math mode. pt pt Point -Point 1/72.27 inch. The conversion to metric units, to two decimal +Point 1/72.27 inch. The conversion to metric units, to two decimal places, is 1point = 2.85mm = 28.45cm. pc pica pc -Pica, 12 pt +Pica, 12 pt in in inch -Inch, 72.27 pt +Inch, 72.27 pt bp bp Big point -Big point, 1/72 inch. This length is the definition of a point in +Big point, 1/72 inch. This length is the definition of a point in PostScript and many desktop publishing systems. cm Centimeter cm -Centimeter +Centimeter mm Millimeter mm -Millimeter +Millimeter dd Didot point dd -Didot point, 1.07 pt +Didot point, 1.07 pt cc Cicero cc -Cicero, 12 dd +Cicero, 12 dd sp Scaled point sp -Scaled point, 1/65536 pt +Scaled point, 1/65536 pt ex @@ -7018,9 +8984,9 @@ PostScript and many desktop publishing systems. m-width em em -Two other lengths that are often used are values set by the designer of +Two other lengths that are often used are values set by the designer of the font. The x-height of the current font ex, traditionally the -height of the lower case letter x, is often used for vertical +height of the lowercase letter x, is often used for vertical lengths. Similarly em, traditionally the width of the capital letter M, is often used for horizontal lengths (there is also \enspace, which is 0.5em). Use of these can help make a @@ -7046,13 +9012,24 @@ math symbols family. See Spacing in math m Synopsis: -\setlength{\len}{amount} +\setlength{len}{amount} + +Set the length len to amount. The length name len +must begin with a backslash, \. The amount can be a +rubber length (see Lengths). It can be positive, negative or zero, +and can be in any units that &latex; understands (see Units of +length). + +Below, with &latex;’s defaults the first paragraph will be indented +while the second will not. + +I told the doctor I broke my leg in two places. + +\setlength{\parindent}{0em} +He said stop going to those places. -The \setlength sets the value of length command -length command -\len to the value argument which can be expressed in any -units that &latex; understands, i.e., inches (in), millimeters -(mm), points (pt), big points (bp), etc. +If there is no such length len then you get something like +‘Undefined control sequence. <argument> \praindent’. @@ -7064,15 +9041,31 @@ units that &latex; understands, i.e., inches (in), millimeter Synopsis: -\addtolength{\len}{amount} +\addtolength{len}{amount} - -The \addtolength command increments a length command \len -by the amount specified in the amount argument, which may be -negative. +Increment the length len by amount. The length name +len begins with a backslash, \. The amount is a +rubber length (see Lengths). It can be positive, negative or zero, +and can be in any units that &latex; understands (see Units of +length). +Below, if \parskip starts with the value 0pt plus 1pt + +\addtolength{\parskip}{1pt} +Doctor: how is the boy who swallowed the silver dollar? - +Nurse: no change. + +then it has the value 1pt plus 1pt for the second paragraph. + +If there is no such length len then you get something like +‘Undefined control sequence. <argument> \praindent’. If you leave +off the backslash at the start of len, as in +\addtolength{parindent}{1pt}, then you get something like +‘You can't use `the letter p' after \advance’. + + + <literal>\settodepth</literal> @@ -7080,10 +9073,23 @@ negative. Synopsis: -\settodepth{\len}{text} +\settodepth{len}{text} + +Set the length len to the depth of box that &latex; gets on +typesetting the text argument. The length name len must +begin with a backslash, \. + +This will show how low the character descenders go. + +\newlength{\alphabetdepth} +\settodepth{\alphabetdepth}{abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz} +\the\alphabetdepth -The \settodepth command sets the value of a length command -\len equal to the depth of the text argument. +If there is no such length len then you get something like +‘Undefined control sequence. <argument> \alphabetdepth’. If you +leave the backslash out of len, as in +\settodepth{alphabetdepth}{...} then you get something like +‘Missing number, treated as zero. <to be read again> \setbox’. @@ -7094,54 +9100,80 @@ negative. Synopsis: -\settoheight{\len}{text} +\settoheight{len}{text} -The \settoheight command sets the value of a length command \len -equal to the height of the text argument. +Sets the length len to the height of box that &latex; gets on +typesetting the text argument. The length name len must +begin with a backslash, \. + +This will show how high the characters go. + +\newlength{\alphabetheight} +\settoheight{\alphabetheight}{abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz} +\the\alphabetheight + +If there is no such length len then you get something like +‘Undefined control sequence. <argument> \alphabetheight’. If you +leave the backslash out of len, as in +\settoheight{alphabetheight}{...} then you get something like +‘Missing number, treated as zero. <to be read again> \setbox’. - -<literal>\settowidth{\<replaceable>len</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal> +<literal>\settowidth</literal> \settowidth Synopsis: -\settowidth{\len}{text} +\settowidth{len}{text} -The \settowidth command sets the value of the command \len -to the width of the text argument. +Set the length len to the width of the box that &latex; gets on +typesetting the text argument. The length name len must +begin with a backslash, \. + +This measures the width of the lowercase ASCII alphabet. + +\newlength{\alphabetwidth} +\settowidth{\alphabetwidth}{abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz} +\the\alphabetwidth + +If there is no such length len then you get something like +‘Undefined control sequence. <argument> \alphabetwidth’. If you +leave the backslash out of len, as in +\settoheight{alphabetwidth}{...} then you get something like +‘Missing number, treated as zero. <to be read again> \setbox’. - - -Predefined lengths + + -lengths, predefined -predefined lengths + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + -\width -\width - -\height -\height - -\depth -\depth - -\totalheight -\totalheight - -These length parameters can be used in the arguments of the box-making -commands (see Boxes). They specify the natural width, etc., of -the text in the box. \totalheight equals \height + -\depth. To make a box with the text stretched to double the -natural size, e.g., say - -\makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher} - @@ -7151,58 +9183,192 @@ natural size, e.g., say making paragraphs paragraphs -A paragraph is ended by one or more completely blank lines—lines not -containing even a %. A blank line should not appear where a new -paragraph cannot be started, such as in math mode or in the argument of -a sectioning command. +Once &latex; has all of a paragraph’s contents it divides it into +lines, in a way that is optimized over the entire paragraph (see Line +breaking). To end the current paragraph, put an empty line. + +It is a truth universally acknowledged, that a single man in possession +of a good fortune, must be in want of a wife. + +However little known the feelings or views of such a man may be on his +first entering a neighbourhood, this truth is so well fixed in the minds +of the surrounding families, that he is considered the rightful property +of some one or other of their daughters. + +``My dear Mr. Bennet,'' said his lady to him one day, +``have you heard that Netherfield Park is let at last?'' + +The separator lines must be empty, including not containing a comment +character, %. + +There are places where a new paragraph is not permitted. Don’t put a +blank line in math mode (see Modes); here the line before the +\end{equation} + +\begin{equation} + 2^{|S|} > |S| + +\end{equation} + +will get you the error ‘Missing $ inserted’. Similarly, the blank +line in this section argument +\section{aaa +bbb} + +gets ‘Runaway argument? {aaa ! Paragraph ended before \@sect was +complete’. + - -<literal>\indent</literal> -\indent -\parindent -indent, forcing -\indent produces a horizontal space whose width equals to the -\parindent length, the normal paragraph indentation. It is used -to add paragraph indentation where it would otherwise be suppressed. + +<literal>\par</literal> + +\par +paragraph, ending + +Synopsis (note that while reading the input &tex;, converts two +consecutive newlines to a \par): + +\par + +End the current paragraph. The usual way to separate paragraphs is with +a blank line but the \par command is entirely equivalent. This +command is robust (see \protect). + +This example uses \par rather than a blank line simply for +readability. + +\newcommand{\syllabusLegalese}{% + \whatCheatingIs\par\whatHappensWhenICatchYou} + +The \par command does nothing in LR mode or a vertical mode but +it terminates paragraph mode, bringing &latex; to vertical mode +(see Modes). + +You cannot use the \par command in math mode or in the argument +of many commands, such as the \section command (see Making +paragraphs and see \newcommand & \renewcommand). + +The \par command differs from the \paragraph command in +that the latter is, like \section or \subsection, a +sectioning unit used by the standard &latex; documents. + +The \par command differs from \newline and the line break +double backslash, \\, in that \par ends the paragraph not just +the line. It also triggers the addition of the between-paragraph +vertical space \parskip (see \parindent & \parskip). + +The output from this example -The default value for \parindent is 1em in two-column -mode, otherwise 15pt for 10pt documents, 17pt for -11pt, and 1.5em for 12pt. +xyz + +\setlength{\parindent}{3in} +\setlength{\parskip}{5in} +\noindent test\indent test1\par test2 + +is: after ‘xyz’ there is a vertical skip of 5 inches and then +‘test’ appears, aligned with the left margin. On the same line, +there is an empty horizontal space of 3 inches and then +‘test1’ appears. Finally. there is a vertical space of +5 inches, followed by a fresh paragraph with a paragraph indent of +3 inches, and then &latex; puts the text ‘test2’. - -<literal>\noindent</literal> + +<literal>\indent</literal> & <literal>\noindent</literal> +\indent \noindent -indent, suppressing +\parindent +indent, forcing -When used at the beginning of the paragraph, this command suppresses any -paragraph indentation, as in this example. +Synopsis: + +\indent + +or + +\noindent + +Go into horizontal mode (see Modes). The \indent command +first outputs an empty box whose width is \parindent. These +commands are robust (see \protect). + +Ordinarily you create a new paragraph by putting in a blank line. +See \par for the difference between this command and \par. To +start a paragraph without an indent, or to continue an interrupted +paragraph, use \noindent. + +In the middle of a paragraph the \noindent command has no effect, +because &latex; is already in horizontal mode there. The +\indent command’s only effect is to output a space. + +This example starts a fresh paragraph. ... end of the prior paragraph. \noindent This paragraph is not indented. -It has no effect when used in the middle of a paragraph. +and this continues an interrupted paragraph. + +The data + +\begin{center} + \begin{tabular}{rl} ... \end{tabular} +\end{center} + +\noindent shows this clearly. + +To omit indentation in the entire document put +\setlength{\parindent}{0pt} in the preamble. If you do that, +you may want to also set the length of spaces between paragraphs, +\parskip (see \parindent & \parskip). -To eliminate paragraph indentation in an entire document, put -\setlength{\parindent}{0pt} in the preamble. +package, indentfirst +indentfirst package + +Default &latex; styles have the first paragraph after a section that is +not indented, as is traditional typesetting in English. To change that, +look on CTAN for the package indentfirst. - -<literal>\parskip</literal> + +<literal>\parindent</literal> & <literal>\parskip</literal> +\parindent \parskip +paragraph indentation vertical space before paragraphs -\parskip is a rubber length defining extra vertical space added -before each paragraph. The default is 0pt plus1pt. +Synopsis: + +\setlength{\parskip}{horizontal len} +\setlength{\parinden}{vertical len} + +Both are a rubber lengths (see Lengths). They give the indentation +of ordinary paragraphs, not paragraphs inside minipages +(see minipage), and the vertical space between paragraphs. + +This, put in the preamble, + +\setlength{\parindent}{0em} +\setlength{\parskip}{1ex} + +arranges that the document will have paragraphs that are not indented, +but instead are vertically separated by about the height of a lowercase +‘x’. + +In standard &latex; documents, the default value for \parindent +in one-column documents is 15pt when the default text size is +10pt , 17pt for 11pt, and 1.5em for +12pt. In two-column documents it is 1em. The default +value for \parskip in &latex;’s standard document styles is +0pt plus1pt. @@ -7214,45 +9380,50 @@ before each paragraph. The default is 0pt plus1pt. remarks in the margin \marginpar -Synopsis: +Synopsis, one of: -\marginpar[left]{right} +\marginpar{right} +\marginpar[left]{right} -The \marginpar command creates a note in the margin. The first -line of the note will have the same baseline as the line in the text -where the \marginpar occurs. +Create a note in the margin. The first line of the note will have the +same baseline as the line in the text where the \marginpar +occurs. -When you only specify the mandatory argument right, the text -will be placed +The margin that &latex; uses for the note depends on the current layout +(see Document class options) and also on \reversemarginpar +(see below). If you are using one-sided layout (document option +oneside) then it goes in the right margin. If you are using +two-sided layout (document option twoside) then it goes in the +outside margin. If you are in two-column layout (document option +twocolumn) then it goes in the nearest margin. -in the right margin for one-sided layout (option oneside, see Document class options); -in the outside margin for two-sided layout (option twoside, see Document class options); -in the nearest margin for two-column layout (option twocolumn, see Document class options). - \reversemarginpar \normalmarginpar -The command \reversemarginpar places subsequent marginal notes -in the opposite (inside) margin. \normalmarginpar places them -in the default position. +If you declare \reversemarginpar then &latex; will place +subsequent marginal notes in the opposite margin to that given in the +prior paragraph. Revert that to the default position with +\normalmarginpar. -When you specify both arguments, left is used for the left -margin, and right is used for the right margin. +When you specify the optional argument left then it is used for a +note in the left margin, while the mandatory argument right is +used for a note in the the right margin. -The first word will normally not be hyphenated; you can enable -hyphenation there by beginning the node with \hspace{0pt}. +Normally, a note’s first word will not be hyphenated. You can enable +hyphenation there by beginning left or right with +\hspace{0pt}. These parameters affect the formatting of the note: \marginparpush\marginparpush -Minimum vertical space between notes; default ‘7pt’ for +Minimum vertical space between notes; default ‘7pt’ for ‘12pt’ documents, ‘5pt’ else. \marginparsep\marginparsep -Horizontal space between the main text and the note; default +Horizontal space between the main text and the note; default ‘11pt’ for ‘10pt’ documents, ‘10pt’ else. \marginparwidth\marginparwidth -Width of the note itself; default for a one-sided ‘10pt’ document +Width of the note itself; default for a one-sided ‘10pt’ document is ‘90pt’, ‘83pt’ for ‘11pt’, and ‘68pt’ for ‘12pt’; ‘17pt’ more in each case for a two-sided document. In two column mode, the default is ‘48pt’. @@ -7283,51 +9454,105 @@ notes from falling off the bottom of the page. equation environment -There are three environments that put &latex; in math mode: +Produce mathematical text by putting &latex; into math mode or display +math mode (see Modes). This example shows both. -math -For formulas that appear right in the text. -displaymath -For formulas that appear on their own line. -equation -The same as the displaymath environment except that it adds an equation -number in the right margin. - -\( -\) -\[ -\] -The math environment can be used in both paragraph and LR mode, -but the displaymath and equation environments can be used -only in paragraph mode. The math and displaymath -environments are used so often that they have the following short forms: +The wave equation for \( u \) is +\begin{displaymath} + \frac{\partial^2u}{\partial t^2} = c^2\nabla^2u +\end{displaymath} +where \( \nabla^2 \) is the spatial Laplacian and \( c \) is constant. + +Math mode is for inline mathematics. In the above example it is invoked +by the starting \( and finished by the matching ending \). +Display math mode is for displayed equations and here is invoked by the +displaymath environment. Note that any mathematical text +whatever, including mathematical text consisting of just one character, +is handled in math mode. + +When in math mode or display math mode, &latex; handles many aspects of +your input text differently than in other text modes. For example, -\(...\) instead of \begin{math}...\end{math} -\[...\] instead of \begin{displaymath}...\end{displaymath} +contrast x+y with \( x+y \) -$ -In fact, the math environment is so common that it has an even -shorter form: +in math mode the letters are in italics and the spacing around the plus +sign is different. -$ ... $ instead of \(...\) +There are three ways to make inline formulas, to put &latex; in math +mode. + +\( mathematical material \) +$ mathematical material $ +\begin{math} mathematical material \end{math} -\boldmath -\unboldmath -The \boldmath command changes math letters and symbols to be in -a bold font. It is used outside of math mode. Conversely, the -\unboldmath command changes math glyphs to be in a normal font; -it too is used outside of math mode. +The first form is preferred and the second is quite common, but the +third form is rarely used. You can sometimes use one and sometimes +another, as in \(x\) and $y$. You can use these in paragraph +mode or in LR mode (see Modes). - -\displaystyle -The \displaystyle declaration forces the size and style of the -formula to be that of displaymath, e.g., with limits above and -below summations. For example: +To make displayed formulas, put &latex; into display math mode with +either: + +\begin{displaymath} + mathematical material +\end{displaymath} + +or + +\begin{equation} + mathematical material +\end{equation} + +(see displaymath, see equation). The only difference is that +with the equation environment, &latex; puts a formula number +alongside the formula. The construct \[ math \] is +equivalent to \begin{displaymath} math +\end{displaymath}. These environments can only be used in paragraph +mode (see Modes). -$\displaystyle \sum_{n=0}^\infty x_n $ +\displaystyle +The two mathematics modes are similar, but there are some differences. +One involves the placement of subscripts and superscripts; in display +math mode they are further apart and in inline math mode they are closer +together. + +Sometimes you want the display math typographical treatment to happen in +the inline math mode. For this, the \displaystyle declaration +forces the size and style of the formula to be that of +displaymath. Thus \(\displaystyle \sum_{n=0}^\infty +x_n\) will have the limits above and below the summation sign, not next +to it. Another example is that + +\begin{tabular}{r|cc} + \textsc{Name} &\textsc{Series} &\textsc{Sum} \\ \hline + Arithmetic &\( a+(a+b)+(a+2b)+\cdots+(a+(n-1)b) \) + &\( na+(n-1)n\cdot\frac{b}{2}\) \\ + Geometric &\( a+ab+ab^2+\cdots+ab^{n-1} \) + &\(\displaystyle a\cdot\frac{1-b^n}{1-b}\) \\ +\end{tabular} - +because it has no \displaystyle, the ‘Arithmetic’ line’s +fraction will be scrunched. But, because of its \displaystyle, +the ‘Geometric’ line’s fraction will be easy to read, with +characters the same size as in the rest of the line. + +package, amsmath +amsmath package + +package, amsfonts +amsfonts package +package, mathtools +mathtools package + +The American Mathematical Society has made freely available a set of +packages that greatly expand your options for writing mathematics, +amsmath and amssymb (also be aware of the mathtools +package that is an extension to, and loads, amsmath). New +documents that will have mathematical text should use these packages. +Descriptions of these packages is outside the scope of this document; +see their documentation on CTAN. + @@ -7339,38 +9564,69 @@ below summations. For example: _ ^ -In math mode, use the caret character ^ to make the -exp appear as a superscript: ^{exp}. -Similarly, in math mode, underscore _{exp} makes a -subscript out of exp. +Synopsis (in math mode or display math mode), one of: -In this example the 0 and 1 appear as subscripts while the -2 is a superscript. +base^exp +base^{exp} + +or, one of: -\( (x_0+x_1)^2 \) +base_exp +base_{exp} -To have more than one character in exp use curly braces as in -e^{-2x}. +Make exp appear as a superscript of base (with the caret +character, ^) or a subscript (with +underscore, _). -&latex; handles superscripts on superscripts, and all of that stuff, in -the natural way, so expressions such as e^{x^2} and -x_{a_0} will look right. It also does the right thing when -something has both a subscript and a superscript. In this example the -0 appears at the bottom of the integral sign while the 10 -appears at the top. - -\int_0^{10} x^2 \,dx +In this example the 0’s and 1’s are subscripts while the +2’s are superscripts. + +\( (x_0+x_1)^2 \leq (x_0)^2+(x_1)^2 \) + +To have the subscript or superscript contain more than one character, +surround the expression with curly braces, as in e^{-2x}. +This example’s fourth line shows curly braces used to group an expression +for the exponent. + +\begin{displaymath} + (3^3)^3=27^3=19\,683 + \qquad + 3^{(3^3)}=3^{27}=7\,625\,597\,484\,987 +\end{displaymath} + +&latex; knows how to handle a superscript on a superscript, or a +subscript on a subscript, or supers on subs, or subs on supers. So, +expressions such as e^{x^2} and x_{i_0} give correct +output. Note the use in those expressions of curly braces to give the +base a determined exp. If you enter \(3^3^3\) then +you get ‘Double superscript’. + +&latex; does the right thing when something has both a subscript and a +superscript. In this example the integral has both. They come out in +the correct place without any author intervention. + +\begin{displaymath} + \int_{x=a}^b f'(x)\,dx = f(b)-f(a) +\end{displaymath} -You can put a superscript or subscript before a symbol with a construct -such as {}_t K^2 in math mode (the initial {} prevents -the prefixed subscript from being attached to any prior symbols in the -expression). +Note the parentheses around x=a to make the entire expression a +subscript. + +To put a superscript or subscript before a symbol, use a construct like +{}_t K^2. The empty curly braces {} give the +subscript something to attach to and keeps it from accidentally +attaching to a prior symbols. + +Using the subscript or superscript command outside of math mode or +display math mode, as in the expression x^2, will get you +the error ‘Missing $ inserted’. -Outside of math mode, a construct like A -test$_\textnormal{subscript}$ will produce a subscript typeset in -text mode, not math mode. Note that there are packages specialized for -writing Chemical formulas such as mhchem. - +package, mhchem +mhchem package + +A common reason to want subscripts outside of a mathematics mode is to +typeset chemical formulas. There are packages for that such as +mhchem; see CTAN. @@ -7381,20 +9637,23 @@ writing Chemical formulas such as mhchem. symbols, math greek letters -&latex; provides almost any mathematical symbol you’re likely to need. -For example, if you include $\pi$ in your source, you will get -the pi symbol π. - -Below is a list of commonly-available symbols. It is by no means an -exhaustive list. Each symbol here is described with a short phrase, and -its symbol class (which determines the spacing around it) is given in -parenthesis. Unless said otherwise, the commands for these symbols can -be used only in math mode. +package, symbols +symbols package + + +&latex; provides almost any mathematical or technical symbol that +anyone uses. For example, if you include $\pi$ in your source, +you will get the pi symbol π. See the Comprehensive +&latex; Symbol List at +https://ctan.org/tex-archive/info/symbols/comprehensive/. -To redefine a command so that it can be used whatever the current mode, -see \ensuremath. +Here is a list of commonly-used symbols. It is by no means exhaustive. +Each symbol is described with a short phrase, and its symbol class, +which determines the spacing around it, is given in parenthesis. Unless +said otherwise, the commands for these symbols can be used only in math +mode. To redefine a command so that it can be used whatever the current +mode, see \ensuremath. - @@ -7405,7 +9664,7 @@ see \ensuremath. ℵ Aleph, transfinite cardinal (ordinary). \alpha\alpha -α Lower case Greek letter alpha (ordinary). +α Lowercase Greek letter alpha (ordinary). \amalg\amalg ⨿ Disjoint union (binary) @@ -7432,7 +9691,7 @@ sometimes reserved for cross-correlation. \textbackslash for backslash outside of math mode. \beta\beta -β Lower case Greek letter beta (ordinary). +β Lowercase Greek letter beta (ordinary). \bigcap\bigcap ⋂ Variable-sized, or n-ary, intersection (operator). Similar: @@ -7502,7 +9761,7 @@ operator \bigcap. dot \bullet. \chi\chi -χ Lower case Greek chi (ordinary). +χ Lowercase Greek chi (ordinary). \circ\circ ∘ Function composition, ring operator (binary). Similar: @@ -7513,8 +9772,8 @@ variable-sized operator \bigcirc. \complement\complement ∁ Set complement, used as a superscript as in -$S^\complement$ (ordinary). Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the amssymb package. Also -used: $S^{\mathsf{c}}$ or $\bar{S}$. +$S^\complement$ (ordinary). Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the amssymb package. Also used: +$S^{\mathsf{c}}$ or $\bar{S}$. \cong\cong ≅ Congruent (relation). @@ -7537,17 +9796,16 @@ turnstile \vdash. ‡ Double dagger relation (binary). \Delta\Delta -Δ Greek upper case delta, used for increment (ordinary). +Δ Greek uppercase delta, used for increment (ordinary). \delta\delta -δ Greek lower case delta (ordinary). +δ Greek lowercase delta (ordinary). \Diamond\Diamond ◇ Large diamond operator (ordinary). Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the amssymb package. - \diamond\diamond -⋄ Diamond operator, or diamond bullet (binary). Similar: large +⋄ Diamond operator (binary). Similar: large diamond \Diamond, circle bullet \bullet. \diamondsuit\diamondsuit @@ -7561,12 +9819,12 @@ diamond \Diamond, circle bullet \bullet\Doteq. \downarrow\downarrow -↓ Down arrow, converges (relation). Similar: double line down -arrow \Downarrow. +↓ Down arrow, converges (relation). Similar: +\Downarrow double line down arrow. \Downarrow\Downarrow -⇓ Double line down arrow (relation). Similar: single line down -arrow \downarrow. +⇓ Double line down arrow (relation). Similar: +\downarrow single line down arrow. \ell\ell ℓ Lowercase cursive letter l (ordinary). @@ -7577,7 +9835,7 @@ arrow \downarrow. \epsilon\epsilon -ϵ Lower case lunate epsilon (ordinary). Similar to +ϵ Lowercase lunate epsilon (ordinary). Similar to Greek text letter. More widely used in mathematics is the script small letter epsilon \varepsilon ε. Related: the set membership relation \in ∈. @@ -7588,7 +9846,7 @@ the set membership relation \in ∈. ≡ Equivalence (relation). \eta\eta -η Lower case Greek letter (ordinary). +η Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). \exists\exists ∃ Existential quantifier (ordinary). @@ -7603,10 +9861,10 @@ the set membership relation \in ∈. ⌢ Downward curving arc (ordinary). \Gamma\Gamma -Γ Upper case Greek letter (ordinary). +Γ uppercase Greek letter (ordinary). \gamma\gamma -γ Lower case Greek letter (ordinary). +γ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). \ge\ge ≥ Greater than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym @@ -7643,8 +9901,13 @@ with a \thickmuskip on either side. \Im\Im ℑ Imaginary part (ordinary). See: real part \Re. +\imath\imath +dotless i, math +Dotless i; used when you are putting an accent on an i (see Math +accents). + \in\in -∈ Set element (relation). See also: lower case lunate +∈ Set element (relation). See also: lowercase lunate epsilon \epsilonϵ and small letter script epsilon \varepsilon. @@ -7655,20 +9918,25 @@ epsilon \varepsilon. ∫ Integral (operator). \iota\iota -ι Lower case Greek letter (ordinary). +ι Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). \Join\Join ⨝ Condensed bowtie symbol (relation). Not available in Plain &tex;. +\jmath\jmath +dotless j, math +Dotless j; used when you are putting an accent on a j (see Math +accents). + \kappa\kappa -κ Lower case Greek letter (ordinary). +κ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). \Lambda\Lambda -Λ Upper case Greek letter (ordinary). +Λ uppercase Greek letter (ordinary). \lambda\lambda -λ Lower case Greek letter (ordinary). +λ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). \land\land ∧ Logical and (binary). This is a synonym for \wedge. @@ -7789,7 +10057,7 @@ for \vert and for norm see the entry for \ ∓ Minus or plus (relation). \mu\mu -μ Lower case Greek letter (ordinary). +μ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). \nabla\nabla ∇ Hamilton’s del, or differential, operator (ordinary). @@ -7817,20 +10085,20 @@ negation: \sim. of \in. \not\not -  ̸ Long solidus, or slash, used to overstrike a + +     Long solidus, or slash, used to overstrike a following operator (relation). - -Many negated operators that don’t require \not are available, +Many negated operators are available that don’t require \not, particularly with the amssymb package. For example, \notin -is probably typographically preferable to \not\in. +is typographically preferable to \not\in. \notin\notin ∉ Not an element of (relation). Similar: not subset of \nsubseteq. \nu\nu -ν Lower case Greek letter (ordinary). +ν Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). \nwarrow\nwarrow ↖ North-west arrow (relation). @@ -7840,13 +10108,14 @@ of \nsubseteq. operator \bigodot. \oint\oint -∮ Contour integral, integral with circle in the middle (operator). +∮ Contour integral, integral with circle in the middle +(operator). \Omega\Omega -Ω Upper case Greek letter (ordinary). +Ω uppercase Greek letter (ordinary). \omega\omega -ω Lower case Greek letter (ordinary). +ω Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). \ominus\ominus ⊖ Minus sign, or dash, inside a circle (binary). @@ -7879,14 +10148,14 @@ same glyph but the spacing is different because it is in the class ordinary. \phi\phi -ϕ Lower case Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is +ϕ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is \varphi φ. \Pi\Pi -Π Upper case Greek letter (ordinary). +Π uppercase Greek letter (ordinary). \pi\pi -π Lower case Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is +π Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is \varpi ϖ. \pm\pm @@ -7916,14 +10185,14 @@ single quote ' in text mode produces a different charact ∝ Is proportional to (relation) \Psi\Psi -Ψ Upper case Greek letter (ordinary). +Ψ uppercase Greek letter (ordinary). \psi\psi -ψ Lower case Greek letter (ordinary). +ψ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). \rangle\rangle -⟩ Right angle, or sequence, bracket (closing). Similar: greater -than >. Matches:\langle. +⟩ Right angle, or sequence, bracket (closing). +Similar: greater than >. Matches:\langle. \rbrace\rbrace } Right curly brace @@ -7942,8 +10211,8 @@ double-line, or blackboard bold, R \mathbb{R}; to access this, load the amsfonts package. \restriction\restriction -↾ Restriction of a function -(relation). Synonym: \upharpoonright. Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the amssymb package. +↾ Restriction of a function (relation). Synonym: +\upharpoonright. Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the amssymb package. \revemptyset\revemptyset ⦰ Reversed empty set symbol (ordinary). Related: @@ -7956,45 +10225,50 @@ off (closing). Matches \lfloor. \rhd\rhd ◁ Arrowhead, that is, triangle, pointing right (binary). Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the amssymb package. For the normal subgroup symbol you should instead -load amssymb and use \vartriangleright (which -is a relation and so gives better spacing). +load amssymb and use \vartriangleright (which is a +relation and so gives better spacing). \rho\rho -ρ Lower case Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is +ρ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is \varrho ϱ. \Rightarrow\Rightarrow -⇒ Implies, right-pointing double line arrow (relation). Similar: -right single-line arrow \rightarrow. +⇒ Implies, right-pointing double line arrow +(relation). Similar: right single-line arrow \rightarrow. \rightarrow\rightarrow -→ Right-pointing single line arrow (relation). Synonym: \to. Similar: right double line arrow \Rightarrow. +→ Right-pointing single line arrow (relation). +Synonym: \to. Similar: right double line +arrow \Rightarrow. \rightharpoondown\rightharpoondown -⇁ Right-pointing harpoon with barb below the line (relation). +⇁ Right-pointing harpoon with barb below +the line (relation). \rightharpoonup\rightharpoonup -⇀ Right-pointing harpoon with barb above the line (relation). +⇀ Right-pointing harpoon with barb above the +line (relation). \rightleftharpoons\rightleftharpoons -⇌ Right harpoon up above left harpoon down (relation). +⇌ Right harpoon up above left harpoon down +(relation). \searrow\searrow ↘ Arrow pointing southeast (relation). \setminus\setminus -⧵ Set difference, reverse solidus or slash, like \ -(binary). Similar: backslash \backslash and also +⧵ Set difference, reverse solidus or reverse slash, +like \ (binary). Similar: backslash \backslash and also \textbackslash outside of math mode. \sharp\sharp ♯ Musical sharp (ordinary). \Sigma\Sigma -Σ Upper case Greek letter (ordinary). +Σ uppercase Greek letter (ordinary). \sigma\sigma -σ Lower case Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is +σ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is \varsigma ς. \sim\sim @@ -8035,15 +10309,15 @@ equal to \subseteq. superset \supset. Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the amssymb package. \sqsupseteq\sqsupseteq -⊒ Square superset or equal symbol (binary). Similar: superset or -equal \supseteq. +⊒ Square superset or equal symbol (binary). +Similar: superset or equal \supseteq. \star\star -⋆ Five-pointed star, sometimes used as a general binary operation -but sometimes reserved for cross-correlation (binary). Similar: the -synonyms asterisk * and \ast, which are six-pointed, -and more often appear as a superscript or subscript, as with the Kleene -star. +⋆ Five-pointed star, sometimes used as a general binary +operation but sometimes reserved for cross-correlation (binary). +Similar: the synonyms asterisk * and \ast, which +are six-pointed, and more often appear as a superscript or subscript, +as with the Kleene star. \subset\subset ⊂ Subset (occasionally, is implied by) (relation). @@ -8078,10 +10352,10 @@ that extends to cover the argument. ↙ Southwest-pointing arrow (relation). \tau\tau -τ Lower case Greek letter (ordinary). +τ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). \theta\theta -θ Lower case Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is +θ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is \vartheta ϑ. \times\times @@ -8112,16 +10386,16 @@ is a relation and so gives better spacing). relation and so gives better spacing). \unlhd\unlhd -⊴ Left-pointing not-filled underlined arrowhead, that -is, triangle, with a line under (binary). Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the amssymb package. For -the normal subgroup symbol load amssymb and +⊴ Left-pointing not-filled underlined arrowhead, that is, +triangle, with a line under (binary). Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the amssymb package. For the +normal subgroup symbol load amssymb and use \vartrianglelefteq (which is a relation and so gives better spacing). \unrhd\unrhd -⊵ Right-pointing not-filled underlined arrowhead, that -is, triangle, with a line under (binary). Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the amssymb package. For -the normal subgroup symbol load amssymb and +⊵ Right-pointing not-filled underlined arrowhead, that is, +triangle, with a line under (binary). Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the amssymb package. For the +normal subgroup symbol load amssymb and use \vartrianglerighteq (which is a relation and so gives better spacing). @@ -8141,12 +10415,14 @@ arrow \Uparrow. arrow \updownarrow. \updownarrow\updownarrow -↕ Single-line upward-and-downward-pointing arrow (relation). Similar: -double-line upward-and-downward-pointing arrow \Updownarrow. +↕ Single-line upward-and-downward-pointing arrow +(relation). Similar: double-line upward-and-downward-pointing +arrow \Updownarrow. \upharpoonright\upharpoonright ↾ Up harpoon, with barb on right side -(relation). Synonym: \restriction. Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the amssymb package. +(relation). Synonym: \restriction. +Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the amssymb package. \uplus\uplus ⊎ Multiset union, a union symbol with a plus symbol in @@ -8154,10 +10430,10 @@ the middle (binary). Similar: union \cup. Related: variable-sized operator \biguplus. \Upsilon\Upsilon -Υ Upper case Greek letter (ordinary). +Υ uppercase Greek letter (ordinary). \upsilon\upsilon -υ Lower case Greek letter (ordinary). +υ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). \varepsilon\varepsilon ε Small letter script epsilon (ordinary). This is @@ -8166,28 +10442,28 @@ more widely used in mathematics than the non-variant lunate epsilon form membership \in. \vanothing\vanothing -∅ Empty set symbol. Similar: -\emptyset. Related: \revemptyset. Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the amssymb package. +∅ Empty set symbol. Similar: \emptyset. Related: +\revemptyset. Not available in plain &tex;. In &latex; you need to load the amssymb package. \varphi\varphi -φ Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary). +φ Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The non-variant form is \phi ϕ. \varpi\varpi -ϖ Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary). +ϖ Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The non-variant form is \pi π. \varrho\varrho -ϱ Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary). +ϱ Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The non-variant form is \rho ρ. \varsigma\varsigma -ς Variant on the lower case Greek letter +ς Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The non-variant form is \sigma σ. \vartheta\vartheta -ϑ Variant on the lower case Greek letter +ϑ Variant on the lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). The non-variant form is \theta θ. @@ -8205,34 +10481,35 @@ operator \bigvee. ‖ Vertical double bar (ordinary). Similar: vertical single bar \vert. -For a norm symbol, you can use the mathtools package and add -\DeclarePairedDelimiter\norm{\lVert}{\rVert} to your -preamble. This gives you three command variants for double-line -vertical bars that are correctly horizontally spaced: if in the -document body you write the starred version $\norm*{M^\perp}$ -then the height of the vertical bars will match the height of the -argument, whereas with \norm{M^\perp} the bars do not grow -with the height of the argument but instead are the default height, -and \norm[size command]{M^\perp} also gives bars that -do not grow but are set to the size given in the size command, -e.g., \Bigg. +For a norm symbol, you can use the mathtools package and put in +your preamble +\DeclarePairedDelimiter\norm{\lVert}{\rVert}. This gives you +three command variants for double-line vertical bars that are correctly +horizontally spaced: if in the document body you write the starred +version $\norm*{M^\perp}$ then the height of the vertical bars +will match the height of the argument, whereas with +\norm{M^\perp} the bars do not grow with the height of the +argument but instead are the default height, and \norm[size +command]{M^\perp} also gives bars that do not grow but are set to +the size given in the size command, e.g., \Bigg. \vert\vert | Single line vertical bar (ordinary). Similar: double-line vertical bar \Vert. For such that, as in the definition of a set, use \mid because it is a relation. -For absolute value you can use the mathtools package and add -\DeclarePairedDelimiter\abs{\lvert}{\rvert} to your -preamble. This gives you three command variants for single-line vertical -bars that are correctly horizontally spaced: if in the document body you -write the starred version $\abs*{\frac{22}{7}}$ then the -height of the vertical bars will match the height of the argument, -whereas with \abs{\frac{22}{7}} the bars do not grow with -the height of the argument but instead are the default height, and -\abs[size command]{\frac{22}{7}} also gives bars -that do not grow but are set to the size given in the size -command, e.g., \Bigg. +For absolute value you can use the mathtools package and in your +preamble put +\DeclarePairedDelimiter\abs{\lvert}{\rvert}. This gives you +three command variants for single-line vertical bars that are correctly +horizontally spaced: if in the document body you write the starred +version $\abs*{\frac{22}{7}}$ then the height of the +vertical bars will match the height of the argument, whereas with +\abs{\frac{22}{7}} the bars do not grow with the height of +the argument but instead are the default height, and +\abs[size command]{\frac{22}{7}} also gives bars that +do not grow but are set to the size given in the size command, +e.g., \Bigg. \wedge\wedge ∧ Logical and (binary). Synonym: \land. See also @@ -8246,16 +10523,214 @@ operator \bigwedge. ≀ Wreath product (binary). \Xi\Xi -Ξ Upper case Greek letter (ordinary). +Ξ uppercase Greek letter (ordinary). \xi\xi -ξ Lower case Greek letter (ordinary). +ξ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). \zeta\zeta -ζ Lower case Greek letter (ordinary). +ζ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary). + + +The following symbols are most often used in plain text but &latex; +provides versions to use in mathematical text. + +\mathdollar\mathdollar +Dollar sign in math mode: $. + +\mathparagraph\mathparagraph +Paragraph sign (pilcrow) in math mode, ¶. + +\mathsection\mathsection +Section sign in math mode §. + +\mathsterling\mathsterling +Sterling sign in math mode: £. + +\mathunderscore\mathunderscore +Underscore in math mode: _. + + + + + +Blackboard bold + +blackboard bold +doublestruck + +Synopsis: + +\usepackage{amssymb} % in preamble + ... +\mathbb{uppercase-letter} + +Provide blackboard bold symbols, sometimes also known as doublestruck +letters, used to denote number sets such as the natural numbers, the +integers, etc. + +Here + +\( \forall n \in \mathbb{N}, n^2 \geq 0 \) + +the \mathbb{N} gives blackboard bold symbol ℕ +representing the natural numbers. + +If you use other than an uppercase letter then you do not get an error +but you get strange results, including unexpected characters. + +There are packages that give access to symbols other than just the +capital letters; look on CTAN. + + + + +Calligraphic + +calligraphic fonts +script fonts +fonts, script + +Synopsis: + +\mathcal{uppercase-letters} + +Use a script-like font. + +In this example the graph identifier is output in a cursive font. + +Let the graph be \( \mathcal{G} \). + +If you use something other than an uppercase letter then you do not get +an error. Instead you get unexpected output. For instance, +\mathcal{g} outputs a close curly brace symbol, while +\mathcal{+} outputs a plus sign. + + + + +<literal>\boldmath</literal> & <literal>\unboldmath</literal> + +boldface mathematics +symbols, boldface +\boldmath +\unboldmath + +Synopsis (used in paragraph mode or LR mode): + +\boldmath \( math \) + +or + +\unboldmath \( math \) + +\boldmath +\unboldmath +Declarations to change the letters and symbols in math to be in +a bold font, or to countermand that and bring back the regular +(non-bold) default. They must be used when not in math mode or display +math mode (see Modes). Both commands are fragile +(see \protect). + +In this example each \boldmath command takes place inside an +\mbox, + +we have $\mbox{\boldmath \( v \)} = 5\cdot\mbox{\boldmath \( u \)$}$ + +which means \boldmath is only called in a text mode, here LR +mode, and explains why &latex; must switch to math mode to set v +and u. + +If you use either command inside math mode, as with Trouble: \( +\boldmath x \), then you get something like ‘LaTeX Font Warning: +Command \boldmath invalid in math mode on input line 11’ and ‘LaTeX +Font Warning: Command \mathversion invalid in math mode on input line +11’. + +package, bm +bm package + +There are many issues with \boldmath. New documents should use +the bm package provided by the &latex; Project team. A complete +description is outside the scope of this document (see the full +documentation on CTAN) but even this small example + +\usepackage{bm} % in preamble +... +we have $\bm{v} = 5\cdot\bm{u}$ + +shows that it is an improvement over \boldmath. + + + + +Dots, horizontal or vertical + +ellipses +dots + +Ellipses are the three dots (usually three) indicating that a pattern +continues. + +\begin{array}{cccc} + a_{0,0} &a_{0,1} &a_{0,2} &\ldots \\ + a_{1,0} &\ddots \\ + \vdots +\end{array} + +&latex; provides these. + +\cdots\cdots +Horizontal ellipsis with the dots raised to the center of the line, as +in ⋯. Used as: \( a_0\cdot a_1\cdots a_{n-1} +\). + +\ddots\ddots +Diagonal ellipsis, ⋱. See the above array example for a +usage. + +\ldots\ldots +Ellipsis on the baseline, …. Used as: \( +x_0,\ldots x_{n-1} \). Another example is the above array example. A +synonym is \mathellipsis. A synonym from the amsmath +package is \hdots. + +You can also use this command outside of mathematical text, as in +The gears, brakes, \ldots{} are all broken. (In a paragraph +mode or LR mode a synonym for \ldots is \dots.) + +\vdots\vdots +Vertical ellipsis, ⋮. See the above array example for a +usage. +package, amsmath +amsmath package + +The amsmath package has the command \dots to semantically +mark up ellipses. This example produces two different-looking outputs +for the first two uses of the \dots command. + +\usepackage{amsmath} % in preamble + ... +Suppose that \( p_0, p_1, \dots, p_{n-1} \) lists all of the primes. +Observe that \( p_0\cdot p_1 \dots \cdot p_{n-1} +1 \) is not a + multiple of any \( p_i \). +Conclusion: there are infinitely many primes \( p_0, p_1, \dotsc \). + +In the first line &latex; looks to the comma following \dots to +determine that it should output an ellipsis on the baseline. The second +line has a \cdot following \dots so &latex; outputs an +ellipsis that is on the math axis, vertically centered. However, the +third usage has no follow-on character so you have to tell &latex; what +to do. You can use one of the commands: \dotsc if you need the +ellipsis appropriate for a comma following, \dotsb if you need +the ellipses that fits when the dots are followed by a binary operator +or relation symbol, \dotsi for dots with integrals, or +\dotso for others. + + Math functions @@ -8267,111 +10742,122 @@ operator \bigwedge. spacing. \arccos\arccos -\arccos +Inverse cosine \arcsin\arcsin -\arcsin +Inverse sine \arctan\arctan -\arctan +Inverse tangent \arg\arg -\arg +Angle between the real axis and a point in the complex plane \bmod\bmod -Binary modulo operator (x \bmod y) +Binary modulo operator, used as in \( 5\bmod 3=2 \) \cos\cos -\cos +Cosine \cosh\cosh -\cosh +Hyperbolic cosine \cot\cot -\cot +Cotangent \coth\coth -\coth +Hyperbolic cotangent \csc\csc -\csc +Cosecant \deg\deg -\deg +Degrees \det\det -\det +Determinant \dim\dim -\dim +Dimension \exp\exp -\exp +Exponential \gcd\gcd -\gcd +Greatest common divisor \hom\hom -\hom +Homomorphism \inf\inf -\inf +Infinum \ker\ker -\ker +Kernel \lg\lg -\lg +Base 2 logarithm \lim\lim -\lim +Limit \liminf\liminf -\liminf +Limit inferior \limsup\limsup -\limsup +Limit superior \ln\ln -\ln +Natural logarithm \log\log -\log +Logarithm \max\max -\max +Maximum \min\min -\min +Minimum \pmod\pmod -parenthesized modulus, as in (\pmod 2^n - 1) +Parenthesized modulus, as used in \( 5\equiv 2\pmod 3 \) \Pr\Pr -\Pr +Probability \sec\sec -\sec +Secant \sin\sin -\sin +Sine \sinh\sinh -\sinh +Hyperbolic sine \sup\sup -\sup +sup \tan\tan -\tan +Tangent \tanh\tanh -\tanh +Hyperbolic tangent +package, amsmath +amsmath package + +The amsmath package adds improvements on some of these, and also +allows you to define your own. The full documentation is on CTAN, but +briefly, you can define an identity operator with +\DeclareMathOperator{\identity}{id} that is like the ones +above but prints as ‘id’. The starred form +\DeclareMathOperator*{\op}{op} sets any limits above and +below, as is traditional with \lim, \sup, or \max. + @@ -8386,276 +10872,437 @@ in math. These are different from accents in normal text \acute\acute acute accent, math -Math acute accent: \acute{x}. +Math acute accent \bar\bar bar-over accent, math macron accent, math -Math bar-over accent: \bar{x}. +Math bar-over accent \breve\breve breve accent, math -Math breve accent: \breve{x}. +Math breve accent \check\check check accent, math háček accent, math -Math háček (check) accent: \check{x}. +Math háček (check) accent \ddot\ddot double dot accent, math -Math dieresis accent: \ddot{x}. +Math dieresis accent \dot\dot overdot accent, math dot over accent, math -Math dot accent: \dot{x}. +Math dot accent \grave\grave grave accent, math -Math grave accent: \grave{x}. +Math grave accent \hat\hat hat accent, math circumflex accent, math -Math hat (circumflex) accent: \hat{x}. - -\imath\imath -dotless i, math -Math dotless i. - -\jmath\jmath -dotless j, math -Math dotless j. +Math hat (circumflex) accent \mathring\mathring ring accent, math -Math ring accent: x*. +Math ring accent \tilde\tilde tilde accent, math -Math tilde accent: \tilde{x}. +Math tilde accent \vec\vec vector symbol, math -Math vector symbol: \vec{x}. +Math vector symbol \widehat\widehat wide hat accent, math -Math wide hat accent: \widehat{x+y}. +Math wide hat accent \widetilde\widetilde wide tilde accent, math -Math wide tilde accent: \widetilde{x+y}. +Math wide tilde accent +When you are putting an accent on an i or a j, the tradition is to use +one without a dot, \imath or jmath (see Math symbols). + - -Spacing in math mode + +Over- and Underlining -spacing within math mode -math mode, spacing +overlining +underlining -In a math environment, &latex; ignores the spaces that you use -in the source, and instead puts in the spacing according to the normal -rules for mathematics texts. +&latex; provides commands for making overlines or underlines, or +putting braces over or under some material. -Many math mode spacing definitions are expressed in terms of the math unit -mu given by 1 em = 18 mu, where the em is taken from the current -math symbols family (see Units of length). -&latex; provides the following commands for use in math mode: + +\underline{text}\underline{text} +Underline text. Works inside math mode, and outside. +The line is always completely below the text, taking account of +descenders, so in \(\underline{y}\) the line is lower than in +\(\underline{x}\). This command is fragile (see \protect). + +package, ulem +ulem package + +Note that the package ulem does text mode underlining and allows +line breaking as well as a number of other features. See the +documentation on CTAN. See also \hrulefill & \dotfill for +producing a line, for such things as a signature. + +\overline{text}\overline{text} +Put a horizontal line over text. Works inside math mode, and +outside. For example, \overline{x+y}. +Note that this differs from the command \bar (see Math +accents). -\; -\; -\thickspace -Normally 5.0mu plus 5.0mu. The longer name is -\thickspace. Math mode only. +\underbrace{math}\underbrace{math} +Put a brace under math. For example, this +(1-\underbrace{1/2)+(1/2}-1/3) emphasizes the telescoping part. +Attach text to the brace by using subscript, _, or superscript, +^, as here. -\: -\> +\begin{displaymath} + 1+1/2+\underbrace{1/3+1/4}_{>1/2}+ + \underbrace{1/5+1/6+1/7+1/8}_{>1/2}+\cdots +\end{displaymath} + +The superscript appears on top of the expression, and so can look +unconnected to the underbrace. + +\overbrace{math}\overbrace{math} +Put a brace over math, as with +\overbrace{x+x+\cdots+x}^{\mbox{\(k\) times}}. See also +\underbrace. + + +package, mathtools +mathtools package + +The package mathtools adds an over- and underbrace, as well as +some improvements on the braces. See the documentation on CTAN. + + + + +Spacing in math mode + +spacing within math mode +math mode, spacing + +When typesetting mathematics, &latex; puts in spacing according to the +normal rules for mathematics texts. If you enter y=m x then +&latex; ignores the space and in the output the m is next to the x, +as y=mx. + +But &latex;’s rules sometimes need tweaking. For example, in an +integral the tradition is to put a small extra space between the +f(x) and the dx, here done with the \, command. + +\int_0^1 f(x)\,dx + +&latex; provides the commands that follow for use in math mode. Many +of these spacing definitions are expressed in terms of the math unit +mu. It is defined as 1/18em, where the em is taken from the +current math symbols family (see Units of length). Thus, a +\thickspace is something like 5/18 times the width of +a ‘M’. + +\; +\; +\thickspace +Synonym: \thickspace. Normally 5.0mu plus 5.0mu. Math +mode only. + +\: +\> \: \> \medspace -Normally 4.0mu plus 2.0mu minus 4.0mu. The longer name is -\medspace. Math mode only. +Synonym: \medspace. Normally 4.0mu plus 2.0mu minus 4.0mu. +Math mode only. \, \, \thinspace -Normally 3mu. The longer name is \thinspace. This can -be used in both math mode and text mode. See \thinspace. +thin space +Synonym: \thinspace. Normally 3mu, which is 1/6em. +Can be used in both math mode and text mode (see \thinspace & +\negthinspace). + +This space is widely used, for instance between the function and the +infinitesimal in an integral \int f(x)\,dx and, if an author does +this, before punctuation in a displayed equation. +The antiderivative is +\begin{equation} + 3x^{-1/2}+3^{1/2}\,. +\end{equation} + \! \! -A negative thin space. Normally -3mu. Math mode only. +\negthinspace +thin space, negative +A negative thin space. Normally -3mu. The \! command is +math mode only but the \negthinspace command is available for +text mode (see \thinspace & \negthinspace). \quad quad \quad -This is 18mu, that is, 1em. This is often used for space +This is 18mu, that is, 1em. This is often used for space surrounding equations or expressions, for instance for the space between two equations inside a displaymath environment. It is available in both text and math mode. \qquad \qquad -A length of 2 quads, that is, 36mu = 2em. It is available in +A length of 2 quads, that is, 36mu = 2em. It is available in both text and math mode. -In this example a thinspace separates the function from the -infinitesimal. - -\int_0^1 f(x)\,dx - - + Math miscellany math miscellany -\*\* -discretionary multiplication -multiplication symbol, discretionary line break -A discretionary multiplication symbol, at which a line break is -allowed. Without the break multiplication is implicitly indicated by a -space, while in the case of a break a × symbol is -printed immediately before the break. So +&latex; contains a wide variety of mathematics facilities. Here are +some that don’t fit into other categories. -\documentclass{article} -\begin{document} -Now \(A_3 = 0\), hence the product of all terms \(A_1\) -through \(A_4\), that is \(A_1\* A_2\* A_3 \* A_4\), is -equal to zero. -\end{document} + + + +Colon character <literal>:</literal> & <literal>\colon</literal> + +: +colon character +: +\colon + +Synopsis, one of: + +: +\colon + +In mathematics, the colon character, :, is a relation. + +With side ratios \( 3:4 \) and \( 4:5 \), the triangle is right. -will make that sort of output - (the ellipsis ‘[…]’ is here to show the line break at -the same place as in a &tex; output) -: +package, amsmath +amsmath package + +Ordinary &latex; defines \colon to produce the colon character +with the spacing appropriate for punctuation, as in set-builder notation +\{x\colon 0\leq x<1\}. -Now A_3 = 0, -[…] -A_1 -through A_4, that is A_1 A_2 \times -A_3 A_4, is -equal to zero. +package, amsmath +amsmath package + +But the widely-used amsmath package defines \colon for use +in the definition of functions f\colon D\to C. So if you want +the colon character as a punctuation then use \mathpunct{:}. -\cdots\cdots -A horizontal ellipsis with the dots raised to the center of the line. + + + +<literal>\*</literal> + +multiplication, discretionary +breaks, multiplication discretionary +line breaks, multiplication discretionary +discretionary breaks, multiplication +\* + +Synopsis: -\ddots\ddots -A diagonal ellipsis: \ddots. +\* + +A multiplication symbol that allows a line break. If there is a break +then &latex; puts a \times symbol, ×, before +that break. -\frac{num}{den}\frac{num}{den} -\frac -Produces the fraction num divided by den. +In \( A_1\* A_2\* A_3\* A_4 \), if there is no line break then +&latex; outputs it as though it were \( A_1 A_2 A_3 A_4 \). If +a line break does happen, for example between the two middle ones, then +&latex; sets it like \( A_1 A_2 \times \), followed by the +break, followed by \( A_3 A_4 \). -\left delim1 ... \right delim2\left delim1 ... \right delim2 -\right -null delimiter -The two delimiters need not match; ‘.’ acts as a null delimiter, -producing no output. The delimiters are sized according to the math -in between. Example: \left( \sum_{i=1}^{10} a_i \right]. - -\mathdollar\mathdollar -Dollar sign in math mode: $. + + +<literal>\frac</literal> + +fraction +\frac + +Synopsis: -\mathellipsis\mathellipsis -Ellipsis (spaced for text) in math mode: …. +\frac{numerator}{denominator} + +Produces the fraction. Used as: \begin{displaymath} +\frac{1}{\sqrt{2\pi\sigma}} \end{displaymath}. In inline math +mode it comes out small; see the discussion of \displaystyle +(see Math formulas). -\mathparagraph\mathparagraph -Paragraph sign (pilcrow) in math mode: ¶. + + + +<literal>\left</literal> & <literal>\right</literal> + +delimiters, paired +paired delimiters +matching parentheses +matching brackets +null delimiter +\left +\right + +Synopsis: -\mathsection\mathsection -Section sign in math mode. +\left delimiter1 ... \right delimiter2 + +Make matching parentheses, braces, or other delimiters. The delimiters +are sized according to the math they enclose. This makes a unit vector +surrounded by appropriate-height parentheses. -\mathsterling\mathsterling -Sterling sign in math mode: £. +\begin{equation} + \left(\begin{array}{c} + 1 \\ + 0 \\ + \end{array}\right) + +Every \left must have a matching \right. Leaving out the +\left( in the above gets ‘Extra \right’. Leaving off the +\right) gets ‘You can't use `\eqno' in math mode’. -\mathunderscore\mathunderscore -Underscore in math mode: _. +However, the two delimiters delimiter1 and delimiter2 need +not match. A common case is that you want an unmatched brace, as +below. Use a period, ‘.’, as a null delimiter. -\overbrace{math}\overbrace{math} -Generates a brace over math. -For example, \overbrace{x+\cdots+x}^{k \;\textrm{times}}. - -\overline{text}\overline{text} -Generates a horizontal line over tex. -For example, \overline{x+y}. +\begin{equation} + f(n)=\left\{\begin{array}{ll} + 1 &\mbox{--if \(n=0\)} \\ + f(n-1)+3n^2 &\mbox{--else} + \end{array}\right. +\end{equation} + +Note that to get a curly brace as a delimiter you must prefix it with a +backslash, \{. -\sqrt[root]{arg}\sqrt[root]{arg} -Produces the representation of the square root of arg. The -optional argument root determines what root to produce. For -example, the cube root of x+y would be typed as -\sqrt[3]{x+y}. + + + +<literal>\sqrt</literal> + +square root +roots +radical +\sqrt + +Synopsis, one of: -\stackrel{text}{relation}\stackrel{text}{relation} -Puts text above relation. For example, -\stackrel{f}{\longrightarrow}. +\sqrt{arg} +\sqrt[root-number]{arg} + +The square root, or optionally other roots, of arg. The optional +argument root-number gives the root, i.e., enter the cube root of +x+y as \sqrt[3]{x+y}. +The radical grows with the size of arg (as the height of the +radical grows, the angle on the leftmost part gets steeper, until for +a large enough arg, it is vertical). -\underbrace{math}\underbrace{math} -Generates math with a brace underneath. For example, \underbrace{x+y+z}_{>\,0} +&latex; has a separate \surd character (see Math symbols). -\underline{text}\underline{text} -Causes text, which may be either math mode or not, to be -underlined. The line is always below the text, taking account of -descenders. + + + +<literal>\stackrel</literal> + +stack math +relation, text above +\stackrel + +Synopsis, one of: -\vdots\vdots -Produces a vertical ellipsis. +\stackrel{text}{relation} + +Put text above relation. To put a function name above an +arrow enter \stackrel{f}{\longrightarrow}. - + Modes modes -paragraph mode -math mode -left-to-right mode -LR mode -When &latex; is processing your input text, it is always in one of three -modes: +As &latex; processes your document, at any point it is in one of six +modes. They fall into three categories of two each, the horizontal +modes, the math modes, and the vertical modes. Some commands only work +in one mode or another (in particular, many commands only work in one of +the math modes), and error messages will refer to these. -Paragraph mode -Math mode -Left-to-right mode, called LR mode for short - -Mode changes occur only when entering or leaving an environment, or when -&latex; is processing the argument of certain text-producing commands. - -Paragraph mode is the most common; it’s the one &latex; is in -when processing ordinary text. In this mode, &latex; breaks the -input text into lines and breaks the lines into pages. - -&latex; is in math mode when it’s generating a mathematical -formula, either displayed math or within a line. - -\mbox, and LR mode -In LR mode, as in paragraph mode, &latex; considers the output -that it produces to be a string of words with spaces between them. -However, unlike paragraph mode, &latex; keeps going from left to -right; it never starts a new line in LR mode. Even if you put a -hundred words into an \mbox, &latex; would keep typesetting -them from left to right inside a single box (and then most likely -complain because the resulting box was too wide to fit on the line). -&latex; is in LR mode when it starts making a box with an -\mbox command. You can get it to enter a different mode inside -the box—for example, you can make it enter math mode to put a -formula in the box. - -There are also several text-producing commands and environments for -making a box that put &latex; into paragraph mode. The box made by -one of these commands or environments will be called a parbox. -When &latex; is in paragraph mode while making a box, it is said to -be in “inner paragraph mode” (no page breaks). Its normal paragraph -mode, which it starts out in, is called “outer paragraph mode”. +paragraph mode +Paragraph mode is what &latex; is in when processing ordinary +text. It breaks the input text into lines and breaks the lines into +pages. This is the mode &latex; is in most of the time. + +left-to-right mode +LR mode +LR mode (for left-to-right mode; in plain &tex; this is called +restricted horizontal mode) is in effect when &latex; starts +making a box with an \mbox command. As in paragraph mode, +&latex;’s output is a string of words with spaces between them. Unlike +in paragraph mode, in LR mode &latex; never starts a new line, it just +keeps going from left to right. (Although &latex; will not complain +that the LR box is too long, when it is finished and next tries to put +that box into a line, it could very well complain that the finished LR +box won’t fit there.) + +math mode +Math mode is when &latex; is generating +an inline mathematical formula. + +display math mode +Display math mode is when &latex; is generating a displayed +mathematical formula. (Displayed formulas differ somewhat from inline +ones. One example is that the placement of the subscript on \int +differs in the two situations.) + +vertical mode +Vertical mode is when &latex; is building the list of lines and +other material making the output page. This is the mode &latex; is in +when it starts a document. + +internal vertical mode +Internal vertical mode is in effect when &latex; starts making a +\vbox. This is the vertical analogue of LR mode. + + +For instance, if you begin a &latex; article with ‘Let \( x \) be +...’ then these are the modes: first &latex; starts every document in +vertical mode, then it reads the ‘L’ and switches to paragraph +mode, then the next switch happens at the ‘\(’ where &latex; +changes to math mode, and then when it leaves the formula it pops +back to paragraph mode. + +inner paragraph mode +outer paragraph mode +Paragraph mode has two subcases. If you use a \parbox command or +or a minipage then &latex; is put into paragraph mode. But it +will not put a page break here. Inside one of these boxes, called a +parbox, &latex; is in inner paragraph mode. Its more usual +situation, where it can put page breaks, is outer paragraph mode +(see Page breaking). @@ -8665,33 +11312,22 @@ mode, which it starts out in, is called “outer paragraph mode”. \ensuremath{formula} -The \ensuremath command ensures that formula is typeset in -math mode whatever the current mode in which the command is used. +Ensure that formula is typeset in math mode. -For instance: +For instance, you can redefine commands that ordinarily can be used only +in math mode, so that they can be used both in math and in plain text. -\documentclass{report} -\newcommand{\ab}{\ensuremath{(\delta, \varepsilon)}} -\begin{document} -Now, the \ab\ pair is equal to \(\ab = (\frac{1}{\pi}, 0)\), ... -\end{document} +\newcommand{\dx}{\ensuremath{dx}} +In $\int f(x)\, \dx$, the \dx{} is an infinitesimal. -One can redefine commands that can be used only in math mode so that -they ca be used in any mode like in the following example given for -\leadsto: - - - - -\documentclass{report} -\usepackage{amssymb} -\newcommand{\originalMeaningOfLeadsTo}{} -\let\originalMeaningOfLeadsTo\leadsto -\renewcommand\leadsto{\ensuremath{\originalMeaningOfLeadsTo}} -\begin{document} -All roads \leadsto\ Rome. -\end{document} +Caution: the \ensuremath command is useful but not a panacea. + +\newcommand{\alf}{\ensuremath{\alpha}} +You get an alpha in text mode: \alf. +But compare the correct spacing in $\alf+\alf$ with that in \alf+\alf. +Best is to typeset math things in a math mode. + @@ -8701,8 +11337,17 @@ All roads \leadsto\ Rome. styles, page page styles -The \documentclass command determines the size and position of -the page’s head and foot. The page style determines what goes in them. +The style of a page determines where &latex; places the components of +that page, such as headers and footers, and the text body. This +includes pages in the main part of the document but also includes +special pages such as the title page of a book, a page from an index, or +the first page of an article. + +package, fancyhdr +fancyhdr package + +The package fancyhdr is very helpful for constructing page +styles. See its documentation on CTAN. @@ -8712,39 +11357,83 @@ the page’s head and foot. The page style determines what goes in them. titles, making \maketitle -The \maketitle command generates a title on a separate title -page—except in the article class, where the title is placed -at the top of the first page. Information used to produce the title -is obtained from the following declarations: +Synopsis: + +\maketitle + +Generate a title. In the standard classes the title appears on a +separate page, except in the article class where it is at the top +of the first page. (See Document class options for information about +the titlepage document class option.) + +This example shows \maketitle appearing in its usual place, +immediately after \begin{document}. -\author{name \and name2}\author{name \and name2} +\documentclass{article} +\title{Constructing a Nuclear Reactor Using Only Coconuts} +\author{Jonas Grumby\thanks{% + With the support of a Ginger Grant from the Roy Hinkley Society.} \\ + Skipper, \textit{Minnow} + \and + Willy Gilligan\thanks{% + Thanks to the Mary Ann Summers foundation + and to Thurston and Lovey Howell.} \\ + Mate, \textit{Minnow} + } +\date{1964-Sep-26} +\begin{document} +\maketitle +Just sit right back and you'll hear a tale, a tale of a fateful trip. +That started from this tropic port, aboard this tiny ship. The mate was +a mighty sailin' man, the Skipper brave and sure. Five passengers set +sail that day for a three hour tour. A three hour tour. + ... + +You tell &latex; the information used to produce the title by making +the following declarations. These must come before the +\maketitle, either in the preamble or in the document body. + +\author{name1 \and name2 \and ...}\author{name1 \and name2 \and ...} author, for titlepage \\ for \author \and for \author -The \author command declares the document author(s), where the -argument is a list of authors separated by \and commands. Use -\\ to separate lines within a single author’s entry—for -example, to give the author’s institution or address. +Required. Declare the document author or authors. The argument is a +list of authors separated by \and commands. To separate lines +within a single author’s entry, for instance to give the author’s +institution or address, use a double backslash, \\. If you omit +the \author declaration then you get ‘LaTeX Warning: No +\author given’. \date{text}\date{text} date, for titlepage -The \date command declares text to be the document’s -date. With no \date command, the current date (see \today) -is used. +Optional. Declare text to be the document’s date. The text +doesn’t need to be in a date format; it can be any text at all. If you +omit \date then &latex; uses the current date (see \today). +To have no date, instead use \date{}. \thanks{text}\thanks{text} thanks, for titlepage credit footnote -The \thanks command produces a \footnote to the title, -usually used for credit acknowledgements. +Optional. Produce a footnote. You can use it in the author information +for acknowledgements, as illustrated below, but you can also use it in +the title, or any place a footnote makes sense. It can be any text so +you can use it to print an email address, or for any purpose. \title{text}\title{text} title, for titlepage \\ for \title -The \title command declares text to be the title of the -document. Use \\ to force a line break, as usual. +Required. Declare text to be the title of the document. Get line +breaks inside text with a double backslash, \\. If you +omit the \title declaration then you get ‘LaTeX Error: No +\title given’. +Many publishers will provide a class to use in place of article +in that example, that formats the title according to their house +requirements. To make your own, see titlepage. You can +either create this as a one-off or you can include it as part of a +renewed \maketitle command. + @@ -8755,27 +11444,62 @@ document. Use \\ to force a line break, as usual. Synopsis: -\pagenumbering{style} +\pagenumbering{number-style} -Specifies the style of page numbers, according to style; also -resets the page number to 1. The style argument is one of -the following: +Specifies the style of page numbers, and resets the page number. The +numbering style is reflected on the page, and also in the table of +contents and other page references. This declaration has global scope +so its effect is not delimited by braces or environments. + +In this example, before the Main section the pages are numbered +‘a’, etc. Starting on the page containing that section, the pages +are numbered ‘1’, etc. + +\begin{document}\pagenumbering{alph} + ... +\section{Main}\pagenumbering{arabic} + ... + +The argument number-style is one of the following (see +also \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol). arabic -arabic numerals +arabic numerals: 1, 2, … roman -lowercase Roman numerals +lowercase Roman numerals: i, ii, … Roman -uppercase Roman numerals +uppercase Roman numerals: I, II, … alph -lowercase letters +lowercase letters: a, b, … If you have more than 26 pages then you +get ‘LaTeX Error: Counter too large’. Alph -uppercase letters - +uppercase letters: A, B, … If you have more than 26 pages then you +get ‘LaTeX Error: Counter too large’. + +gobble +package, hyperref +hyperref package +&latex; does not output a page number, although it +does get reset. References to that page also are blank. (This does not +work with the popular package hyperref so to have the page number +not appear you may want to instead use \pagestyle{empty} or +\thispagestyle{empty}.) + + +Traditionally, if a document has front matter—preface, table of +contents, etc.—then it is numbered with lowercase Roman numerals. The +main matter of a document uses arabic. See \frontmatter & \mainmatter +& \backmatter. + +If you want to address where the page number appears on the page, +see \pagestyle. If you want to change the value of page +number then you will manipulate the page counter +(see Counters). + @@ -8790,48 +11514,124 @@ the following: \pagestyle{style} -The \pagestyle command specifies how the headers and footers -are typeset from the current page onwards. Values for style: +Declaration that specifies how the page headers and footers are typeset, +from the current page onwards. + +package, fancyhdr +fancyhdr package + +A discussion with an example is below. Note first that the package +fancyhdr is now the standard way to manipulate headers and +footers. New documents that need to do anything other than one of the +standard options below should use this package. See its documentation +on CTAN. + +Values for style: plain -Just a plain page number. +The header is empty. The footer contains only a page number, centered. empty -Empty headers and footers, e.g., no page numbers. +The header and footer is empty. headings -Put running headers on each page. The document style specifies what -goes in the headers. +Put running headers and footers on each page. The document style +specifies what goes in there; see the discussion below. myheadings Custom headers, specified via the \markboth or the \markright commands. +Some discussion of the motivation for &latex;’s mechanism will help you +work with the options headings or myheadings. The +document source below produces an article, two-sided, with the pagestyle +headings. On this document’s left hand pages, &latex; wants (in +addition to the page number) the title of the current section. On its +right hand pages &latex; wants the title of the current subsection. +When it makes up a page, &latex; gets this information from the +commands \leftmark and \rightmark. So it is up to +\section and \subsection to store that information there. + +\documentclass[twoside]{article} +\pagestyle{headings} +\begin{document} + ... \section{Section 1} ... \subsection{Subsection 1.1} ... +\section{Section 2} + ... +\subsection{Subsection 2.1} + ... +\subsection{Subsection 2.2} + ... + +Suppose that the second section falls on a left page. Although when the +page starts it is in the first section, &latex; will put +‘Section 2’ in the left page header. As to the right header, +if no subsection starts before the end of the right page then &latex; +blanks the right hand header. If a subsection does appear before the +right page finishes then there are two cases. If at least one +subsection starts on the right hand page then &latex; will put in the +right header the title of the first subsection starting on that right +page. If at least one of 2.1, 2.2, …, starts on the left page but +none starts on the right then &latex; puts in the right hand header the +title of the last subsection to start, that is, the one in effect during +the right hand page. + +To accomplish this, in a two-sided article, &latex; has \section +issue a command \markboth, setting \leftmark +to ‘Section 2’ and setting \rightmark to blank. +And, &latex; has \subsection issue a command \markright, +setting \rightmark to ‘Subsection 2.1’, etc. + Here are the descriptions of \markboth and \markright: -\markboth{left}{right}\markboth{left}{right} -Sets both the left and the right heading. A “left-hand heading” -(left) is generated by the last \markboth command before -the end of the page, while a “right-hand heading” (right) is -generated by the first \markboth or \markright that -comes on the page if there is one, otherwise by the last one before -the page. +\markboth{left-head}{right-head}\markboth{left-head}{right-head} +Sets both the right hand and left hand heading information for either a +page style of headings or myheadings. A left hand page +heading left-head is generated by the last \markboth +command before the end of the page. A right hand page heading +right-head is generated by the first \markboth or +\markright that comes on the page if there is one, otherwise by +the last one that came before that page. \markright{right}\markright{right} -Sets the right heading, leaving the left heading unchanged. +Sets the right hand page heading, leaving the left unchanged. -<literal>\thispagestyle{<replaceable>style</replaceable>}</literal> +<literal>\thispagestyle</literal> \thispagestyle +page style, this page -The \thispagestyle command works in the same manner as the -\pagestyle command (see previous section) except that it -changes to style for the current page only. +Synopsis: + +\thispagestyle{style} + +Works in the same way as the \pagestyle (see \pagestyle), +except that it changes to style for the current page only. This +declaration has global scope, so its effect is not delimited by braces +or environments. + +Often the first page of a chapter or section has a different style. For +example, this &latex; book document has the first page of the first +chapter in in plain style, as is the default (see Page +styles). + +\documentclass{book} +\pagestyle{headings} +\begin{document} +\chapter{First chapter} + ... +\chapter{Second chapter}\thispagestyle{empty} + ... + +The plain style has a page number on it, centered in the footer. +To make the page entirely empty, the command +\thispagestyle{empty} immediately follows the second +\chapter. @@ -8842,60 +11642,169 @@ changes to style for the current page only. spaces white space -&latex; has many ways to produce white (or filled) space. +&latex; has many ways to produce white (or filled) space. Some of +these are best suited to mathematical text; see Spacing in +math mode. Some spacing commands are suitable for both regular text +and mathematical text; versions of some of these commands are in this +chapter. - + +<literal>\enspace</literal> & <literal>\quad</literal> & <literal>\qquad</literal> + +\enspace +\quad +\qquad + +Synopsis, one of: + +\enspace +\quad +\qquad + +Insert a horizontal space of 1/2em, 1em, or 2em. The +em is a length defined by a font designer, often thought of as being the +width of a capital M. One advantage of describing space in ems is +that it can be more portable across documents than an absolute +measurement such as points (see Lengths/em). + +This puts a suitable gap between two graphics. + +\begin{center} + \includegraphics{womensmile.png}% + \qquad\includegraphics{mensmile.png} +\end{center} + +See Spacing in math mode for \quad and \qquad. These +are lengths from centuries of typesetting and so may be a better choice +in many circumstances than arbitrary lengths, such as you get with +\hspace. + + + + <literal>\hspace</literal> \hspace -Synopsis: +Synopsis, one of: \hspace{length} \hspace*{length} -Add the horizontal space given by length. The length is a -rubber length, that is, it may contain a plus or minus -component, in any unit that &latex; understands (see Lengths). +Insert the horizontal space length. The length can be +positive, negative, or zero; adding negative space is like backspacing. +It is a rubber length, that is, it may contain a plus or +minus component, or both (see Lengths). Because the space is +stretchable and shrinkable, it is sometimes called glue. -This command can add both positive and negative space; adding negative -space is like backspacing. +This makes a line with ‘Name:’ an inch from the right margin. -Normally when &tex; breaks a paragraph into lines it discards white -space (glues and kerns) that would come at the start of a line, so you -get an inter-word space or a line break between words but not both. This -command’s starred version \hspace*{...} puts a non-discardable -invisible item in front of the space, so the space appears in the -output. +\noindent\makebox[\linewidth][r]{Name:\hspace{1in}} + +The *-version inserts horizontal space that non-discardable. +More precisely, when &tex; breaks a paragraph into lines any white +space—glues and kerns—that come at a line break are discarded. The +*-version avoids that (technically, it adds a non-discardable +invisible item in front of the space). + +In this example + +\parbox{0.8\linewidth}{% + Fill in each blank: Four \hspace*{1in} and seven years ago our + fathers brought forth on this continent, a new \hspace*{1in}, + conceived in \hspace*{1in}, and dedicated to the proposition + that all men are created \hspace*{1in}.} + +the 1 inch blank following ‘conceived in’ falls at the start +of a line. If you erase the * then &latex; discards the blank. -This example make a one-line paragraph that puts ‘Name:’ an inch -from the right margin. +Here, the \hspace separates the three graphics. -\noindent\makebox[\linewidth]{\hspace{\fill}Name:\hspace{1in}} +\begin{center} + \includegraphics{lion.png}% comment keeps out extra space + \hspace{1cm minus 0.25cm}\includegraphics{tiger.png}% + \hspace{1cm minus 0.25cm}\includegraphics{bear.png} +\end{center} +Because the argument to each \hspace has minus 0.25cm, +each can shrink a little if the three figures are too wide. But each +space won’t shrink more than 0.25cm (see Lengths). + - + <literal>\hfill</literal> \hfill stretch, infinite horizontal infinite horizontal stretch -Produce a rubber length which has -no natural space but can stretch horizontally as far as -needed (see Lengths). + +Synopsis: + +\hfill + +Produce a rubber length which has no natural space but that can stretch +horizontally as far as needed (see Lengths). + +This creates a one-line paragraph with ‘Name:’ on the left side +of the page and ‘Quiz One’ on the right. +\noindent Name:\hfill Quiz One + \fill -The command \hfill is equivalent to \hspace{\fill}. For -space that does not disappear at line breaks use -\hspace*{\fill} instead (see \hspace). +The \hfill command is equivalent to \hspace{\fill} and +so the space can be discarded at line breaks. To avoid that instead use +\hspace*{\fill} (see \hspace). + +Here the graphs are evenly spaced in the middle of the figure. + +\newcommand*{\vcenteredhbox}[1]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}#1\end{tabular}} + ... +\begin{figure} + \hspace*{\fill}% + \vcenteredhbox{\includegraphics{graph0.png}}% + \hfill\vcenteredhbox{\includegraphics{graph1.png}}% + \hspace*{\fill}% + \caption{Comparison of two graphs} \label{fig:twographs} +\end{figure} + +Note the \hspace*’s where the space could otherwise be dropped. + + + + +<literal>\hss</literal> + +\hss +horizontal space +horizontal space, stretchable +space, inserting horizontal + +Synopsis: + +\hss + +Produce a horizontal space that is infinitely shrinkable as well as +infinitely stretchable (this command is a &tex; primitive). &latex; +authors should reach first for the \makebox command to get the +effects of \hss (see \mbox & \makebox). + +Here, the first line’s \hss makes the Z stick out to the right, +overwriting the Y. In the second line the Z sticks out to the left, +overwriting the X. + +X\hbox to 0pt{Z\hss}Y +X\hbox to 0pt{\hss Z}Y + +Without the \hss you get something like ‘Overfull \hbox +(6.11111pt too wide) detected at line 20’. - + <literal>\spacefactor</literal> Synopsis: @@ -8903,24 +11812,26 @@ space that does not disappear at line breaks use \spacefactor=integer \spacefactor -While &latex; is making the page, to give the lines the best appearance -it may stretch or shrink the gaps between words. The -\spacefactor command (from Plain &tex;) allows you to -change the &latex;’s default behavior. +Influence &latex;’s glue stretch and shrink behavior. Most user-level +documents do not use this command. + +While &latex; is laying out the material, it may stretch or shrink the +gaps between words. (This space is not a character; it is called the +interword glue; see \hspace). The \spacefactor command +(from Plain &tex;) allows you to, for instance, have the space +after a period stretch more than the space after a word-ending letter. After &latex; places each character, or rule or other box, it sets a parameter called the space factor. If the next thing in the input -is a space then this parameter affects how much of a horizontal gap -&latex; will have it span. (This gap is not a character; it is called -interword glue.) A larger space factor means that the glue gap -can stretch more and shrink less. - -Normally, the space factor is 1000; this value is in effect following -most characters, and any non-character box or math formula. But it is -3000 after a period, exclamation mark, or question mark, it is 2000 -after a colon, 1500 after a semicolon, 1250 after a comma, and 0 after a -right parenthesis or bracket, or closing double quote or single quote. -Finally, it is 999 after a capital letter. +is a space then this parameter affects how much stretching or shrinking +can happen. A space factor that is larger than the normal value means +that the glue can stretch more and shrink less. Normally, the space +factor is 1000. This value is in effect following most characters, and +any non-character box or math formula. But it is 3000 after a period, +exclamation mark, or question mark, it is 2000 after a colon, 1500 after +a semicolon, 1250 after a comma, and 0 after a right parenthesis or +bracket, or closing double quote or single quote. Finally, it is 999 +after a capital letter. If the space factor f is 1000 then the glue gap will be the font’s normal space value (for Computer Modern Roman 10 point this is @@ -8929,303 +11840,605 @@ than 2000 then &tex; adds the font’s extra space value (for Computer Modern Roman 10 point this is 1.11111 points), and then the font’s normal stretch value is multiplied by f /1000 and the normal shrink value is multiplied by 1000/f (for Computer Modern Roman -10 point these are 1.66666 and 1.11111 points). In short, compared -to a normal space, such as the space following a word ending in a -lowercase letter, inter-sentence spacing has a fixed extra space added -and then the space can stretch 3 times as much and shrink 1/3 as much. +10 point these are 1.66666 and 1.11111 points). + +For example, consider the period ending A man's best friend is his +dog. After it, &tex; puts in a fixed extra space, and also allows the +glue to stretch 3 times as much and shrink 1/3 as much, as the glue +after friend, which does not end in a period. -The rules for how &tex; uses space factors are even more complex -because they play two more roles. In practice, there are two -consequences. First, if a period or other punctuation is followed by a -close parenthesis or close double quote then its effect is still in -place, that is, the following glue will have increased stretch and -shrink. Second, conversely, if punctuation comes after a capital letter -then its effect is not in place so you get an ordinary space. For how -to adjust to this second case, for instance if an abbreviation does not -end in a capital letter, see \(SPACE) and \@. +The rules for space factors are even more complex because they play +additional roles. In practice, there are two consequences. First, if a +period or other punctuation is followed by a right parenthesis or +bracket, or right single or double quote then the spacing effect of that +period carries through those characters (that is, the following glue +will have increased stretch and shrink). Second, if +punctuation comes after a capital letter then its effect is not in place +so you get an ordinary space. This second case also affects abbreviations +that do not end in a capital letter (see \@). + +You can only use \spacefactor in paragraph mode or LR mode +(see Modes). You can see the current value with +\the\spacefactor or \showthe\spacefactor. + +(Comment, not really related to \spacefactor: if you get errors +like ‘You can't use `\spacefactor' in vertical mode’, or ‘You +can't use `\spacefactor' in math mode.’, or ‘Improper \spacefactor’ +then you have probably tried to redefine an internal command. +See \makeatletter & \makeatother.) - -<literal>\(SPACE)</literal> and <literal>\@</literal> + +<literal>\@</literal> -\(SPACE) -\TAB -\NEWLINE \@ +at-sign +period, sentence-ending +period, abbreviation-ending +period, spacing after -Here, \(SPACE) means a backslash followed by a space. These -commands mark a punctuation character, typically a period, as either -ending a sentence or as ending an abbreviation. +Synopsis: + +capital-letter\@. + +Treat a period as sentence-ending, where &latex; would otherwise think +it is part of an abbreviation. &latex; thinks that a period ends an +abbreviation if the period comes after a capital letter, and otherwise +thinks the period ends the sentence. By default, in justifying a line +&latex; adjusts the space after a sentence-ending period (or a question +mark, exclamation point, comma, or colon) more than it adjusts the space +between words (see \spacefactor). + +This example shows the two cases to remember. + +The songs \textit{Red Guitar}, etc.\ are by Loudon Wainwright~III\@. + +The second period ends the sentence, despite that it is preceded by a +capital. We tell &latex; that it ends the sentence by putting +\@ before it. The first period ends the abbreviation +‘etc.’ but not the sentence. The backslash-space, \ , +produces a mid-sentence space. -By default, in justifying a line &latex; adjusts the space after a -sentence-ending period (or a question mark, exclamation point, comma, or -colon) more than the space between words. See \spacefactor. As -described there, &latex; assumes that the period ends a sentence unless -it is preceded by a capital letter, in which case it takes that period -for part of an abbreviation. Note that if a sentence-ending period is -immediately followed by a right parenthesis or bracket, or right single -or double quote, then the space effect of that period follows through -that parenthesis or quote. +So: if you have a capital letter followed by a period that ends the +sentence, then put \@ before the period. This holds even if +there is an intervening right parenthesis or bracket, or right single or +double quote, because the spacing effect of that period carries through +those characters. For example, this -So: if you have a period ending an abbreviation whose last letter is not -a capital letter, and that abbreviation is not the last word in the -sentence, then follow that period with a backslash-space (\ ) or -a tie (~) or a \@. Examples are Nat.\ Acad.\ -Science, and Mr.~Bean, and (manure, etc.\@) for sale -(note that in the last the \@ comes before the closing parenthesis). +Use the \textit{Instructional Practices Guide}, +(a book by the MAA)\@. + +will have correct inter-sentence spacing after the period. -In the opposite situation, if you have a capital letter followed by a -period that does end the sentence, then put \@ before the -period. For example, book by the MAA\@. will have correct -inter-sentence spacing after the period. +The \@ command is only for a text mode. If you use it outside of +a text mode then you get ‘You can't use `\spacefactor' in vertical +mode’ (see Modes). -For another use of \(SPACE), see \(SPACE) after control sequence. +Comment: the converse case is a period ending an abbreviation whose last +letter is not a capital letter, and that abbreviation is not the last +word in the sentence. For that case follow the period with a +backslash-space, (\ ), or a tie, (~), or \@. +Examples are Nat.\ Acad.\ Science, and Mr.~Bean, and +(manure, etc.\@) for sale (note in the last one that the +\@ comes before the closing parenthesis). - + <literal>\frenchspacing</literal> \frenchspacing \nonfrenchspacing spacing, inter-sentence -This declaration (from Plain &tex;) causes &latex; to treat -inter-sentence spacing in the same way as interword spacing. +Synopsis, one of: -In justifying the text in a line, some typographic traditions, including -English, prefer to adjust the space between sentences (or after other -punctuation marks) more than the space between words. Following this -declaration, all spaces are instead treated equally. +\frenchspacing +\nonfrenchspacing + +The first declaration causes &latex; to treat spacing between sentences +in the same way as spacing between words in the middle of a sentence. +The second causes spacing between sentences to stretch or shrink more +(see \spacefactor); this is the default. -Revert to the default behavior by declaring \nonfrenchspacing. +Some typographic traditions, including English, prefer to adjust the +space between sentences (or spaces following a question mark, +exclamation point, comma, or colon) more than the space between words +that are in the middle of a sentence. Declaring \frenchspacing +(the command is from Plain &tex;) switches to the tradition that all +spaces are treated equally. - + <literal>\normalsfcodes</literal> \normalsfcodes spacing, inter-sentence -Reset the &latex; space factor values to the default. +Synopsis: + +\normalsfcodes + +Reset the &latex; space factor values to the default +(see \spacefactor). - -<literal>\ </literal> after control sequence + +Backslash-space, <literal>\ </literal> -The \ command is often used after control sequences to keep -them from gobbling the space that follows, as in ‘\TeX\ is nice’. -And, under normal circumstances, \tab and -\newline are equivalent to \ . For another use of -\ , see also \(SPACE) and \@. +\NEWLINE +\SPACE +\TAB + +This section refers to the command consisting of two characters, a +backslash followed by a space. Synopsis: + +\ + +Produce a space. By default it produces white space of length +3.33333pt plus 1.66666pt minus 1.11111pt. + +A blank is not a space. When you type a blank between words, &latex; +produces white space. That’s different from an explicit space. This +illustrates. + +\begin{tabular}{l} +Three blanks: in a row \\ +Three spaces:\ \ \ in a row \\ +\end{tabular} + +On the first line &latex; collapses the three blanks to output one +whitespace (it would be the same with a single blank or, for instance, +with a blank and an tab and a blank, or a blank and a newline and a +blank). But the second line asks for three spaces so the white area is +wider. Thus, the backslash-space command will create some horizontal +space. (But the best way to create horizontal space is with +\hspace; See \hspace.) + +The backslash-space command has two main uses. First, it is often used +after control sequences to keep them from gobbling the space that +follows, as in \TeX\ is nice. (But the approach of using curly +parentheses, as in \TeX{} is nice, has the advantage of still +working if the next character is a period.) -Some people prefer to use {} for the same purpose, as in -\TeX{} is nice. This has the advantage that you can always -write it the same way, namely \TeX{}, whether it is followed -by a space or by a punctuation mark. Compare: +The second common use is that +it mark a period as ending an abbreviation instead of ending +a sentence, as in So says Prof.\ Smith (see \@). -\TeX\ is a nice system. \TeX, a nice system. +Under normal circumstances, \tab and \newline +are equivalent to backslash-space, \ . + + + + + -\TeX{} is a nice system. \TeX{}, a nice system. + + +<literal>~</literal> + +~ +tie +space, hard +space, unbreakable +NBSP + +Synopsis: + +before~after + +The tie character, ~, produces a space between before and +after at which the line will not be broken. By default the white +space has length 3.33333pt plus 1.66666pt minus +1.11111pt (see Lengths). + +Here &latex; will not break the line between the final two words. + +Thanks to Prof.~Lerman. -package, xspace -xspace package +In addition, despite the period, &latex; does not use the +end-of-sentence spacing (see \@). + +Ties prevent the end of line separation of things where that could cause +confusion. But they also reduce &latex;’s options when it breaks lines +into paragraphs, so you can use too many. They are also matters of +taste, sometimes alarmingly dogmatic taste, among readers. Nevertheless, +here are some usage models, many of them from the &tex;book. + +Between an enumerator and its item, such as in references: +Chapter~12, or Theorem~\ref{th:Wilsons}, or +Figure~\ref{fig:KGraph}. When cases are enumerated inline: +(b)~Show that $f(x)$ is (1)~continuous, and (2)~bounded. + +package, siunitx +siunitx package -Some individual commands, notably those defined with the xspace, -package do not follow the standard behavior. +Between a number and its unit: $745.7.8$~watts (the +siunitx package has a special facility for this) or +144~eggs. This includes between a month and a date: +October~12 or 12~Oct. In general, in any expressions where +numbers and abbreviations or symbols are separated by a space: +AD~565, or 2:50~pm, or Boeing~747, or +268~Plains Road, or \$$1.4$~billion. + +When mathematical phrases are rendered in words: equals~$n$, or +less than~$\epsilon$, or given~$X$, or modulo~$p^e$ +for all large~$n$ (but compare is~$15$ with is $15$~times +the height). Between mathematical symbols in apposition with nouns: +dimension~$d$ or function~$f(x)$ (but compare with +length $l$~or more). When a symbol is a tightly bound object of a +preposition: of~$x$, or from $0$ to~$1$, or in +common with~$m$. +Between symbols in series: $1$,~$2$, or~$3$ or $1$,~$2$, +\ldots,~$n$. + +Between a person’s forenames and between multiple surnames: +Donald~E. Knuth, or Luis~I. Trabb~Pardo, or +Charles~XII (but you must give TeX places to break the line so +you may do Charles Louis Xavier~Joseph de~la Vall\'ee~Poussin). + +Before a dash: pages 12~--14 or it is~--- it must be +said~--- plausible. + + - -<literal>\thinspace</literal>: Insert 1/6em + +<literal>\thinspace</literal> & <literal>\negthinspace</literal> \thinspace +\negthinspace +thin space +space, thin +thin space, negative +space, negative thin -\thinspace produces an unbreakable and unstretchable space that -is 1/6 of an em. This is the proper space to use between nested -quotes, as in ’”. +Synopsis, one of: + +\thinspace +\negthinspace + +Produce an unbreakable and unstretchable space of 1/6em and +-1/6em. These are the text mode equivalents of \, and +\! (see Spacing in math mode/\thinspace). You can use +\, as a synonym for \thinspace in text mode. + +The \negthinspace command is used in text mode mostly for +fiddling with spaces. One common use of \thinspace is as the +space between nested quotes. + +Killick replied, ``I heard the Captain say, `Ahoy there.'\thinspace'' + +Another use is that some style guides call for a \thinspace +between an ellipsis and a sentence ending period (other style guides, +though, think the three dots are quite enough already). Still another +use is between initials, as in D.\thinspace E.\ Knuth. - -<literal>\/</literal>: Insert italic correction + +<literal>\/</literal> \/ italic correction -The \/ command produces an italic correction. This is a -small space defined by the font designer for a given character, -to avoid the character colliding with whatever follows. The italic -f character typically has a large italic correction value. - -If the following character is a period or comma, it’s not necessary to -insert an italic correction, since those punctuation symbols have a -very small height. However, with semicolons or colons, as well as -normal letters, it can help. Compare -f: f; (in the &tex; output, the ‘f’s are nicely separated) -with f: f;. - -When changing fonts with commands such as \textit{italic -text} or {\itshape italic text}, &latex; will -automatically insert an italic correction if appropriate (see Font -styles). +Synopsis: -Despite the name, roman characters can also have an italic -correction. Compare -pdf&tex; (in the &tex; output, there is a small space after the ‘f’) -with pdf&tex;. +before-character\/after-character + +Insert an italic correction, a small space defined by the font +designer for each character, to avoid the character colliding with +whatever follows. When you use \/, &latex; takes the correction +from the font metric file, scales it by any scaling that has been +applied to the font, and then inserts that much horizontal space. + +Here, were it not for the \/, the before-character +italic f would hit the after-character roman H + +\newcommand{\companylogo}{{\it f}\/H} + +because the italic letter leans far to the right. + +If after-character is a period or comma then don’t insert an +italic correction since those punctuation symbols have a very small +height. However, with semicolons or colons as well as with normal +letters, the italic correction can help. + +When you use commands such as \textit or \itshape to +change fonts, &latex; will automatically insert any needed italic +correction (see Font styles). + +Roman characters can also have an italic correction. An example is in +the name pdf\/\TeX. There is no concept of italic correction in math mode; spacing is done in a different way. - -<literal>\hrulefill \dotfill</literal> + +<literal>\hrulefill</literal> & <literal>\dotfill</literal> \hrulefill \dotfill -Produce an infinite rubber length (see Lengths) filled with a -horizontal rule (that is, a line) or with dots, instead of just white -space. +Synopsis, one of: + +\hrulefill +\dotfill + +Produce an infinite horizontal rubber length (see Lengths) that +&latex; fills with a rule (that is, a line) or with dots, instead of +white space. + +This outputs a line 2 inches long. -When placed between blank lines this example creates a paragraph that is -left and right justified, where the space in the middle is filled with -evenly spaced dots. +Name:~\makebox[2in]{\hrulefill} + +This example, when placed between blank lines, creates a paragraph that +is left and right justified and where the middle is filled with evenly +spaced dots. -\noindent Jack Aubrey\dotfill Melbury Lodge +\noindent John Aubrey, RN \dotfill{} Melbury Lodge To make the rule or dots go to the line’s end use \null at the start or end. To change the rule’s thickness, copy the definition and adjust it, as -with \renewcommand{\hrulefill}{\leavevmode\leaders\hrule height -1pt\hfill\kern\z@}, which changes the default thickness of -0.4pt to 1pt. Similarly, adjust the dot spacing as with -\renewcommand{\dotfill}{\leavevmode\cleaders\hb@xt@ -1.00em{\hss .\hss }\hfill\kern\z@}, which changes the default -length of 0.33em to 1.00em. - - - - -<literal>\addvspace</literal> - -\addvspace -vertical space -space, inserting vertical - -\addvspace{length} +here -Add a vertical space of height length, which is a rubber length -(see Lengths). However, if vertical space has already been added to -the same point in the output by a previous \addvspace command -then this command will not add more space than what is needed to make -the natural length of the total vertical space equal to length. +\renewcommand{\hrulefill}{% + \leavevmode\leaders\hrule height 1pt\hfill\kern\z@} + +which changes the default thickness of 0.4pt to 1pt. +Similarly, adjust the dot spacing as with -Use this command to adjust the vertical space above or below an -environment that starts a new paragraph. For instance, a Theorem -environment is defined to begin and end with \addvspace{...} -so that two consecutive Theorem’s are separated by one vertical space, -not two. +\renewcommand{\dotfill}{% + \leavevmode\cleaders\hb@xt@1.00em{\hss .\hss }\hfill\kern\z@} + +which changes the default length of 0.33em to 1.00em. -This command is fragile (see \protect). +This example produces a line for a signature. -The error ‘Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item’ means that -you were not in vertical mode when you invoked this command; one way to -change that is to precede this command with a \par command. +\begin{minipage}{4cm} + \centering + \hrulefill\\ + Signed +\end{minipage} + +The line is 4cm long. - -<literal>\bigskip \medskip \smallskip</literal> + +<literal>\bigskip</literal> & <literal>\medskip</literal> & <literal>\smallskip</literal> + +Synopsis, one of: + +\bigskip +\medskip +\smallskip + +Produce an amount of vertical space, large or medium-sized or +small. These commands are fragile (see \protect). + +Here the skip suggests the passage of time (from The Golden Ocean by +O’Brian). + +Mr Saumarez would have something rude to say to him, no doubt: he +was at home again, and it was delightful. -These commands produce a given amount of space, specified by the -document class. +\bigskip +``A hundred and fifty-seven miles and one third, in twenty-four hours,'' +said Peter. + +Each command is associated with a length defined in the document class +file. -\bigskip\bigskip +\bigskip\bigskip \bigskipamount The same as \vspace{\bigskipamount}, ordinarily about one line -space, with stretch and shrink (the default for the book and -article classes is 12pt plus 4pt minus 4pt). +space, with stretch and shrink. The default for the book and +article classes is 12pt plus 4pt minus 4pt. -\medskip\medskip +\medskip\medskip \medskipamount -The same as \vspace{\medskipamount}, ordinarily about half of -a line space, with stretch and shrink (the default for the book -and article classes is 6pt plus 2pt minus 2pt). +The same as \vspace{\medskipamount}, ordinarily about half of a +line space, with stretch and shrink. The default for the book +and article classes is 6pt plus 2pt minus 2pt. -\smallskip\smallskip +\smallskip\smallskip \smallskipamount The same as \vspace{\smallskipamount}, ordinarily about a -quarter of a line space, with stretch and shrink (the default for the -book and article classes is 3pt plus 1pt minus -1pt). +quarter of a line space, with stretch and shrink. The default for the +book and article classes is 3pt plus 1pt minus 1pt. +Because each command is a \vspace, if you use on in mid-paragraph +then it will insert its vertical space between the line in which you use +it and the next line, not necessarily at the place that you use it. So +these are best between paragraphs. + +The commands \bigbreak, \medbreak, and \smallbreak +are similar but also suggest to &latex; that this is a good place to +put a page break (see \bigbreak & \medbreak & \smallbreak. + - -<literal>\vfill</literal> + +<literal>\bigbreak</literal> & <literal>\medbreak</literal> & <literal>\smallbreak</literal> -\vfill +Synopsis, one of: + +\bigbreak +\medbreak +\smallbreak + +Produce a vertical space that is big or medium-sized or small, and +suggest to &latex; that this is a good place to break the page. (The +associated penalties are -200, -100, and -50.) + +See \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip, for more. These commands +produce the same vertical space but differ in that they also remove a +preceding vertical space if it is less than what they would insert (as +with \addvspace). In addition, they terminate a paragraph where +they are used: this example + +abc\bigbreak def ghi -stretch, infinite vertical -infinite vertical stretch +jkl mno pqr + +will output three paragraphs, the first ending in ‘abc’ and the +second starting, after an extra vertical space and a paragraph indent, +with ‘def’. + + + + +<literal>\strut</literal> -End the current paragraph and insert a vertical rubber length -(see Lengths) that is infinite, so it can stretch or shrink as far -as needed. +\strut +strut + +Synopsis: -It is often used in the same way as \vspace{\fill}, except that -\vfill ends the current paragraph, whereas -\vspace{\fill} adds the infinite vertical space below its line -irrespective of the paragraph structure. In both cases that space will -disappear at a page boundary; to circumvent this see \vspace. +\strut + +Ensure that the current line has height at least 0.7\baselineskip +and depth at least 0.3\baselineskip. Essentially, &latex; +inserts into the line a rectangle having zero width, +\rule[-0.3\baselineskip]{0pt}{\baselineskip} (see \rule). +The \baselineskip changes with the current font and fontsize. -In this example the page is filled, so the top and bottom lines contain -the text ‘Lost Dog!’ and the third ‘Lost Dog!’ is exactly -halfway between them. - -\begin{document} -Lost Dog! -\vfill -Lost Dog! -\vfill -Lost Dog! -\end{document} +In this example the \strut keeps the box inside the frame from +having zero height. + +\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\framebox[2in]{\strut} + +This example has four lists. In the first there is a much bigger gap +between items 2 and 3 than there is between items 1 and 2. +The second list fixes that with a \strut at the end of its first +item’s second line. + +\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt} +\noindent\begin{minipage}[t]{0.2\linewidth} +\begin{enumerate} + \item \parbox[t]{15pt}{test \\ test} + \item test + \item test +\end{enumerate} +\end{minipage}% +\begin{minipage}[t]{0.2\linewidth} +\begin{enumerate} + \item \parbox[t]{15pt}{test \\ test\strut} + \item test + \item test +\end{enumerate} +\end{minipage}% +\begin{minipage}[t]{0.2\linewidth} +\begin{enumerate} + \item \fbox{\parbox[t]{15pt}{test \\ test}} + \item \fbox{test} + \item \fbox{test} +\end{enumerate} +\end{minipage}% +\begin{minipage}[t]{0.2\linewidth} +\begin{enumerate} + \item \fbox{\parbox[t]{15pt}{test \\ test\strut}} + \item \fbox{test} + \item \fbox{test} +\end{enumerate} +\end{minipage}% + +The final two lists use fbox to show what’s happening. The third +list’s \parbox goes only to the bottom of its second ‘test’, +which happens not have any characters that descend below the baseline. +The fourth list adds the strut that gives the needed extra +below-baseline space. + +package, TikZ +TikZ package +package, Asymptote +Asymptote package + +The \strut command is often useful in graphics, such as in +TikZ or Asymptote. For instance, you may have a command +such as \graphnode{node-name} that fits a circle around +node-name. However, unless you are careful the node-name’s +‘x’ and ‘y’ will produce different-diameter circles because +the characters are different sizes. A careful \graphnode might +insert a \strut, then node-name, and then draw the circle. + +The general approach of using a zero width \rule is useful in +many circumstances. In this table, the zero-width rule keeps the top of +the first integral from hitting the \hline. Similarly, the +second rule keeps the second integral from hitting the first. + +\begin{tabular}{rl} + \textsc{Integral} &\textsc{Value} \\ + \hline + $\int_0^x t\, dt$ &$x^2/2$ \rule{0em}{2.5ex} \\ + $\int_0^x t^2\, dt$ &$x^3/3$ \rule{0em}{2.5ex} +\end{tabular} +(Although the line-ending double backslash command has an available +optional argument to put in more vertical room, that won’t work here. +Changing the first double backslash to something like \\[2.5ex] +will put the room between the header line and the \hline, and the +integral would still hit the line.) + - -<literal>\vspace{<replaceable>length</replaceable>}</literal> + +<literal>\vspace</literal> \vspace vertical space space, vertical -Synopsis, one of these two: +Synopsis, one of: \vspace{length} \vspace*{length} -Add the vertical space length. This can be negative or positive, -and is a rubber length (see Lengths). +Add the vertical space length. The length can be positive, +negative, or zero. It is a rubber length—it may contain a plus +or minus component (see Lengths). + +This puts space between the two paragraphs. + +And I slept. + +\vspace{1ex plus 0.5ex} +The new day dawned cold. + +(See \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip for common inter-paragraph +spaces.) + +The *-version inserts vertical space that non-discardable. More +precisely, &latex; discards vertical space at a page break and the +*-version causes the space to stay. This example leaves space +between the two questions. -&latex; removes the vertical space from \vspace at a page -break, that is, at the top or bottom of a page. The starred version -\vspace*{...} causes the space to stay. +Question: Find the integral of \( 5x^4+5 \). + +\vspace*{2cm plus 0.5cm} +Question: Find the derivative of \( x^5+5x+9 \). + +That space will be present even if the page break happens to fall +between the questions. -If \vspace is used in the middle of a paragraph (i.e., in -horizontal mode), the space is inserted after the line with -the \vspace command. A new paragraph is not started. +If you use \vspace in the middle of a paragraph (i.e., in +horizontal mode) then the space is inserted after the line containing +the \vspace command; it does not start a new paragraph at the +\vspace command. In this example the two questions will be evenly spaced vertically on the page, with at least one inch of space below each. @@ -9239,6 +12452,98 @@ the page, with at least one inch of space below each. \end{document} + + +<literal>\vfill</literal> + +\vfill + +stretch, infinite vertical +infinite vertical stretch + +Synopsis: + +\vfill + +End the current paragraph and insert a vertical rubber length that is +infinite, so it can stretch or shrink as far as needed +(see Lengths). + +It is often used in the same way as \vspace{\fill}, except that +\vfill ends the current paragraph whereas \vspace{\fill} +adds the infinite vertical space below its line, irrespective of the +paragraph structure. In both cases that space will disappear at a page +boundary; to circumvent this see the starred option +in \vspace. + +In this example the page is filled, so the top and bottom lines contain +the text ‘Lost Dog!’ and the second ‘Lost Dog!’ is exactly +halfway between them. + +\begin{document} +Lost Dog! +\vfill +Lost Dog! % perfectly in the middle +\vfill +Lost Dog! +\end{document} + + + + +<literal>\addvspace</literal> + +\addvspace +vertical space +space, inserting vertical + +Synopsis: + +\addvspace{vert-length} + +Add a vertical space of vert-length. However, if there are two or +more \addvspace’s in a sequence then together they only add the +space needed to make the natural length equal to the maximum of the +vert-length’s in that sequence. This command is fragile +(see \protect). The vert-length is a rubber length +(see Lengths). + +This example illustrates. The picture draws a scale. In a +standard &latex; article the length \baselineskip is 12pt. +The two rules here are 22pt apart: the sum of the +\baselineskip and the 10pt from the first addvspace. + +\documentclass{article} +\usepackage{color} +\begin{document} +\setlength{\unitlength}{2pt}% +\noindent\begin{picture}(0,0)% + \multiput(0,0)(0,-1){25}{{\color{blue}\line(1,0){1}}} + \multiput(0,0)(0,-5){6}{{\color{red}\line(1,0){2}}} +\end{picture}% +\rule{0.25\linewidth}{0.1pt}% +\par\addvspace{10pt}% \addvspace{20pt}% +\par\noindent\rule{0.25\linewidth}{0.1pt}% +\end{document} + +Now uncomment the second \addvspace. It does not make the gap +20pt longer; instead the gap is the sum of \baselineskip +and 20pt. So \addvspace in a sense does the opposite of +its name — it makes sure that multiple vertical spaces do not +accumulate, but instead that only the largest one is used. + +&latex; uses this command to adjust the vertical space above or below +an environment that starts a new paragraph. For instance, a +theorem environment begins and ends with \addvspace so +that two consecutive theorem’s are separated by one vertical +space, not two. + +A error ‘Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item’ pointing to an +\addvspace means that you were not in vertical mode when you hit +this command. One way to change that is to precede \addvspace +with a \par command (see \par), as in the above example. + + @@ -9246,216 +12551,450 @@ the page, with at least one inch of space below each. boxes -All the predefined length parameters (see Predefined lengths) can be -used in the arguments of the box-making commands. +At its core, &latex; puts things in boxes and then puts the boxes on a +page. So these commands are central. + +There are many packages on CTAN that are useful for manipulating boxes. +One useful adjunct to the commands here is adjustbox. - -<literal>\mbox{<replaceable>text}</replaceable></literal> + +<literal>\mbox</literal> & <literal>\makebox</literal> \mbox - +\makebox +box +make a box hyphenation, preventing -The \mbox command creates a box just wide enough to hold the -text created by its argument. The text is not broken into -lines, so it can be used to prevent hyphenation. + +Synopsis, one of: + +\mbox{text} +\makebox{text} +\makebox[width]{text} +\makebox[width][position]{text} + +Create a box, a container for material. The text is is typeset in +LR mode (see Modes) so it is not broken into lines. The +\mbox command is robust, while \makebox is fragile +(see \protect). + +Because text is not broken into lines, you can use \mbox +to prevent hyphenation. In this example, &latex; will not hyphenate +the table name, ‘T-4’. + +See Table~\mbox{T-4} + +The first two command versions, \mbox and \makebox, are +roughly equivalent. They create a box just wide enough to contain the +text. (They are like plain &tex;’s \hbox.) + +In the third version the optional argument width specifies the +width of the box. Note that the space occupied by the text need not +equal the width of the box. For one thing, text can be too small; +this creates a full-line box + +\makebox[\linewidth]{Chapter Exam} + +with ‘Chapter Exam’ centered. But text can also be too wide +for width. See the example below of zero-width boxes. + +In the width argument you can use the following lengths that refer +to the dimension of the box that &latex; gets on typesetting +text: \depth, \height, \width, +\totalheight (this is the box’s height plus its depth). For +example, to make a box with the text stretched to double the natural +size you can say this. + +\makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher} + +For the fourth command version the optional argument position +gives position of the text within the box. It may take the following +values: + +c +The text is centered (default). + +l +The text is flush left. + +r +Flush right. + +s +Stretch the interword space in text across the entire width. +The text must contain stretchable space for this to work. For +instance, this could head a press release: +\noindent\makebox[\textwidth][s]{\large\hfil IMMEDIATE\hfil +RELEASE\hfil} + +A common use of \makebox is to make zero-width text boxes. This +puts the value of the quiz questions to the left of those questions. + +\newcommand{\pts}[1]{\makebox[0em][r]{#1 points\hspace*{1em}}} +\pts{10}What is the air-speed velocity of an unladen swallow? + +\pts{90}An African or European swallow? + +package, TikZ +TikZ package + +package, Asymptote +Asymptote package + +The right edge of the output ‘10 points ’ (note the ending space) +will be just before the ‘What’ (note the space after +‘points’). You can use \makebox similarly when making +graphics, such as in TikZ or Asymptote, where you put the +edge of the text at a known location, regardless of the length of that +text. + +For boxes with frames see \fbox & \framebox. For colors +see Colored boxes. + +There is a related version of \makebox that is used within the +picture environment, where the length is given in terms of +\unitlength (see \makebox (picture)). + +If you put a double-backslash into text then &latex; will not +give you a new line; for instance \makebox{abc def \\ ghi} +outputs ‘abc defghi’ while \makebox{abc def \par ghi} +outputs ‘abc def ghi’, but neither go to a second line. To get +multiple lines see \parbox and minipage. - -<literal>\fbox</literal> and <literal>\framebox</literal> + +<literal>\fbox</literal> & <literal>\framebox</literal> \fbox \framebox -Synopses: +Synopses, one of: \fbox{text} +\framebox{text} +\framebox[width]{text} \framebox[width][position]{text} -The \fbox and \framebox commands are like \mbox, -except that they put a frame around the outside of the box being created. +Create a box with an enclosing frame, four lines surrounding the space. +These commands are the same as \mbox and \makebox except +for the frame (see \mbox & \makebox). The \fbox command is +robust, the \framebox command is fragile (see \protect). -In addition, the \framebox command allows for explicit -specification of the box width with the optional width argument -(a dimension), and positioning with the optional position -argument. +\fbox{Warning! No work shown, no credit given.} + +&latex; puts the text into a box that cannot be split or hyphenated. +Around that box, separated from it by a small gap, are four lines making +a frame. -\fboxrule -\fboxsep -Both commands produce a rule of thickness \fboxrule (default -0.4pt), and leave a space of \fboxsep (default 3pt) -between the rule and the contents of the box. +The first two command invocations, \fbox{...} and +\framebox{...}, are roughly the same. As to the third and +fourth invocations, the optional arguments allow you to specify the box +width as width and the position of the text inside that box as +position. See \mbox & \makebox for the full description but +here is an example creating an empty box that is 1/4in wide. -See \framebox (picture), for the \framebox command in the -picture environment. +\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\framebox[0.25in]{\strut}} + +The \strut inserts a vertical height of \baselineskip +(see \strut). - - - -<literal>lrbox</literal> - -lrbox - -Synopsis: +These parameters determine the frame layout. -\begin{lrbox}{\cmd} - text -\end{lrbox} - -This is the environment form of \sbox. +\fboxrule\fboxrule +frame, line width +frame rule width +\fboxrule +The thickness of the lines around the enclosed box. The default is +0.2pt. Change it with a command such as +\setlength{\fboxrule}{0.8pt} (see \setlength). -The text inside the environment is saved in the box \cmd, -which must have been declared with \newsavebox. +\fboxsep\fboxsep +frame, separation from contents +\fboxsep +The distance from the frame to the enclosed box. The default is 3pt. +Change it with a command such as \setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt} +(see \setlength). Setting it to 0pt is useful sometimes: +this will put a frame around the picture with no white border. - - - -<literal>\makebox</literal> - -\makebox - -Synopsis: +{\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt} + \framebox{% + \includegraphics[width=0.5\textwidth]{prudence.jpg}}} + +The extra curly braces keep the effect of the \setlength local. + + +As with \mbox and \makebox, &latex; will not break lines +in text. But this example has &latex; break lines to make a +paragraph, and then frame the result. -\makebox[width][position]{text} +\framebox{% + \begin{minipage}{0.6\linewidth} + My dear, here we must run as fast as we can, just to stay in place. + And if you wish to go anywhere you must run twice as fast as that. + \end{minipage}} -The \makebox command creates a box just wide enough to contain -the text specified. The width of the box can be overridden by the -optional width argument. The position of the text within the box -is determined by the optional position argument, which may take -the following values: +See Colored boxes for colors other than black and white. -c -Centered (default). -l -Flush left. -r -Flush right. -s -Stretch (justify) across entire width; text must contain -stretchable space for this to work. - -\makebox is also used within the picture environment -see \makebox (picture). +The picture environment has a version of this command where the +units depend on picture’s \unitlength (see \framebox +(picture)). - + <literal>\parbox</literal> \parbox +paragraph mode +paragraph, in a box -Synopsis: +Synopses, one of: -\parbox[position][height][inner-pos]{width}{text} +\parbox{width}{contents} +\parbox[position]{width}{contents} +\parbox[position][height]{width}{contents} +\parbox[position][height][inner-pos]{width}{contents} -paragraph mode -The \parbox command produces a box whose contents are created -in paragraph mode. It should be used to make a box small -pieces of text, with nothing fancy inside. In particular, you -shouldn’t use any paragraph-making environments inside a -\parbox argument. For larger pieces of text, including ones -containing a paragraph-making environment, you should use a -minipage environment (see minipage). - -\parbox has two mandatory arguments: - -width -the width of the parbox; -text -the text that goes inside the parbox. - -By default &latex; will position vertically a parbox so its center -lines up with the center of the surrounding text line. When the -optional position argument is present and equal either to ‘t’ -or ‘b’, this allows you respectively to align either the top or -bottom line in the parbox with the baseline of the surrounding text. You -may also specify ‘m’ for position to get the default -behaviour. - -The optional height argument overrides the natural height of the box. +Produce a box of text that is width wide. Use this command to make +a box of small pieces of text, of a single paragraph. This command is +fragile (see \protect). -The inner-pos argument controls the placement of the text inside -the box, as follows; if it is not specified, position is used. +\begin{picture}(0,0) + ... + \put(1,2){\parbox{1.75in}{\raggedright Because the graph is a line on + this semilog paper, the relationship is + exponential.}} +\end{picture} + +The contents are processed in a text mode (see Modes) so +&latex; will break lines to make a paragraph. But it won’t make +multiple paragraphs; for that, use a minipage environment +(see minipage). + +The options for \parbox (except for contents) are the same +as those for minipage. For convenience a summary of the options +is here but see minipage for a complete description. + +There are two required arguments. The width is a rigid length +(see Lengths). It sets the width of the box into which &latex; +typesets contents. The contents is the text that is placed +in that box. It should not have any paragraph-making components. + +There are three optional arguments, position, height, and +inner-pos. The position gives the vertical alignment of the +parbox with respect to the surrounding material. The possible +values are c or m to make the vertical center of the +parbox lines up with the center of the adjacent line (this is the +default), or t to match the top line of the parbox with +the baseline of the surrounding material, or b to match the +bottom line. + +The optional argument height overrides the natural height of the +box. + +The optional argument inner-pos controls the placement of +content inside the parbox. Its default is the value of +position. Its possible values are: t to put the +content at the top of the box, c to put it in the vertical +center, b to put it at the bottom of the box, and s to +stretch it out vertically (for this, the text must contain vertically +stretchable space). -t -text is placed at the top of the box. -c -text is centered in the box. -b -text is placed at the bottom of the box. -s -stretch vertically; the text must contain vertically stretchable space -for this to work. - - - + <literal>\raisebox</literal> \raisebox -Synopsis: +Synopsis, one of: + +\raisebox{distance}{text} +\raisebox{distance}[height]{text} +\raisebox{distance}[height][depth]{text} + +Raise or lower text. This command is fragile (see \protect). + +This example makes a command for the restriction of a function by +lowering the vertical bar symbol. -\raisebox{distance}[height][depth]{text} + +\newcommand\restricted[1]{\raisebox{-.5ex}{$|$}_{#1}} +$f\restricted{A}$ -The \raisebox command raises or lowers text. The first -mandatory argument specifies how high text is to be raised (or -lowered if it is a negative amount). text itself is processed -in LR mode. +The first mandatory argument distance specifies how far to raise +the second mandatory argument text. This is a rigid length +(see Lengths). If it is negative then it lowers text. The +text is processed in LR mode so it cannot contain line breaks +(see Modes). The optional arguments height and depth are dimensions. If -they are specified, &latex; treats text as extending a certain -distance above the baseline (height) or below (depth), -ignoring its natural height and depth. +they are specified, they override the natural height and depth of the +box &latex; gets by typesetting text. + +In the arguments distance, height, and depth you can +use the following lengths that refer to the dimension of the box that +&latex; gets on typesetting text: \depth, \height, +\width, \totalheight (this is the box’s height plus its +depth). + +This will align two graphics on their top (see Graphics). + + +\usepackage{graphicx} \usepackage{calc} % in preamble + ... +\begin{center} + \raisebox{1ex-\height}{% + \includegraphics[width=0.4\linewidth]{lion.png}} + \qquad + \raisebox{1ex-\height}{% + \includegraphics[width=0.4\linewidth]{meta.png}} +\end{center} + +The first \height is the height of lion.png while the +second is the height of meta.png. - -<literal>\savebox</literal> + +<literal>\sbox</literal> & <literal>\savebox</literal> +\sbox \savebox +box, save -Synopsis: +Synopsis, one of: + +\sbox{box-cmd}{text} +\savebox{box-cmd}{text} +\savebox{box-cmd}[width]{text} +\savebox{box-cmd}[width][pos]{text} + +Typeset text just as with \makebox (see \mbox & +\makebox) except that &latex; does not output it but instead saves it +in a storage bin named box-cmd. The bin name box-cmd begins +with a backslash, \. You must have previously allocated the bin +box-cmd with \newsavebox (see \newsavebox).The +\sbox command is robust while \savebox is fragile +(see \protect). -\savebox{\boxcmd}[width][pos]{text} +This creates and uses a bin. + +\newsavebox{\fullname} +\sbox{\fullname}{John Jacob Jingleheimer Schmidt} + ... +\usebox{\fullname}! His name is my name, too! +Whenever we go out, the people always shout! +There goes \\usebox{\fullname}! Ya da da da da da da. + +One advantage of using and reusing a bin over a \newcommand is +efficiency, that &latex; need not repeatedly retypeset the contents. +See the example below. + +The first two command invocations, +\sbox{box-cmd}{text} and +\savebox{box-cmd}{text}, are roughly equivalent. +As to the third and fourth, the optional arguments allow you to specify +the box width as width, and the position of the text inside that +box as position. See \mbox & \makebox for the full +description. + +In the \sbox and \savebox commands the text is +typeset in LR mode so it does not have line breaks (see Modes). If +you use these then &latex; doesn’t give you an error but it ignores +what you want: if you enter \sbox{\newbin}{test \\ test} and +\usebox{\newbin} then you get ‘testtest’, while if you +enter \sbox{\newbin}{test \par test} and +\usebox{\newbin} then you get ‘test test’, but no error or +warning. To fix this use a \parbox or minipage as here. + + +\savebox{\abin}{% + \begin{minipage}{\linewidth} + \begin{enumerate} + \item First item + \item Second item + \end{enumerate} + \end{minipage}} + ... +\usebox{\abin} + +As an example of the efficiency of reusing a bin’s contents, this puts +the same picture on each page of the document by putting it in the +header. &latex; only typesets it once. + +\usepackage{graphicx} % all this in the preamble +\newsavebox{\sealbin} +\savebox{\sealbin}{% + \setlength{\unitlength}{1in}% + \begin{picture}(0,0)% + \put(1.5,-2.5){% + \begin{tabular}{c} + \includegraphics[height=2in]{companylogo.png} \\ + Office of the President + \end{tabular}} + \end{picture}% +} +\markright{\usebox{\sealbin}} +\pagestyle{headings} -This command typeset text in a box just as with \makebox -(see \makebox), except that instead of printing the resulting box, -it saves it in the box labeled \boxcmd, which must have been -declared with \newsavebox (see \newsavebox). +The picture environment is good for fine-tuning the placement. + +If the bin has not already been defined then you get something like +‘Undefined control sequence. <argument> \nobin’. - -<literal>\sbox{<replaceable>\boxcmd</replaceable>}{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</literal> + +<literal>lrbox</literal> -\sbox +lrbox Synopsis: -\sbox{\boxcmd}{text} +\begin{lrbox}{box-cmd} + text +\end{lrbox} + +The text inside the environment is saved in the bin +box-cmd. The box-cmd must begin with a +backslash. You must create this bin in advance with \newsavebox +(see \newsavebox). This is the environment form of the \sbox +and \savebox commands, and is equivalent to them. See \sbox & +\savebox for the full information. + +In this example the environment is convenient for entering the +tabular. + +\newsavebox{\jhbin} +\begin{lrbox}{\jhbin} + \begin{tabular}{c} + \includegraphics[height=1in]{jh.png} \\ + Jim Hef{}feron + \end{tabular} +\end{lrbox} + ... +\usebox{\jhbin} -\sbox types text in a box just as with \mbox -(see \mbox) except that instead of the resulting box being -included in the normal output, it is saved in the box labeled -\boxcmd. \boxcmd must have been previously declared with -\newsavebox (see \newsavebox). - - -<literal>\usebox{<replaceable>\boxcmd</replaceable>}</literal> + +<literal>\usebox</literal> \usebox +box, use saved box Synopsis: -\usebox{\boxcmd} +\usebox{box-cmd} -\usebox produces the box most recently saved in the bin -\boxcmd by a \savebox command (see \savebox). +Produce the box most recently saved in the bin box-cmd by the +commands \sbox or \savebox, or the lrbox +environment. See \sbox & \savebox for more information and examples. +(Note that box-cmd starts with a backslash.) This command is +robust (see \protect). @@ -9480,7 +13019,7 @@ significantly extends the capabilities described here, including adding -Color package options +<literal>color</literal> package options color package options options, color package @@ -9544,25 +13083,25 @@ of red, green, and blue produces white. Subtractive mixes pigments, such as with inks, so that combining full intensity of cyan, magenta, and yellow makes black. -cmyk +cmyk A comma-separated list with four real numbers between 0 and 1, inclusive. The first number is the intensity of cyan, the second is magenta, and the others are yellow and black. A number value of 0 means minimal intensity, while a 1 is for full intensity. This model is often used in color printing. It is a subtractive model. -gray +gray A single real number between 0 and 1, inclusive. The colors are shades of grey. The number 0 produces black while 1 gives white. -rgb +rgb A comma-separated list with three real numbers between 0 and 1, inclusive. The first number is the intensity of the red component, the second is green, and the third the blue. A number value of 0 means that none of that component is added in, while a 1 means full intensity. This is an additive model. -RGB +RGB (pdftex, xetex, luatex drivers) A comma-separated list with three integers between 0 and 255, inclusive. This model is a convenience for using rgb since outside of &latex; colors are @@ -9570,7 +13109,7 @@ often described in a red-green-blue model using numbers in this range. The values entered here are converted to the rgb model by dividing by 255. -named +named Colors are accessed by name, such as ‘PrussianBlue’. The list of names depends on the driver, but all support the names ‘black’, ‘blue’, ‘cyan’, ‘green’, ‘magenta’, ‘red’, @@ -9600,9 +13139,12 @@ names depends on the driver, but all support the names ‘black \definecolor{name}{model}{specification} -Give the name name to the color. For example, after -\definecolor{silver}{rgb}{0.75,0.75,0.74} you can use that -color name with Hi ho, \textcolor{silver}{Silver}!. +Give the name name to the color. For example, after this + +\definecolor{silver}{rgb}{0.75,0.75,0.74} + +you can use that color name with Hi ho, +\textcolor{silver}{Silver}!. This example gives the color a more abstract name, so it could change and not be misleading. @@ -9633,7 +13175,8 @@ or style, rather than in the document body. The affected text gets the color. This line -\textcolor{magenta}{My name is Ozymandias, king of kings:} Look on my works, ye Mighty, and despair! +\textcolor{magenta}{My name is Ozymandias, king of kings:} +Look on my works, ye Mighty, and despair! causes the first half to be in magenta while the rest is in black. You can use a color declared with \definecolor in exactly the same @@ -9658,9 +13201,12 @@ including the vertical and horizontal lines. \end{tabular} \end{center} -You can use color in equations. A document might have -\definecolor{highlightcolor}{RGB}{225,15,0} in the -preamble, and then contain this equation. +You can use color in equations. A document might have this definition +in the preamble + +\definecolor{highlightcolor}{RGB}{225,15,0} + +and then contain this equation. \begin{equation} \int_a^b \textcolor{highlightcolor}{f'(x)}\,dx=f(b)-f(a) @@ -9670,7 +13216,8 @@ preamble, and then contain this equation. but sometimes you want a one-off. Those are the second forms in the synopses. -Colors of \textcolor[rgb]{0.33,0.14,0.47}{Purple} and {\color[rgb]{0.72,0.60,0.37} Gold} for the team +Colors of \textcolor[rgb]{0.33,0.14,0.47}{Purple} and +{\color[rgb]{0.72,0.60,0.37} Gold} for the team. The format of color specification depends on the color model (see Color models). For instance, while rgb takes three @@ -9698,12 +13245,12 @@ numbers, gray takes only one. Synopses: \colorbox{name}{...} -\colorbox[model name]{box background color specification}{...} +\colorbox[model name]{box background color}{...} or \fcolorbox{frame color}{box background color}{...} -\fcolorbox[model name]{frame color specification}{box background color specification}{...} +\fcolorbox[model name]{frame color}{box background color}{...} Make a box with the stated background color. The \fcolorbox command puts a frame around the box. For instance this @@ -9718,7 +13265,7 @@ puts white text on a blue background. \colorbox{blue}{\textcolor{white}{Welcome to the machine.}} The \fcolorbox commands use the same parameters as \fbox -(see \fbox and \framebox), \fboxrule and \fboxsep, to +(see \fbox & \framebox), \fboxrule and \fboxsep, to set the thickness of the rule and the boundary between the box interior and the surrounding rule. &latex;’s defaults are 0.4pt and 3pt, respectively. @@ -9801,12 +13348,12 @@ external to &latex;, that generate a graphic that you include using the commands of this chapter. Two that use a programming language are Asymptote and MetaPost. One that uses a graphical interface is Xfig. Full description of these systems is outside the scope of this document; -see their documentation. +see their documentation on CTAN. -Graphics package options +<literal>graphics</literal> package options graphics package options options, graphics package @@ -9880,7 +13427,7 @@ option has &latex; to read the size from the latter. -Graphics package configuration +<literal>graphics</literal> package configuration graphics graphics package @@ -9895,7 +13442,7 @@ option has &latex; to read the size from the latter. the graphic. The behavior of file system search code is necessarily platform -dependent. In this document we cover Linux, Macintosh, and Windows, as +dependent. In this document we cover GNU/Linux, Macintosh, and Windows, as those systems are typically configured. For other situations consult the documentation in grfguide.pdf, or the &latex; source, or your &tex; distribution’s documentation. @@ -9959,9 +13506,9 @@ these means that the document is not portable. (You could preserve portability by adjusting your &tex; system settings configuration file parameter TEXINPUTS; see the documentation of your system.) -You can use \graphicspath in the preamble or in the document -body. You can use it more than once. For debugging, show its value -with \makeatletter\typeout{\Ginput@path}\makeatother. +You can use \graphicspath anywhere in the document. You can use +it more than once. Show its value with +\makeatletter\typeout{\Ginput@path}\makeatother. The directories are taken with respect to the base file. That is, suppose that you are working on a document based on book/book.tex @@ -10001,17 +13548,18 @@ and extensions then it reports ‘! LaTeX Error: File `li not found’. Note that you must include the periods at the start of the extensions. -Because Linux and Macintosh filenames are case sensitive, the list of +Because GNU/Linux and Macintosh filenames are case sensitive, the list of file extensions is case sensitive on those platforms. The Windows platform is not case sensitive. You are not required to include \DeclareGraphicsExtensions in your document; the printer driver has a sensible default. For example, -the most recent pdftex.def has the extension list -‘.png,.pdf,.jpg,.mps,.jpeg,.jbig2,.jb2,.PNG,.PDF,.JPG,.JPEG,.JBIG2,.JB2’. +the most recent pdftex.def has this extension list. -You can use this command in the preamble or in the document body. You -can use it more than once. For debugging, show its value with +.png,.pdf,.jpg,.mps,.jpeg,.jbig2,.jb2,.PNG,.PDF,.JPG,.JPEG,.JBIG2,.JB2 + +You can use this command anywhere in the document. You can use it more +than once. Show its value with \makeatletter\typeout{\Gin@extensions}\makeatother. @@ -10152,8 +13700,8 @@ centered and at its nominal size. You can also give a path to the file, as with \includegraphics{graphics/plot.pdf}. To specify a list of locations to search for the file, see \graphicspath. -If your filename includes spaces then put it in double quotes, as with -\includegraphics{"sister picture.jpg"}. +If your filename includes spaces then put it in double quotes. An example +is \includegraphics{"sister picture.jpg"}. The \includegraphics{filename} command decides on the type of graphic by splitting filename on the first dot. You can @@ -10188,14 +13736,13 @@ caption. ... \begin{center} \includegraphics{pix/nix.png} - \captionof{figure}{The spirit of the night} \label{pix:nix} % if you want a caption + \captionof{figure}{The spirit of the night} \label{pix:nix} % optional \end{center} This example puts a box with a graphic side by side with one having text, with the two vertically centered. -\newcommand*{\vcenteredhbox}[1]{\begingroup - \setbox0=\hbox{#1}\parbox{\wd0}{\box0}\endgroup} +\newcommand*{\vcenteredhbox}[1]{\begin{tabular}{@{}c@{}}#1\end{tabular}} ... \begin{center} \vcenteredhbox{\includegraphics[width=0.4\textwidth]{plot}} @@ -10243,7 +13790,7 @@ go beyond this box, or sit inside this box, but when &latex; makes up a page it puts together boxes and this is the box allocated for the graphic. -width +width The graphic will be shown so its bounding box is this width. An example is \includegraphics[width=1in]{plot}. You can use the standard &tex; dimensions (see Units of length) and also convenient is @@ -10254,37 +13801,38 @@ the width of the text with \includegraphics[width=\linewidth-1.0cm]{hefferon.jpg}. height -The graphic will be shown so its bounding box is this height. You can +The graphic will be shown so its bounding box is this height. You can use the standard &tex; dimensions (see Units of length), and also convenient are \pageheight and \textheight (see Page -layout parameters). For instance, +layout parameters). For instance, the command \includegraphics[height=0.25\textheight]{godel} will make the -graphic be a quarter of the height of the text area. +graphic a quarter of the height of the text area. totalheight -The graphic will be shown so its bounding box has this height plus +The graphic will be shown so its bounding box has this height plus depth. This differs from the height if the graphic was rotated. For instance, if it has been rotated by -90 then it will have zero height but a large depth. keepaspectratio -If set to true, or just specified as with -\includegraphics[...,keepaspectratio,...]{...} and you give as -options both width and height (or totalheight), -then &latex; will make the graphic is as large as possible without -distortion. That is, &latex; will ensure that neither is the graphic -wider than width nor taller than height (or +If set to true, or just specified as here + +\includegraphics[...,keepaspectratio,...]{...} + +and you give as options both width and height (or +totalheight), then &latex; will make the graphic is as large as +possible without distortion. That is, &latex; will ensure that neither +is the graphic wider than width nor taller than height (or totalheight). scale -Factor by which to scale the graphic. Specifying -\includegraphics[scale=2.0]{...} makes the graphic twice its -nominal size. This number may be any value; a number between 1 -and 0 will shrink the graphic and a negative number will reflect -it. +Factor by which to scale the graphic. To make a graphic twice its +nominal size, enter \includegraphics[scale=2.0]{...}. This +number may be any value; a number between 1 and 0 will shrink the +graphic and a negative number will reflect it. angle -Rotate the picture. The angle is taken in degrees and counterclockwise. +Rotate the graphic. The angle is taken in degrees and counterclockwise. The graphic is rotated about its origin; see that option. For a complete description of how rotated material is typeset, see \rotatebox. @@ -10293,9 +13841,9 @@ see \rotatebox. The point of the graphic about which the rotation happens. Possible values are any string containing one or two of: l for left, r for right, b for bottom, c for center, t -for top, and B for baseline. Thus, +for top, and B for baseline. Thus, entering the command \includegraphics[angle=180,origin=c]{moon} will turn the -picture upside down from the center, while +picture upside down about that picture’s center, while the command \includegraphics[angle=180,origin=lB]{LeBateau} will turn its picture upside down about its left baseline. (The character c gives the horizontal center in bc or tc, but gives the @@ -10306,7 +13854,7 @@ vertical center in lc or rc.) The default These are lesser-used options. -viewport +viewport Pick out a subregion of the graphic to show. Takes four arguments, separated by spaces and given in &tex; dimensions, as with \includegraphics[.., viewport=0in 0in 1in 0.618in]{...}. The @@ -10314,7 +13862,7 @@ dimensions default to big points, bp. They are taken relative to the origin specified by the bounding box. See also the trim option. -trim +trim Gives parts of the graphic to not show. Takes four arguments, separated by spaces, that are given in &tex; dimensions, as with \includegraphics[.., trim= 0in 0.1in 0.2in 0.3in, ...]{...}. @@ -10323,18 +13871,20 @@ will crop the picture by 0 inches on the left, 0.1 inches on the bottom, 0.2 inches on the right, and 0.3 inches on the top. See also the viewport option. -clip -If set to true, or just specified as with -\includegraphics[...,clip,...]{...}, then the graphic is -cropped to the bounding box. You can get this effect by instead using -the starred form of the command, as +clip +If set to true, or just specified as here + +\includegraphics[...,clip,...]{...} + +then the graphic is cropped to the bounding box. This is the same as +using the starred form of the command, \includegraphics*[...]{...}. -page +page Give the page number of a multi-page PDF file. The default is page=1. -pagebox +pagebox Specifies which bounding box to use for PDF files from among mediabox, cropbox, bleedbox, trimbox, or artbox. PDF files do not have the BoundingBox that PostScript @@ -10348,22 +13898,25 @@ content. The driver will set the image size based on CropBox if present, otherwise it will not use one of the others, with a driver-defined order of preference. MediaBox is always present. -interpolate +interpolate Enable or disable interpolation of raster images by the viewer. Can be -set with interpolate=true or just specified as with -\includegraphics[...,interpolate,...]{...}. +set with interpolate=true or just specified as here. -quiet +\includegraphics[...,interpolate,...]{...} + +quiet Do not write information to the log. You can set it with quiet=true or just specified it with \includegraphics[...,quite,...]{...}, -draft -If you set it with draft=true or just specified it with -\includegraphics[...,draft,...]{...}, then the graphic will not -appear in the document, possibly saving color printer ink. Instead, -&latex; will put an empty box of the correct size with the filename -printed in it. +draft +If you set it with draft=true or just specify it with + +\includegraphics[...,draft,...]{...} + +then the graphic will not appear in the document, possibly saving color +printer ink. Instead, &latex; will put an empty box of the correct +size with the filename printed in it. These options address the bounding box for Encapsulated PostScript @@ -10376,7 +13929,7 @@ For example, if an .eps file has the line %%Boundi 20 40 80 then its natural size is 30/72 inch wide by 60/72 inch tall. -bb +bb Specify the bounding box of the displayed region. The argument is four dimensions separated by spaces, as with \includegraphics[.., bb= 0in 0in 1in 0.618in]{...}. Usually \includegraphics reads the @@ -10384,23 +13937,27 @@ BoundingBox numbers from the EPS file automatically, so this option is only useful if the bounding box is missing from that file or if you want to change it. -bbllx, bblly, bburx, bbury +bbllx, bblly, bburx, bbury Set the bounding box. These four are obsolete, but are retained for compatibility with old packages. -natwidth, natheight +natwidth, natheight An alternative for bb. Setting -\includegraphics[...,natwidth=1in,natheight=0.618in,...]{...} -is the same as setting bb=0 0 1in 0.618in. + +\includegraphics[...,natwidth=1in,natheight=0.618in,...]{...} + +is the same as setting bb=0 0 1in 0.618in. -hiresbb +hiresbb If set to true, or just specified as with -\includegraphics[...,hiresbb,...]{...}, then &latex; will look -for %%HiResBoundingBox lines instead of %%BoundingBox -lines. (The BoundingBox lines use only natural numbers while the -HiResBoundingBox lines use decimals; both use units equivalent to -&tex;’s big points, 1/72 inch.) To override a prior setting of -true, you can set it to false. + +\includegraphics[...,hiresbb,...]{...} + +then &latex; will look for %%HiResBoundingBox lines instead of +%%BoundingBox lines. (The BoundingBox lines use only +natural numbers while the HiResBoundingBox lines use decimals; +both use units equivalent to &tex;’s big points, 1/72 inch.) To +override a prior setting of true, you can set it to false. These following options allow a user to override &latex;’s method of @@ -10409,21 +13966,22 @@ is that \includegraphics[type=png,ext=.xxx,read=.xxx]{lion} will read the file lion.xxx as though it were lion.png. For more on these, see \DeclareGraphicsRule. -type +type Specify the graphics type. -ext +ext Specify the graphics extension. Only use this in conjunction with the option type. -read +read Specify the file extension of the read file. Only use this in conjunction with the option type. -command -Specify a command to be applied to this file. -Only use this in conjunction with the option type. - +command +Specify a command to be applied to this file. Only use this in +conjunction with the option type. See Command line options +for a discussion of enabling the \write18 functionality to run +external commands. @@ -10445,7 +14003,8 @@ Only use this in conjunction with the option type. \rotatebox{angle}{material} \rotatebox[key-value list]{angle}{material} -Put material in a box and rotate it angle degrees counterclockwise. +Put material in a box and rotate it angle degrees +counterclockwise. This example rotates the table column heads forty five degrees. @@ -10477,15 +14036,18 @@ except for the x and y options (see origin The point of the material’s box about which the rotation happens. -Possible values are any string containing one or two of: l for +Possible value is any string containing one or two of: l for left, r for right, b for bottom, c for center, -t for top, and B for baseline. Thus, -\includegraphics[angle=180,origin=c]{moon} will turn the -picture upside down from the center, while -\includegraphics[angle=180,origin=lB]{LeBateau} will turn its -picture upside down about its left baseline. (The character c -gives the horizontal center in bc or tc but gives the -vertical center in lc or rc.) The default is lB. +t for top, and B for baseline. Thus, the first line here + +\includegraphics[angle=180,origin=c]{moon} +\includegraphics[angle=180,origin=lB]{LeBateau} + +will turn the picture upside down from the center while the second will +turn its picture upside down about its left baseline. (The character +c gives the horizontal center in bc or tc but gives +the vertical center in lc or rc.) The default is +lB. x, y Specify an arbitrary point of rotation with @@ -10529,10 +14091,12 @@ first text and doubles the size of the second. If you do not specify the optional vertical factor then it defaults to the same value as the horizontal factor. -You can use this command to resize a graphic, as with -\scalebox{0.5}{\includegraphics{lion}}. If you use the -graphicx package then you can accomplish the same thing with -optional arguments to \includegraphics +You can use this command to resize a graphic, as here. + +\scalebox{0.5}{\includegraphics{lion}} + +If you use the graphicx package then you can accomplish the same +thing with optional arguments to \includegraphics (see \includegraphics). The \reflectbox command abbreviates @@ -10601,8 +14165,8 @@ special meaning do not correspond to simple characters you can type. characters, reserved special characters characters, special -&latex; sets aside the following characters for special purposes (for -example, the percent sign % is for comments) so they are +&latex; sets aside the following characters for special purposes. For +example, the percent sign % is for comments. They are called reserved characters or special characters. # $ % & { } _ ~ ^ \ @@ -10617,7 +14181,7 @@ called reserved characters or special characte If you want a reserved character to be printed as itself, in the text body font, for all but the final three characters in that list simply put a backslash \ in front of the character. Thus, -\$1.23 will produce $1.23 in your output. +typing \$1.23 will produce $1.23 in your output. \~ \^ @@ -10625,28 +14189,26 @@ put a backslash \ in front of the character. Thus, As to the last three characters, to get a tilde in the text body font use \~{} (omitting the curly braces would result in the next character receiving a tilde accent). Similarly, to get a get a text -body font circumflex use \^{}. A text body font backslash -results from \textbackslash{}. +body font circumflex use \^{}. To get a backslash in the font +of the text body, enter \textbackslash{}. To produce the reserved characters in a typewriter font use -\verb!!, as below. +\verb!! as below (the double backslash \\ is only +there to split the lines). \begin{center} \# \$ \% \& \{ \} \_ \~{} \^{} \textbackslash \\ \verb!# $ % & { } _ ~ ^ \! \end{center} -In that example the double backslash \\ is only there to -split the lines. - Upper and lower case -Upper case -Lower case -characters, case +uppercase +lowercase +characters, case of Synopsis: @@ -10726,22 +14288,23 @@ example could also be written as \symbol{'40} or symbols, text textcomp package -&latex; provides commands to generate a number of non-letter symbols -in running text. Some of these, especially the more obscure ones, are -not available in OT1; you may need to load the textcomp package. +&latex; provides commands to generate a number of non-letter symbols in +running text. Some of these, especially the more obscure ones, are not +available in OT1. Unless you are using Xe&latex; or Lua&latex; then +you may need to load the textcomp package. \copyright\copyright \textcopyright\textcopyright copyright symbol -The copyright symbol, ©. +© The copyright symbol. \dag\dag dagger, in text -The dagger symbol (in text). +† The dagger symbol (in text). \ddag\ddag double dagger, in text -The double dagger symbol (in text). +‡ The double dagger symbol (in text). \LaTeX\LaTeX &latex; logo @@ -10765,50 +14328,50 @@ not available in OT1; you may need to load the textcomp packa single angle quotation marks French quotation marks quotation marks, French -Double and single angle quotation marks, commonly used in French: -«, », ‹, ›. +«, », ‹, › +Double and single angle quotation marks, commonly used in French. \ldots\ldots \dots\dots \textellipsis\textellipsis ellipsis -An ellipsis (three dots at the baseline): ‘…’. \ldots +… An ellipsis (three dots at the baseline): \ldots and \dots also work in math mode. \lq\lq left quote opening quote -Left (opening) quote: ‘. +‘ Left (opening) quote. \P\P \textparagraph\textparagraph paragraph symbol pilcrow -Paragraph sign (pilcrow): ¶. +¶ Paragraph sign (pilcrow). \pounds\pounds \textsterling\textsterling pounds symbol sterling symbol -English pounds sterling: £. +£ English pounds sterling. \quotedblbase („)\quotedblbase („) \quotesinglbase (‚)\quotesinglbase (‚) double low-9 quotation mark single low-9 quotation mark low-9 quotation marks, single and double -Double and single quotation marks on the baseline: -„ and ‚. +„ and ‚ +Double and single quotation marks on the baseline. \rq\rq right quote closing quote -Right (closing) quote: ’. +’ Right (closing) quote. \S\S -\itemx \textsection -section symbol -Section sign: §. +\textsection\textsection +section symbol +§ Section sign. \TeX\TeX &tex; logo @@ -10818,55 +14381,55 @@ Section sign: §. \textasciicircum\textasciicircum circumflex, ASCII, in text ASCII circumflex, in text -ASCII circumflex: ^. +^ ASCII circumflex. \textasciitilde\textasciitilde tilde, ASCII, in text ASCII tilde, in text -ASCII tilde: ~. +~ ASCII tilde. \textasteriskcentered\textasteriskcentered asterisk, centered, in text centered asterisk, in text -Centered asterisk: *. +* Centered asterisk. \textbackslash\textbackslash backslash, in text -Backslash: \. +\ Backslash. \textbar\textbar vertical bar, in text bar, vertical, in text -Vertical bar: |. +| Vertical bar. \textbardbl\textbardbl vertical bar, double, in text bar, double vertical, in text double vertical bar, in text -Double vertical bar. +⏸ Double vertical bar. \textbigcircle\textbigcircle big circle symbols, in text circle symbol, big, in text -Big circle symbol. +◯ Big circle symbol. \textbraceleft\textbraceleft left brace, in text brace, left, in text -Left brace: {. +{ Left brace. \textbraceright\textbraceright right brace, in text brace, right, in text -Right brace: }. +} Right brace. \textbullet\textbullet bullet, in text -Bullet: •. +• Bullet. \textcircled{letter}\textcircled{letter} circled letter, in text -letter in a circle, as in ®. +Ⓐ Circle around letter. \textcompwordmark\textcompwordmark \textcapitalcompwordmark\textcapitalcompwordmark @@ -10874,53 +14437,62 @@ Section sign: §. composite word mark, in text cap height ascender height -Composite word mark (invisible). The \textcapital... form -has the cap height of the font, while the \textascender... form -has the ascender height. +Used to separate letters that would normally ligature. For example, +f\textcompwordmark i produces ‘fi’ without a ligature. This +is most useful in non-English languages. The +\textcapitalcompwordmark form has the cap height of the font +while the \textascendercompwordmark form has the ascender height. \textdagger\textdagger dagger, in text -Dagger: \dag. +† Dagger. \textdaggerdbl\textdaggerdbl dagger, double, in text double dagger, in text -Double dagger: \ddag. +‡ Double dagger. \textdollar (or \$)\textdollar (or \$) dollar sign currency, dollar -Dollar sign: $. +$ Dollar sign. \textemdash (or ---)\textemdash (or ---) em-dash -Em-dash: — (for punctuation). +— Em-dash (used for punctuation, as in +The playoffs --- if you are fortunate enough to make the playoffs --- +is more like a sprint.). \textendash (or --)\textendash (or --) e-dash -En-dash: – (for ranges). +– En-dash (used for ranges, as in See pages 12--14). \texteuro\texteuro euro symbol currency, euro -The Euro symbol: €. +package, eurosym +eurosym package + +The Euro symbol: €. For an alternative glyph design, try the +eurosym package; also, most fonts nowadays come with their own +Euro symbol (Unicode U+20AC). \textexclamdown (or !`)\textexclamdown (or !`) exclamation point, upside-down -Upside down exclamation point: ¡. +¡ Upside down exclamation point. \textgreater\textgreater greater than symbol, in text -Greater than: >. +> Greater than symbol. \textless\textless less than symbol, in text -Less than: <. +< Less than symbol. \textleftarrow\textleftarrow arrow, left, in text left arrow, in text -Left arrow. +← Left arrow. \textordfeminine\textordfeminine \textordmasculine\textordmasculine @@ -10928,42 +14500,42 @@ has the ascender height. masculine ordinal symbol ordinals, feminine and masculine Spanish ordinals, feminine and masculine -Feminine and masculine ordinal symbols: ª, º. +ª, º Feminine and masculine ordinal symbols. \textperiodcentered\textperiodcentered period, centered, in text centered period, in text -Centered period: ·. +· Centered period. \textquestiondown (or ?`)\textquestiondown (or ?`) question mark, upside-down -Upside down question mark: ¿. +¿ Upside down question mark. \textquotedblleft (or ``)\textquotedblleft (or ``) left quote, double double left quote -Double left quote: “. +“ Double left quote. \textquotedblright (or '')\textquotedblright (or '') right quote, double double right quote -Double right quote: ”. +” Double right quote. \textquoteleft (or `)\textquoteleft (or `) left quote, single single left quote -Single left quote: ‘. +‘ Single left quote. \textquoteright (or ')\textquoteright (or ') right quote, single single right quote -Single right quote: ’. +’ Single right quote. \textquotesingle\textquotesingle quote, single straight straight single quote single quote, straight -Straight single quote. (From TS1 encoding.) +' Straight single quote. (From TS1 encoding.) \textquotestraightbase\textquotestraightbase \textquotestraightdblbase\textquotestraightdblbase @@ -10971,38 +14543,40 @@ has the ascender height. straight quote, base double quote, straight base straight double quote, base + Single and double straight quotes on the baseline. \textregistered\textregistered registered symbol -Registered symbol: ®. +® Registered symbol. \textrightarrow\textrightarrow arrow, right, in text right arrow, in text -Right arrow. +→ Right arrow. \textthreequartersemdash\textthreequartersemdash three-quarters em-dash em-dash, three-quarters -“Three-quarters” em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash. +﹘ “Three-quarters” em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash. \texttrademark\texttrademark trademark symbol -Trademark symbol: ™. +™ Trademark symbol. + \texttwelveudash\texttwelveudash two-thirds em-dash em-dash, two-thirds -“Two-thirds” em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash. +﹘ “Two-thirds” em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash. \textunderscore\textunderscore underscore, in text -Underscore: _. +_ Underscore. \textvisiblespace\textvisiblespace visible space symbol, in text -Visible space symbol. +␣ Visible space symbol. @@ -11017,14 +14591,31 @@ has the ascender height. package, babel babel package +package, polyglossia +polyglossia package + multilingual support -&latex; has wide support for many of the world’s scripts and -languages, through the babel package and related support. This -section does not attempt to cover all that support. It merely lists -the core &latex; commands for creating accented characters. - -The \capital... commands produce alternative forms for use with -capital letters. These are not available with OT1. +&latex; has wide support for many of the world’s scripts and languages, +through the babel package and related support if you are using +pdf&latex;, or polyglossia if you are using Xe&latex; or +Lua&latex;. This section does not cover that support. It only lists +the core &latex; commands for creating accented characters. The +\capital... commands shown here produce alternative forms for use +with capital letters. These are not available with OT1. + +Below, to make them easier to find, the accents are all illustrated with +lowercase ‘o’. + +\i (dotless i) +dotless i +Note that \i produces a dotless i, + +\j (dotless j) +dotless j +and \j produces a dotless j. + +These are often used in place of their dotted counterparts when they are +accented. \" \capitaldieresis @@ -11032,22 +14623,20 @@ capital letters. These are not available with OT1. \capitaldieresis umlaut accent dieresis accent -Produces an umlaut (dieresis), as in ö. +ö Umlaut (dieresis). \' \capitalacute \' (acute accent) \capitalacute acute accent -Produces an acute accent, as in ó. In the tabbing -environment, pushes current column to the right of the previous column -(see tabbing). +ó Acute accent. \. \. (dot-over accent) dot accent dot-over accent -Produces a dot accent over the following, as in ȯ. +ȯ Dot accent. \= \capitalmacron @@ -11056,7 +14645,7 @@ environment, pushes current column to the right of the previous column macron accent overbar accent bar-over accent -Produces a macron (overbar) accent over the following, as in ō. +ō Macron (overbar) accent. \^ \capitalcircumflex @@ -11064,75 +14653,69 @@ environment, pushes current column to the right of the previous column \capitalcircumflex circumflex accent hat accent -Produces a circumflex (hat) accent over the following, as in ô. +ô Circumflex (hat) accent. \` \capitalgrave \` (grave accent) \capitalgrave grave accent -Produces a grave accent over the following, as in ò. In the -tabbing environment, move following text to the right margin -(see tabbing). +ò Grave accent. \~ \capitaltilde \~ (tilde accent) \capitaltilde tilde accent -Produces a tilde accent over the following, as in ñ. +ñ Tilde accent. \b \b (bar-under accent) bar-under accent -Produces a bar accent under the following, as in o_. See -also \underbar hereinafter. +o_ Bar accent underneath. + +\underbar +underbar +Related to this, \underbar{text} produces a bar under +text. The argument is always processed in LR mode +(see Modes). The bar is always a fixed position under the baseline, +thus crossing through descenders. See also \underline in +Math miscellany. \c \capitalcedilla \c (cedilla accent) \capitalcedilla cedilla accent -Produces a cedilla accent under the following, as in ç. +ç Cedilla accent underneath. \d \capitaldotaccent \d (dot-under accent) \capitaldotaccent dot-under accent -Produces a dot accent under the following, as in ọ. +ọ Dot accent underneath. \H \capitalhungarumlaut \H (Hungarian umlaut accent) \capitalhungarumlaut hungarian umlaut accent -Produces a long Hungarian umlaut accent over the following, as in ő. - -\i -\i (dotless i) -dotless i -Produces a dotless i, as in ‘i’. - -\j -\j (dotless j) -dotless j -Produces a dotless j, as in ‘j’. +ő Long Hungarian umlaut accent. \k \capitalogonek \k (ogonek) \capitalogonek ogonek -Produces a letter with ogonek, as in ‘ǫ’. Not available in -the OT1 encoding. +ǫ Ogonek. Not available in the OT1 encoding. \r \capitalring \r (ring accent) \capitalring ring accent -Produces a ring accent, as in ‘o*’. +o* Ring accent. \t \capitaltie @@ -11143,24 +14726,15 @@ the OT1 encoding. \newtie \capitalnewtie tie-after accent -Produces a tie-after accent, as in ‘oo[’. The -\newtie form is centered in its box. +oo[ Tie-after accent. The \newtie form is centered in +its box. \u \capitalbreve \u (breve accent) \capitalbreve breve accent -Produces a breve accent, as in ‘ŏ’. - -\underbar -\underbar -underbar -Not exactly an accent, this produces a bar under the argument text. -The argument is always processed in horizontal mode. The bar is -always a fixed position under the baseline, thus crossing through -descenders. See also \underline in Math miscellany. -See also \b above. +ŏ Breve accent. \v \capitalcaron @@ -11169,7 +14743,7 @@ See also \b above. hacek accent check accent caron accent -Produces a háček (check, caron) accent, as in ‘ǒ’. +ǒ Háček (check, caron) accent. @@ -11184,8 +14758,8 @@ See also \b above. non-English characters characters, non-English -Here are the basic &latex; commands for inserting letters (beyond -A–Z) extending the Latin alphabet, used primarily in languages other +Here are the basic &latex; commands for inserting letters beyond +A–Z that extend the Latin alphabet, used primarily in languages other than English. \aa @@ -11280,22 +14854,43 @@ font encoding, such as T1. \rule -Synopsis: +Synopsis, one of: -\rule[raise]{width}{thickness} +\rule{width}{thickness} +\rule[raise]{width}{thickness} -The \rule command produces rules, that is, lines or -rectangles. The arguments are: +Produce a rule, a filled-in rectangle. -raise -How high to raise the rule (optional). +Halmos symbol +tombstone +This produces a rectangular blob, sometimes called a Halmos symbol, +often used to mark the end of a proof. -width -The length of the rule (mandatory). +\newcommand{\qedsymbol}{\rule{0.4em}{2ex}} + +package, amsthm +amsthm package + +The amsthm package includes this command, with a somewhat +different-looking symbol. + +The mandatory arguments give the horizontal width and vertical +thickness of the rectangle. They are rigid lengths +(see Lengths). The optional argument raise is also a rigid +length, and tells &latex; how much to raise the rule above the +baseline, or lower it if the length is negative. + +This produces a line, a rectangle that is wide but not tall. + +\noindent\rule{\textwidth}{0.4pt} + +The line is the width of the page and 0.4 points tall. This line +thickness is common in &latex;. + +A rule that has zero width, or zero thickness, will not show up in the +output, but can cause &latex; to change the output around it. +See \strut for examples. -thickness -The thickness of the rule (mandatory). - @@ -11303,16 +14898,25 @@ rectangles. The arguments are: \today date, today’s +today’s date -The \today command produces today’s date, in the format -‘month dd, yyyy’; for example, ‘July 4, 1976’. -It uses the predefined counters \day, \month, and -\year (see \day \month \year) to do this. It is not -updated as the program runs. +Synopsis: -Multilingual packages like babel or classes like lettre, -among others, will localize \today. For example, the following -will output ‘4 juillet 1976’: +\today + +Produce today’s date in the format ‘month dd, +yyyy’. An example of a date in that format is ‘July 4, +1976’. + +package, babel +babel package + +package, polyglossia +polyglossia package + +Multilingual packages such as babel or polyglossia, or +classes such as lettre, will localize \today. For example, +the following will output ‘4 juillet 1976’: \year=1976 \month=7 \day=4 \documentclass{minimal} @@ -11321,11 +14925,17 @@ will output ‘4 juillet 1976’: \today \end{document} +\today uses the counters \day, \month, and +\year (see \day & \month & \year). + package, datetime datetime package -The datetime package, among others, can produce a wide variety -of other date formats. +A number of package on CTAN work with dates. One is datetime package +which can produce a wide variety of date formats, including ISO standards. + +The date is not updated as the &latex; process runs, so in principle the +date could be incorrect by the time the program finishes. @@ -11336,276 +14946,1097 @@ of other date formats. splitting the input file input file -A large document requires a lot of input. Rather than putting the whole -input in a single large file, it’s more efficient to split it into -several smaller ones. Regardless of how many separate files you use, -there is one that is the +&latex; lets you split a large document into several smaller ones. +This can simplify editing or allow multiple authors to work on the +document. It can also speed processing. + +Regardless of how many separate files you use, there is always one root file file, root -root file; it is the one whose name you type -when you run &latex;. +root file, on which &latex; compilation starts. This shows such +a file with five included files. + +\documentclass{book} +\includeonly{ % comment out lines below to omit compiling + pref, + chap1, + chap2, + append, + bib + } +\begin{document} +\frontmatter +\include{pref} +\mainmatter +\include{chap1} +\include{chap2} +\appendix +\include{append} +\backmatter +\include{bib} +\end{document} + +This will bring in material from pref.tex, chap1.tex, +chap2.tex, append.tex, and bib.tex. If you compile +this file, and then comment out all of the lines inside +\includeonly{...} except for chap1, and compile again, +then &latex; will only process the material in the first chapter. +Thus, your output will appear more quickly and be shorter to print. +However, the advantage of the \includeonly command is that +&latex; will retain the page numbers and all of the cross reference +information from the other parts of the document so these will appear in +your output correctly. + +See Larger book template for another example of \includeonly. + + + + + +<literal>\endinput</literal> + +\endinput + +Synopsis: + +\endinput + +When you \include{filename}, inside filename.tex the +material after \endinput will not be included. This command is +optional; if filename.tex has no \endinput then &latex; +will read all of the file. + +For example, suppose that a document’s root file has +\input{chap1} and this is chap1.tex. + +\chapter{One} +This material will appear in the document. +\endinput +This will not appear. + +This can be useful for putting documentation or comments at the end of a +file, or for avoiding junk characters that can be added during mailing. +It is also useful for debugging: one strategy to localize errors is to +put \endinput halfway through the included file and see if the +error disappears. Now, knowing which half contains the error, moving +\endinput to halfway through that area further narrows down the +location. This process rapidly finds the offending line. + +After reading \endinput, &latex; continues to read to the end of +the line, so something can follow this command and be read nonetheless. +This allows you, for instance, to close an \if... with a +\fi. + + + + +<literal>\include</literal> & <literal>\includeonly</literal> + +\include +\includeonly + +Synopsis: + +\includeonly{ % in document preamble + ... + filename, + ... + } + ... +\include{filename} % in document body + +Bring material from the external file filename.tex into a +&latex; document. + +The \include command does three things: it executes +\clearpage (see \clearpage & \cleardoublepage), then it +inputs the material from filename.tex into the document, +and then it does another \clearpage. This command can only +appear in the document body. The \includeonly command controls +which files will be read by &latex; under subsequent \include +commands. Its list of filenames is comma-separated, and it can only +appear in the preamble. + +This example root document, constitution.tex, brings in +three files, preamble.tex, articles.tex, and +amendments.tex. + +\documentclass{book} +\includeonly{ + preamble, + articles, + amendments + } +\begin{document} +\include{preamble} +\include{articles} +\include{amendments} +\end{document} + +The file preamble.tex contains no special code; you have just +excerpted the chapter from consitution.tex and put it in a +separate file just for editing convenience. + +\chapter{Preamble} +We the People of the United States, +in Order to form a more perfect Union, ... + +Running &latex; on constitution.tex makes the material from the +three files appear in the document but also generates the auxiliary +files preamble.aux, articles.aux, and +amendments.tex. These contain information such as page numbers +and cross-references (see Cross references). If you now comment out +\includeonly’s lines with preamble and amendments +and run &latex; again then the resulting document shows only the +material from articles.tex, not the material from +preamble.tex or amendments.tex. Nonetheless, all of the +auxiliary information from the omitted files is still there, including +the starting page number of the chapter. + +If the document preamble does not have \includeonly then +&latex; will include all the files you call for with \include +commands. + +The \include command makes a new page. To avoid that, see +\input (which, however, does not retain the auxiliary +information). + +See Larger book template for another example using \include +and \includeonly. That example also uses \input for some +material that will not necessarily start on a new page. + +File names can involve paths. + +\documentclass{book} +\includeonly{ + chapters/chap1, + } +\begin{document} +\include{chapters/chap1} +\end{document} + +To make your document portable across distributions and platforms you +should avoid spaces in the file names. The tradition is to instead use +dashes or underscores. Nevertheless, for the name ‘amo amas amat’, +this works under &tex; Live on GNU/Linux: + +\documentclass{book} +\includeonly{ + "amo\space amas\space amat" + } +\begin{document} +\include{"amo\space amas\space amat"} +\end{document} + +and this works under MiK&tex; on Windows: + +\documentclass{book} +\includeonly{ + {"amo amas amat"} + } +\begin{document} +\include{{"amo amas amat"}} +\end{document} + +nested \include, not allowed +You cannot use \include inside a file that is being included or +you get ‘LaTeX Error: \include cannot be nested.’ The +\include command cannot appear in the document preamble; you will +get ‘LaTeX Error: Missing \begin{document}’. + +If a file that you \include does not exist, for instance if you +\include{athiesm} but you meant \include{atheism}, +then &latex; does not give you an error but will warn you ‘No file +athiesm.tex.’ (It will also create athiesm.aux.) + +If you \include the root file in itself then you first get +‘LaTeX Error: Can be used only in preamble.’ Later runs get +‘TeX capacity exceeded, sorry [text input levels=15]’. To fix +this, you must remove the inclusion \include{root} but also +delete the file root.aux and rerun &latex;. + + + + +<literal>\input</literal> + +\input + +Synopsis: + +\input{filename} + +&latex; processes the file as if its contents were inserted in the +current file. For a more sophisticated inclusion mechanism see +\include & \includeonly. + +If filename does not end in ‘.tex’ then &latex; first tries +the filename with that extension; this is the usual case. If +filename ends with ‘.tex’ then &latex; looks for the +filename as it is. + +For example, this + +\input{macros} + +will cause &latex; to first look for macros.tex. If it finds +that file then it processes its contents as thought they had been +copy-pasted in. If there is no file of the name macros.tex then +&latex; tries the name macros, without an extension. (This may +vary by distribution.) + +To make your document portable across distributions and platforms you +should avoid spaces in the file names. The tradition is to instead use +dashes or underscores. Nevertheless, for the name ‘amo amas amat’, +this works under &tex; Live on GNU/Linux: + +\input{"amo\space amas\space amat"} + +and this works under MiK&tex; on Windows: + +\input{{"amo amas amat"}} + + + + + +Front/back matter + + + + +Table of contents etc. + +table of contents, creating + +\tableofcontents +.toc file +\listoffigures +\listoftables +.lof file +.lot file + +Synopsis, one of: + +\tableofcontents +\listoffigures +\listoftables + +Produce a table of contents, or list of figures, or list of tables. Put +the command in the input file where you want the table or list to +go. You do not type the entries; for example, typically the table of +contents entries are automatically generated from the sectioning +commands \chapter, etc. + +This example illustrates the first command, \tableofcontents. +&latex; will produce a table of contents on the book’s first page. + +\documentclass{book} +% \setcounter{tocdepth}{1} +\begin{document} +\tableofcontents\newpage + ... +\chapter{...} + ... +\section{...} + ... +\subsection{...} + ... +\end{document} + +Uncommenting the second line would cause that table to contain chapter +and section listings but not subsection listings, because the +\section command has level 1. See Sectioning for level +numbers of the sectioning units. For more on the tocdepth +see Sectioning/tocdepth. + +Another example of the use of \tableofcontents is in Larger +book template. + +If you want a page break after the table of contents, write a +\newpage command after the \tableofcontents command, as +above. + +To make the table of contents &latex; stores the information in an +auxiliary file named root-file.toc (see Splitting the +input). For example, this &latex; file test.tex + +\documentclass{article} +\begin{document} +\tableofcontents\newpage +\section{First section} +\subsection{First subsection} + ... + +writes the following line to test.toc. + +\contentsline {section}{\numberline {1}First section}{2} +\contentsline {subsection}{\numberline {1.1}First subsection}{2} + +The section or subsection is the sectioning unit. The +hook \numberline lets you to change how the information appears +in the table of contents. Of its two arguments, 1 or 1.1 +is the sectioning unit number and First section or First +subsection is the title. Finally, 2 is the page number on which +the sectioning units start. + +One consequence of this auxiliary file storage strategy is that to get the +contents page correct you must run &latex; twice, once to store the +information and once to get it. In particular, the first time that you +run &latex; on a new document, the table of contents page will be empty +except for its ‘Contents’ header. Just run it again. + +The commands \listoffigures and \listoftables produce a +list of figures and a list of tables. They work the same way as the +contents commands; for instance, these work with information stored in +.lof and .lot files. + +package, babel +babel package + +package, polyglossia +polyglossia package + +To change the header for the table of contents page do something like +the first line here. + +\renewcommand{\contentsname}{Table of contents} +\renewcommand{\listfigurename}{Plots} +\renewcommand{\listtablename}{Tables} + +Similarly, the other two lines will do the other two. +Internationalization packages such as babel or polyglossia +will change the headers depending on the chosen base language. + +package, tocloft +tocloft package + +package, tocbibbind +tocbibbind package + +CTAN has many packages for the table of contents and lists of figures +and tables. One convenient one for adjusting some aspects of the +default, such as spacing, is tocloft. And, tocbibbind +will automatically add the bibliography, index, etc. to the table of +contents. + + + + +<literal>\addcontentsline</literal> + +\addcontentsline +table of contents entry, manually adding + +Synopsis: + +\addcontentsline{ext}{unit}{text} + +\contentsline +Add an entry to the file specified by ext. Usually ext is +one of toc for the table of contents, lof for the list of +figures, or lot for the list of tables. + +The following will result in an ‘Appendices’ line in the table of +contents. + +\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\protect\textbf{Appendices}} + +It will appear at the same indentation level as the sections, will be in +boldface, and will be assigned the page number associated with the point +where it appears in the input file. + +The \addcontentsline command writes information to the file +root-name.ext. It writes that information as the +text of the command +\contentsline{unit}{text}{num}, where +num is the current value of counter unit. The +most common case is the table of contents and there num is the +page number of the first page of unit. + +This command is invoked by the sectioning commands \chapter, +etc., and also by \caption inside a float environment. But it is +also used by authors. For example, in a book to have the preface +unnumbered, you may use the starred \chapter*. But that does not +put in table of contents information, so you can enter it manually, as +here. + +\chapter*{Preface} +\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\protect\numberline{}Preface} + +In the .toc file &latex; will put the line \contentsline +{chapter}{\numberline {}Preface}{3}; note the page number +‘3’. + + + +All of the arguments for \addcontentsline are required. + +ext +Typically one of the strings toc for the table of contents, +lof for the list of figures, or lot for the list of +tables. The filename extension of the information file. + +unit +A string that depends on the value of the ext argument: + +toc +For the table of contents, this is the name of a sectional unit: +part, chapter, section, subsection, etc. + +lof +For the list of figures: figure. + +lot +For the list of tables: table. + +text +The text of the entry. You must \protect any commands that are +fragile (see \protect). + +The \addcontentsline command has an interaction with +\include (see \include & \includeonly). If you use them at +the same level, as with +\addcontentsline{...}{...}{...}\include{...} then lines +in the table of contents can come out in the wrong order. The solution +is to move \addcontentsline into the file being included. + +If you use a unit that &latex; does not recognize, as here + +\addcontentsline{toc}{setcion}{\protect\textbf{Appendices}} + +then you don’t get an error but the formatting in the table of contents +will not make sense. + + + + +<literal>\addtocontents</literal> + +\addtocontents{ext}{text} + +Synopsis: + +\addtocontents{ext}{text} + +Add text, which may be text or formatting commands, directly to +the auxiliary file with extension ext. This is most commonly used +for the table of contents so that is the discussion here, but this also +applies to the list of figures and list of tables. + +This will put some vertical space in the table of contents after the +‘Contents’ header. + +\tableofcontents\newpage +\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\vspace*{3ex}} + +The \addtocontents command has two arguments. Both are +required. + +ext +Typically one of: toc for the table of contents, lof for +the list of figures, or lot for the list of tables. The +extension of the file holding the information. + +text +The text, and possibly commands, to be written. + +The sectioning commands such as \chapter use the +\addcontentsline command to store information. This command +creates lines in the .toc auxiliary file containing the +\contentsline command (see \addcontentsline). In contrast, +the command \addtocontents puts material directly in that file. + +The \addtocontents command has an interaction with +\include (see \include & \includeonly). If you use them at +the same level, as with +\addtocontents{...}{...}\include{...} then lines in the +table of contents can come out in the wrong order. The solution is to +move \addtocontents into the file being included. + + + + +<literal>\nofiles</literal> + +\nofiles + +Synopsis: + +\nofiles + +Prevent &latex; from writing any auxiliary files. The only output will +be the .log and .pdf (or .dvi) files. This command +must go in the preamble. + +Because of the \nofiles command this example will not produce a +.toc file. + +\documentclass{book} +\nofiles +\begin{document} +\tableofcontents\newpage +\chapter{...} + ... + +&latex; will not erase any existing auxiliary files, so if you insert +the \nofiles command after you have run the file and gotten +a .toc then the table of contents page will continue to show +the old information. + + + + + +Indexes + +indexes + +\makeindex +\index +.idx file + +This document has an index. + +\documentclass{article} +\usepackage{makeidx} \makeindex + ... +\begin{document} + ... +Recall Wilson's Theorem: \index{Wilson's Theorem} +a number \( n>1 \) is prime if and only if the factorial of \( n-1 \) +is congruent to \( -1 \) modulo~\( n \). + ... +\printindex + ... + +The \usepackage{makeidx} and \makeindex in the preamble +bring in the relevant commands. + +Producing an index is a three stage process. First, in the document +body you declare index entries with the \index command +(see \index). When you run &latex;, the \index writes its +information to an auxiliary file root-name.idx. Next, to +alphabetize and to do other manipulations you run an external command, +typically makeindex or xindy (see makeindex). +These output a file root-name.ind. Finally, you bring the +information back into your document and typeset it with the +\printindex command (see \printindex). + +package, showidx +showidx package + +package, multind +multind package + +There are many packages that apply to indexing commands. The +showidx package causes each index entries to be shown in the +margin on the page where the entry appears. This can help in preparing +the index. The multind package supports multiple indexes. See +also the &tex; FAQ entry on this topic, +http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=multind. + + + + +<literal>\index</literal> + +index entry +\index + +Synopsis: + +\index{index-entry-string} + +Declare an entry in the index. This command is fragile +(see \protect). + +For example, as described in Indexes, one way to get an index from +what’s below is to compile the document with pdflatex test, then +process the index entries with makeindex test, and then compile +again with pdflatex test. + +W~Ackermann (1896--1962).\index{Ackermann} + ... +Ackermann function\index{Ackermann!function} + ... +rate of growth\index{Ackermann!function!growth rate} + +All three index entries will get a page number, such as ‘Ackermann, +22’. &latex; will format the second as a subitem of the first, on the +line below it and indented, and the third as a subitem of the second. +Three levels deep is as far as you can nest subentries. (If you add +\index{Ackermann!function!growth rate!comparison} then +makeindex says ‘Scanning input file test.idx....done (4 +entries accepted, 1 rejected)’ and nothing appears in the index). + +If you enter a second \index with the same +index-entry-string then you will get a single index entry with two +page numbers (unless they happen to fall on the same page). Thus, +adding as for Ackermann.\index{Ackermann} later in the same +document as above will give an index entry like ‘Ackermann, 22, +151’. Also, you can enter the index entries in any order, so for +instance \index{Ackermann!function} could come before +\index{Ackermann}. + +index, page range +Get a page range in the output, like ‘Hilbert, 23--27’, as here. + +W~Ackermann (1896--1962).\index{Ackermann} + ... +D~Hilbert (1862--1943)\index{Ackermann!Hilbert\(} + ... +disapproved of his marriage.\index{Ackermann!Hilbert\)} + +If the beginning and ending of the page range are equal then the system +just gives a single page entry, not a range. + +If you index subentries but not a main entry, as with +\index{Jones!program} and \index{Jones!results}, then +the output is the item ‘Jones’ with no comma or page number, +followed by two subitems, like ‘program, 50’ and ‘results, +51’. + +‘see’ and ‘see also’ index entries +index entries, ‘see’ and ‘see also’ +\seename +\alsoname +package, babel +babel package +package, polyglossia +polyglossia package + + +Generate a index entry that says ‘See’ by using a vertical bar +character: \index{Ackermann!function|see{P\'eter's +function}}. You can instead get ‘See also’ with seealso. +(The text ‘See’ is defined by \seename, and ‘See also’ +by \alsoname. You can redefine these either by using an +internationalization package such as babel or polyglossia, +or directly as with \renewcommand{\alsoname}[1]{Also see +#1}.) + +The ‘See’ feature is part of a more general functionality. After +the vertical bar you can put the name of a one-input command, as in +\index{group|textit} (note the missing backslash on the +\textit command) and the system will apply that command to the +page number, here giving something like \textit{7}. You can +define your own one-input commands, such as +\newcommand{\definedpage}[1]{{\color{blue}#1}} and then +\index{Ackermann!function|definedpage} will give a blue page +number (see Color). Another, less practical, example is this, + + +\newcommand\indexownpage[1]{#1, \thepage} + ... Epimenides.\index{self-reference|indexownpage} + +which creates an entry citing the page number of its own index listing. + +The two functions just described combine, as here + +\index{Ackermann!function|(definedpage} + ... +\index{Ackermann!function|)} + +which outputs an index entry like ‘function, 23--27’ where the page +number range is in blue. + +Consider an index entry such as ‘α-ring’. Entering +it as $\alpha$-ring will cause it to be alphabetized according to +the dollar sign. You can instead enter it using an at-sign, as +\index{alpha-ring@$\alpha$-ring}. If you specify an entry +with an at-sign separating two strings, pos@text, +then pos gives the alphabetical position of the entry while +text produces the text of the entry. Another example is that +\index{Saint Michael's College@SMC} produces an index entry +‘SMC’ alphabetized into a different location than its spelling +would naturally give it. + +To put a !, or @, or | character in an index +entry, preceding it with a double quote, ". (The double quote +gets deleted before alphabetization.) + +package, index +index package + +A number of packages on CTAN have additional functionality beyond that +provided by makeidx. One is index, which allows for +multiple indices and contains a command +\index*{index-entry-string} that prints the +index-entry-string as well as indexing it. + +\indexentry +idx file +The \index command writes the indexing information to the file +root-name.idx file. Specifically, it writes text of the +command +\indexentry{index-entry-string}{page-num}, where +where page-num is the value of the \thepage counter. On +occasion, when the \printindex command is confused, you have to +delete this file to start with a fresh slate. -See filecontents, for an environment that allows bundling an -external file to be created with the main document. +If you omit the closing brace of an \index command then you get a +message like this. +Runaway argument? {Ackermann!function +! Paragraph ended before \@wrindex was complete. + + + +<command>makeindex</command> - -<literal>\include</literal> - -\include +index, processing +makeindex +makeindex program +.ind file +.idx file -Synopsis: - -\include{file} - -If no \includeonly command is present, the \include -command executes \clearpage to start a new page -(see \clearpage), then reads file, then does another -\clearpage. +Synopsis, one of: -Given an \includeonly command, the \include actions are -only run if file is listed as an argument to -\includeonly. See \includeonly. +makeindex filename +makeindex -s style-file filename +makeindex options filename0 ... + +Sort, and otherwise process, the index information in the auxiliary file +filename. This is a command line program. It takes one or more +raw index files, filename.idx files, and produces the +actual index file, the filename.ind file that is input by +\printindex (see \printindex). + +.isty file +index, style file +makeindex, style file +The first form of the command suffices for many uses. The second allows +you to format the index by using an index style file, a +.isty file. The third form is the most general; see the full +documentation on CTAN. + +This is a simple .isty file. + +% book.isty +% $ makeindex -s book.isty -p odd book.idx +% creates the index as book.ind, starting on an odd page. +preamble +"\\pagestyle{empty} +\\small +\\begin{theindex} +\\thispagestyle{empty}" + +postamble +"\n +\\end{theindex}" + +The description here covers only some of the index formatting +possibilities in style-file. For a full list see the documentation +on CTAN. + +A style file consists of a list of pairs: specifier and +attribute. These can appear in the file in any order. All of the +attributes are strings, except where noted. Strings are +surrounded with double quotes, ", and the maximum length of a +string is 144 characters. The \n is for a newline and \t +is for a tab. Backslashes are escaped with another backslash, +\\. If a line begins with a percent sign, %, then it is a +comment. + +preamblepreamble +Preamble of the output file. Defines the context in which the index is +formatted. Default: "\\begin{theindex}\n". + +postamblepostamble +Postamble of the output file. Default: "\n\n\\end{theindex}\n". + +group_skipgroup_skip +\indexspace +Traditionally index items are broken into groups, typically a group for +entries starting with ‘a’, etc. This specifier gives what is +inserted when a new group begins. Default: "\n\n \\indexspace\n" +(\indexspace is a rubber length with default value 10pt +plus5pt minus3pt). + +lethead_flaglethead_flag +An integer. It governs what is inserted for a new group or letter. If +it is 0 (which is the default) then other than group_skip nothing +will be inserted before the group. If it is is positive then at a new +letter the lethead_prefix and lethead_suffix will be +inserted, with that letter in uppercase between them. If it is negative +then what will be inserted is the letter in lowercase. The default +is 0. + +lethead_prefixlethead_prefix +If a new group begins with a different letter then this is the prefix +inserted before the new letter header. Default: "" + +lethead_suffixlethead_suffix +If a group begins with a different letter then this is the suffix +inserted after the new letter header. Default: "". + +item_0item_0 +What is put between two level 0 items. Default: "\n \\item +". + +item_1item_1 +Put between two level 1 items. Default: "\n \\subitem ". + +item_2item_2 +put between two level 2 items. Default: "\n \\subsubitem ". + +item_01item_01 +What is put between a level 0 item and a level 1 item. +Default: "\n \\subitem ". + +item_x1item_x1 +What is put between a level 0 item and a level 1 item in the +case that the level 0 item doesn’t have any page numbers (as in +\index{aaa|see{bbb}}). Default: "\n \\subitem ". + +item_12item_12 +What is put between a level 1 item and a level 2 item. +Default: "\n \\subsubitem ". + +item_x2item_x2 +What is put between a level 1 item and a level 2 item, if the +level 1 item doesn’t have page numbers. Default: "\n +\\subsubitem ". + +delim_0delim_0 +Delimiter put between a level 0 key and its first page +number. Default: a comma followed by a blank, ", ". + +delim_1delim_1 +Delimiter put between a level 1 key and its first page +number. Default: a comma followed by a blank, ", ". + +delim_2delim_2 +Delimiter between a level 2 key and its first page number. Default: +a comma followed by a blank, ", ". + +delim_ndelim_n +Delimiter between two page numbers for the same key (at any +level). Default: a comma followed by a blank, ", ". + +delim_rdelim_r +What is put between the starting and ending page numbers of a range. +Default: "--". + +line_maxline_max +An integer. Maximum length of an index entry’s line in the output, +beyond which the line wraps. Default: 72. + +indent_spaceindent_space +What is inserted at the start of a wrapped line. Default: +"\t\t". + +indent_lengthindent_length +A number. The length of the wrapped line indentation. The default +indent_space is two tabs and each tab is eight spaces so the +default here is 16. + +page_precedencepage_precedence +A document may have pages numbered in different ways. For example, a +book may have front matter pages numbered in lowercase roman while main +matter pages are in arabic. This string specifies the order in which +they will appear in the index. The makeindex command supports +five different types of numerals: lowercase roman r, and numeric +or arabic n, and lowercase alphabetic a, and uppercase +roman R, and uppercase alphabetic A. Default: +"rnaRA". -nested \include, not allowed -The \include command may not appear in the preamble or in a file -read by another \include command. + +xindy +xindy program +There are a number of other programs that do the job makeindex +does. One is xindy, which does internationalization and can +process indexes for documents marked up using &latex; and a number of +other languages. It is is highly configurable, both in markup terms and +in terms of the collating order of the text. See the documentation on +CTAN. - - -<literal>\includeonly</literal> + + +<command>\printindex</command> -\includeonly +index, printing +\printindex Synopsis: -\includeonly{file1,file2,...} +\printindex -The \includeonly command controls which files will be read by -subsequent \include commands. The list of filenames is -comma-separated. Each element file1, file2, … must -exactly match a filename specified in a \include command for the -selection to be effective. +\printindex +Place the index into the output. -This command can only appear in the preamble. +To get an index you must first include +\usepackage{makeidx}\makeindex in the document preamble and +compile the document, then run the system command makeindex, +and then compile the document again. See Indexes for further +discussion and an example of the use of \printindex. + - -<literal>\input</literal> + +Glossaries -\input +glossary +glossaries +acronyms, list of +\makeglossary +\printglossaries Synopsis: -\input{file} +\usepackage{glossaries} \makeglossaries + ... +\newglossaryentry{label}{settings} + ... +\gls{label}. + ... +\printglossaries + +The glossaries package allows you to make glossaries, including +multiple glossaries, as well as lists of acronyms. + +To get the output from this example, compile the document (for instance +with pdflatex filename), then run the command line command +makeglossaries filename, and then compile the document again. + +\documentclass{...} +\usepackage{glossaries} \makeglossaries +\newglossaryentry{tm}{% + name={Turing machine}, + description={A model of a machine that computes. The model is simple + but can compute anything any existing device can compute. + It is the standard model used in Computer Science.}, + } +\begin{document} +Everything begins with the definition of a \gls{tm}. + ... +\printglossaries +\end{document} -The \input command causes the specified file to be read -and processed, as if its contents had been inserted in the current -file at that point. +That gives two things. In the main text it outputs ‘... definition +of a Turing machine’. In addition, in a separate sectional unit headed +‘Glossary’ there appears a description list. In boldface it says +‘Turing machine’ and the rest of the item says in normal type +‘A model of a machine … Computer Science’. -If file does not end in ‘.tex’ (e.g., ‘foo’ or -‘foo.bar’), it is first tried with that extension (‘foo.tex’ -or ‘foo.bar.tex’). If that is not found, the original file -is tried (‘foo’ or ‘foo.bar’). - - - - - -Front/back matter - - - - -Tables of contents - -table of contents, creating - -\tableofcontents -.toc file -A table of contents is produced with the \tableofcontents -command. You put the command right where you want the table of -contents to go; &latex; does the rest for you. A previous run must -have generated a .toc file. - -The \tableofcontents command produces a heading, but it does -not automatically start a new page. If you want a new page after the -table of contents, write a \newpage command after the -\tableofcontents command. - -\listoffigures -\listoftables -.lof file -.lot file -The analogous commands \listoffigures and \listoftables -produce a list of figures and a list of tables (from .lof and -.lot files), respectively. Everything works exactly the same -as for the table of contents. +\makeglossary +\printglossaries +.glo file +The command \makeglossary opens the file that will contain the +entry information, root-file.glo. Put the +\printglossaries command where you want the glossaries to appear +in your document. -\nofiles -The command \nofiles overrides these commands, and -prevents any of these lists from being generated. +The glossaries package is very powerful. For instance, besides +the commands \newglossaryentry and \gls, there are similar +commands for a list of acronyms. See the package documentations on +CTAN. - -<literal>\addcontentsline</literal> + +<literal>\newglossaryentry</literal> -\addcontentsline -table of contents entry, manually adding +glossary, entries +\newglossaryentry -Synopsis: +Synopsis, one of: -\addcontentsline{ext}{unit}{text} +\newglossaryentry{label} +{ + name={name}, + description={description}, + other options, ... +} -The \addcontentsline command adds an entry to the specified list -or table where: +or -ext -The filename extension of the file on which information is to be written, -typically one of: toc (table of contents), lof (list of -figures), or lot (list of tables). +\longnewglossaryentry{label} +{ + name={name}, + other options ..., +} +{description} + +Declare a new entry for a glossary. The label must be unique for +the document. The settings associated with the label are pairs: +key=value. -unit -The name of the sectional unit being added, typically one of the -following, matching the value of the ext argument: +This puts the blackboard bold symbol for the real numbers ℝ in the +glossary. -toc -The name of the sectional unit: part, chapter, -section, subsection, subsubsection. -lof -For the list of figures: figure. -lot -For the list of tables: table. - -text -The text of the entry. - -\contentsline -What is written to the .ext file is the command -\contentsline{unit}{text}{num}, where -num is the current value of counter unit. +\newglossaryentry{R} +{ + name={\ensuremath{\mathbb{R}}}, + description={the real numbers}, +} + +Use the second command form if the description spans more than one +paragraph. - - - - - -<literal>\addtocontents</literal> - -\addtocontents{ext}{text} - -The \addtocontents{ext}{text} command adds text -(or formatting commands) directly to the .ext file that -generates the table of contents or lists of figures or tables. +For a full list of keys see the package documentation on CTAN but +here are a few. -ext -The extension of the file on which information is to be written, -typically one of: toc (table of contents), lof (list of -figures), or lot (list of tables). +namename +(Required.) The word, phrase, or symbol that you are defining. -text -The text to be written. - - - - - -Glossaries - -glossaries - -\makeglossary -The command \makeglossary enables creating glossaries. +descriptiondescription +(Required.) The description that will appear in the glossary. +If this has more than one paragraph then you must use the second command +form given in the synopsis. -\glossary -.glo file -The command \glossary{text} writes a glossary entry for -text to an auxiliary file with the .glo extension. +pluralplural +The plural form of name. Refer to the plural form using +\glspl or \Glspl (see \gls). -\glossaryentry -Specifically, what gets written is the command -\glossaryentry{text}{pageno}, where -pageno is the current \thepage value. +sortsort +How to place this entry in the list of entries that the glossary holds. -glossary package -The glossary package on CTAN provides support for fancier -glossaries. +symbolsymbol +A symbol, such as a mathematical symbol, besides the name. + - - -Indexes + + +<literal>\gls</literal> -indexes +glossary, entry reference +\gls -\makeindex -The command \makeindex enables creating indexes. Put this in -the preamble. - -\index -.idx file -The command \index{text} writes an index entry for -text to an auxiliary file named with the .idx extension. - -\indexentry -Specifically, what gets written is the command -\indexentry{text}{pageno}, where pageno -is the current \thepage value. - -‘see’ and ‘see also’ index entries -index entries, ‘see’ and ‘see also’ -To generate a index entry for ‘bar’ that says ‘See foo’, use a -vertical bar: \index{bar|see{foo}}. Use seealso -instead of see to make a ‘See also’ entry. +Synopsis, one of: -\seename -\alsoname -The text ‘See’ is defined by the macro \seename, and ‘See also’ -by the macro \alsoname. These can be redefined for other -languages. - -makeindex program -xindy program -.ind file -The generated .idx file is then sorted with an external -command, usually either makeindex -(http://mirror.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex) or (the -multi-lingual) xindy (http://xindy.sourceforge.net). -This results in a .ind file, which can then be read to typeset -the index. - -\printindex -package, makeidx -makeidx package - -The index is usually generated with the \printindex command. -This is defined in the makeidx package, so -\usepackage{makeidx} needs to be in the preamble. +\gls{label} +\glspl{label} +\Gls{label} +\Glspl{label} + +Refer to a glossary entry. The entries are declared with +\newglossaryentry (see \newglossaryentry). -\indexspace -The rubber length \indexspace is inserted before each new -letter in the printed index; its default value is ‘10pt plus5pt -minus3pt’. +This -package, showidx -showidx package - -The showidx package causes each index entries to be shown in -the margin on the page where the entry appears. This can help in -preparing the index. +\newglossaryentry{N}{% + name={the natural numbers}, + description={The numbers $0$, $1$, $2$, $\ldots$\@}, + symbol={\ensuremath{\mathbb{N}}}, + } + ... +Consider \gls{N}. + +gives the output ‘Consider the natural numbers’. -package, multind -multind package - -The multind package supports multiple indexes. See also the -&tex; FAQ entry on this topic, -http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=multind. +The second command form \glspl{label} produces the plural +of name (by default it tries adding an ‘s’). The third form +capitalizes the first letter of name, as does the fourth form, +which also takes the plural. + @@ -11617,7 +16048,7 @@ preparing the index. Synopsis: \documentclass{letter} -\address{sender address} +\address{senders address} % return address \signature{sender name} \begin{document} \begin{letter}{recipient address} @@ -11625,18 +16056,17 @@ preparing the index. letter body \closing{closing text} \end{letter} -... more letters ... + ... \end{document} Produce one or more letters. Each letter is in a separate letter environment, whose argument recipient address often contains multiple lines separated with a -double backslash (\\). For example, you might have: +double backslash, (\\). For example, you might have: - \begin{letter}{Mr. Joe Smith \\ - 2345 Princess St. \\ - Edinburgh, EH1 1AA} + \begin{letter}{Ninon de l'Enclos \\ + l'h\^otel Sagonne} ... \end{letter} @@ -11649,15 +16079,15 @@ preamble. As with the recipient address, often sender address\\). &latex; will put the sender name under the closing, after a vertical space for the traditional -hand-written signature; it also can contain multiple lines. +hand-written signature. -Each letter environment body begins with a required \opening command -such as \opening{Dear Madam or Sir:}. The letter body -text is ordinary &latex; so it can contain everything from -enumerated lists to displayed math, except that commands such as -\chapter that make no sense in a letter are turned off. Each -letter environment body typically ends with a \closing -command such as \closing{Yours,}. +Each letter environment body begins with a required +\opening command such as \opening{Dear Madam or Sir:}. +The letter body text is ordinary &latex; so it can contain +everything from enumerated lists to displayed math, except that commands +such as \chapter that make no sense in a letter are turned off. +Each letter environment body typically ends with a +\closing command such as \closing{Yours,}. \\ for letters Additional material may come after the \closing. You can say who @@ -11665,13 +16095,13 @@ is receiving a copy of the letter with a command like \cc{the Boss \\ the Boss's Boss}. There’s a similar \encl command for a list of enclosures. And, you can add a postscript with \ps. -&latex;’s default is to indent the signature and the \closing -above it by a length of \longindentation. By default this is +&latex;’s default is to indent the sender name and the closing above it +by a length of \longindentation. By default this is 0.5\textwidth. To make them flush left, put \setlength{\longindentation}{0em} in your preamble. To set a fixed date use something like -\renewcommand{\today}{2015-Oct-12}. If put in your preamble +\renewcommand{\today}{1958-Oct-12}. If put in your preamble then it will apply to all the letters. This example shows only one letter environment. The three lines @@ -11704,19 +16134,18 @@ I am not interested in entering a business arrangement with you. \address{senders address} -Specifies the return address as it appears on the letter and on the +Specify the return address, as it appears on the letter and on the envelope. Separate multiple lines in senders address with a -double backslash \\. +double backslash, \\. Because it can apply to multiple letters this declaration is often put in the preamble. However, it can go anywhere, including inside an individual letter environment. -This command is optional: without the \address declaration the -letter is formatted with some blank space on top, for copying onto -pre-printed letterhead paper. (See Overview, for details on your -local implementation.) With the \address declaration, it is -formatted as a personal letter. +This command is optional: if you do not use it then the letter is +formatted with some blank space on top, for copying onto pre-printed +letterhead paper. If you do use the \address declaration then it +is formatted as a personal letter. Here is an example. @@ -11733,13 +16162,13 @@ formatted as a personal letter. Synopsis: -\cc{first name \\ +\cc{name0 \\ ... } Produce a list of names to which copies of the letter were sent. This command is optional. If it appears then typically it comes after -\closing. Separate multiple lines with a double -backslash \\, as in: +\closing. Put the names on different lines by separating them +with a double backslash, \\, as in: \cc{President \\ Vice President} @@ -11757,8 +16186,8 @@ backslash \\, as in: \closing{text} -Usually at the end of a letter, above the handwritten signature, there -is a \closing (although this command is optional). For example, +Produce the letter’s closing. This is optional, but usual. It appears +at the end of a letter, above a handwritten signature. For example: \closing{Regards,} @@ -11777,10 +16206,10 @@ is a \closing (although this command is optional). For examp Produce a list of things included with the letter. This command is optional; when it is used, it typically is put after \closing. -Separate multiple lines with a double backslash \\. +Separate multiple lines with a double backslash, \\. \encl{License \\ - Passport } + Passport} @@ -11793,7 +16222,7 @@ Separate multiple lines with a double backslash \\. \location{text} -The text appears centered at the bottom of the each page. It only +The text appears centered at the bottom of the page. It only appears if the page style is firstpage. @@ -11805,25 +16234,62 @@ appears if the page style is firstpage. Synopsis: -\makelabels +\makelabels % in preamble -Create a sheet of address labels from the recipient addresses, one for -each letter. This sheet will be output before the letters, with the idea -that you can copy it to a sheet of peel-off labels. This command goes -in the preamble. +Optional, for a document that contains letter environments. If +you just put \makelabels in the preamble then at the end of the +document you will get a sheet with labels for all the recipients, one +for each letter environment, that you can copy to a sheet of peel-off +address labels. Customize the labels by redefining the commands \startlabels, -\mlabel, and \returnaddress in the preamble. The command -\startlabels sets the width, height, number of columns, etc., of -the page onto which the labels are printed. The command -\mlabel{sender address}{recipient address} -produces the two labels (or one, if you choose to ignore the sender -address). The sender address is the value returned by the macro -\returnaddress while recipient address is the value passed -in the argument to the letter environment. By default -\mlabel ignores the first argument, the sender address. +\mlabel, and \returnaddress (and perhaps \name) in +the preamble. The command \startlabels sets the width, height, +number of columns, etc., of the page onto which the labels are printed. +The command \mlabel{return address}{recipient +address} produces the two labels (or one, if you choose to ignore the +return address) for each letter environment. The first argument, +return address, is the value returned by the macro +\returnaddress. The second argument, recipient address, is +the value passed in the argument to the letter environment. By +default \mlabel ignores the first argument, the return +address, causing the default behavior described in the prior paragraph. + +This illustrates customization. Its output includes a page with two +columns having two labels each. + +\documentclass{letter} +\renewcommand*{\returnaddress}{Fred McGuilicuddy \\ + Oshkosh, Mineola 12305} +\newcommand*\originalMlabel{} +\let\originalMlabel\mlabel +\def\mlabel#1#2{\originalMlabel{}{#1}\originalMlabel{}{#2}} +\makelabels + ... +\begin{document} +\begin{letter}{A Einstein \\ + 112 Mercer Street \\ + Princeton, New Jersey, USA 08540} + ... +\end{letter} +\begin{letter}{K G\"odel \\ + 145 Linden Lane \\ + Princeton, New Jersey, USA 08540} + ... +\end{letter} +\end{document} + +The first column contains the return address twice. The second column +contains the address for each recipient. + +package, envlab +envlab package + +The package envlab makes formatting the labels easier, with +standard sizes already provided. The preamble lines +\usepackage[personalenvelope]{envlab} and \makelabels +are all that you need to print envelopes. - @@ -11835,8 +16301,8 @@ in the argument to the letter environment. By default \name{name} -Sender’s name, used for printing on the envelope together with the -return address. +Optional. Sender’s name, used for printing on the envelope together +with the return address. @@ -11848,11 +16314,10 @@ return address. Synopsis: -\opening{text} +\opening{salutation} -This command is required. It starts a letter, following the -\begin{letter}{...}. The mandatory argument text is the -text that starts your letter. For instance: +Required. Follows the \begin{letter}{...}. The argument +salutation is mandatory. For instance: \opening{Dear John:} @@ -11887,26 +16352,31 @@ text that starts your letter. For instance: The sender’s name. This command is optional, although its inclusion is usual. -The argument text appears at the end of the letter, after the closing -and after a vertical space for the traditional hand-written +The argument text appears at the end of the letter, after the closing. +&latex; leaves some vertical space for a handwritten signature. Separate multiple lines with a double -backslash \\. For example: +backslash, \\. For example: \signature{J Fred Muggs \\ White House} &latex;’s default for the vertical space from the \closing text down to the \signature text is 6\medskipamount, which is -six times 0.7em. +six times \medskipamount (where \medskipamount is equal to +a \parskip, which in turn is defined by default here to +0.7em). This command is usually in the preamble, to apply to all the letters in the document. To have it apply to one letter only, put it inside a letter environment and before the \closing. -You can include a graphic in the signature, for instance with -\signature{\vspace{-6\medskipamount}\includegraphics{sig.png}\\ -My name} (this requires writing \usepackage{graphicx} in the -preamble). +You can include a graphic in the signature as here. + +\signature{\vspace{-6\medskipamount}\includegraphics{sig.png}\\ + My name} + +For this you must put \usepackage{graphicx} in the preamble +(see Graphics). @@ -11954,26 +16424,56 @@ page. -<literal>\typein[<replaceable>cmd</replaceable>]{<replaceable>msg</replaceable>}</literal> +<literal>\typein</literal> \typein -Synopsis: +Synopsis, one of: + +\typein{prompt-msg} +\typein[cmd]{prompt-msg} + +Print prompt-msg on the terminal and cause &latex; to stop and +wait for you to type a line of input. This line of input ends when you +hit the return key. + +For example, this + +As long as I live I shall never forget \typein{Enter student name:} + +coupled with this command line interaction + +Enter student name: + +\@typein=Aphra Behn + +gives the output ‘... never forget Aphra Behn’. + +The first command version, \typein{prompt-msg}, causes +the input you typed to be processed as if it had been included in the +input file in place of the \typein command. + +In the second command version the optional argument cmd +argument must be a command name — it must begin with a backslash, \. +This command name is then defined or redefined to be the input that you +typed. For example, this -\typein[\cmd]{msg} +\typein[\student]{Enter student name:} +\typeout{Recommendation for \student .} -\typein prints msg on the terminal and causes &latex; to -stop and wait for you to type a line of input, ending with return. If -the optional \cmd argument is omitted, the typed input is -processed as if it had been included in the input file in place of the -\typein command. If the \cmd argument is present, it -must be a command name. This command name is then defined or -redefined to be the typed input. +gives this output on the command line, + +Enter student name: + +\student=John Dee +Recommendation for John Dee. + +where the user has entered ‘John Dee. -<literal>\typeout{<replaceable>msg</replaceable>}</literal> +<literal>\typeout</literal> \typeout @@ -11981,16 +16481,31 @@ redefined to be the typed input. \typeout{msg} -Prints msg on the terminal and in the log file. -Commands in msg that are defined with \newcommand or +Print msg on the terminal and in the log file. + +This + +\newcommand{\student}{John Dee} +\typeout{Recommendation for \student .} + +outputs ‘Recommendation for John Dee’. Like what happens here with +\student, commands that are defined with \newcommand or \renewcommand (among others) are replaced by their definitions before being printed. &latex;’s usual rules for treating multiple spaces as a single space -and ignoring spaces after a command name apply to msg. A -\space command in msg causes a single space to be -printed, independent of surrounding spaces. A ^^J in -msg prints a newline. +and ignoring spaces after a command name apply to msg. As above, +use the command \space to get a single space, independent of +surrounding spaces. Use ^^J to get a newline. Get a percent +character with \csname @percentchar\endcsname. + +This command can be useful for simple debugging, as here: + +\newlength{\jhlength} +\setlength{\jhlength}{5pt} +\typeout{The length is \the\jhlength.} + +produces on the command line ‘The length is 5.0pt’. @@ -12000,31 +16515,257 @@ printed, independent of surrounding spaces. A ^^J in command line -.tex, default extension -The input file specification indicates the file to be formatted; -&tex; uses .tex as a default file extension. If you omit the -input file entirely, &tex; accepts input from the terminal. You can -also specify arbitrary &latex; input by starting with a backslash. -For example, this processes foo.tex without pausing after every -error: +Synopsis (from a terminal command line): + +pdflatex options argument + +Run &latex; on argument. In place of pdflatex you can +also use xelatex, or lualatex, or dviluatex, or +latex. -latex '\nonstopmode\input foo.tex' +For example, this will run &latex; on the file thesis.tex, +creating the output thesis.pdf. + +pdflatex thesis +.tex, default extension +Note that .tex is the default file extension. + +pdf&tex; is a development of the original &tex; program, as are +Xe&tex; and Lua&tex; (see &tex; engines). They are completely +backward compatible. But the original program had a custom output +format, DVI, while the newer ones can output directly to PDF. This +allows them to take advantage of the extra features in PDF such as +hyperlinks, support for modern image formats such as JPG and PNG, and +ubiquitous viewing programs. In short, if you run pdflatex or +xelatex or lualatex then you will by default get PDF +and have access to all its modern features. If you run latex, +or dvilualatex, then you will get DVI. The description here +assumes pdf&latex;. + +See Command line options, for a selection of the most useful +command line options. As to argument, the usual case is that it +does not begin with a backslash, so the system takes it to be the name +of a file and it compiles that file. If argument begins with a +backslash then the system will interpret it as a line of &latex; +input, which can be used for special effects (see Command line +input). + +If you gave no arguments or options then pdflatex prompts for +input from the terminal. You can escape from this by entering +<control>-D. + +If &latex; finds an error in your document then by default it stops and +asks you about it. See Recovering from errors for an outline of what +to do. + + + + +Command line options + +options, command line + +These are the command-line options relevant to ordinary document +authoring. For a full list, try running ‘latex --help’ from the +command line. + +With many implementations you can specify command line options by +prefixing them with ‘-’ or ‘--’. This is the case for +both &tex; Live (and Mac&tex;) and MiK&tex;. We will use both +conventions interchangeably. + +--version command-line option +-version +Show the current version, like ‘pdfTeX 3.14159265-2.6-1.40.16 (TeX +Live 2015/Debian)’ along with a small amount of additional information, +and exit. + --help command-line option -With many, but not all, implementations, command-line options can also -be specified in the usual Unix way, starting with ‘-’ or -‘--’. For a list of those options, try ‘latex --help’. +-help +Give a brief usage message that is useful as a prompt and exit. + +--interaction command-line option +-interaction=mode +&tex; compiles a document in one of four interaction modes: +batchmode, nonstopmode, scrollmode, +errorstopmode. In errorstop mode (the default), &tex; +stops at each error and asks for user intervention. In batch +mode it prints nothing on the terminal, errors are scrolled as if the +user hit <return> at every error, and missing files cause the +job to abort. In nonstop mode, diagnostic message appear on the +terminal but as in batch mode there is no user interaction. In +scroll mode, &tex; only stops for missing files or keyboard +input. + +For instance, starting &latex; with this command line + +pdflatex -interaction=batchmode filename + +eliminates most terminal output. + +--jobname command-line option +-jobname=string +Set the value of &tex;’s jobname to the string. The log file +and output file will then be named string.log and +string.pdf. + +When you run pdflatex options argument, if +argument does not start with a backslash then &tex; considers it +the name of a file to input. Otherwise it waits for the first +\input instruction and the name of the input file will be the job +name. This is used to name the log file the output file. This option +overrides that process and directly specifies the name. See Command +line input for an example of its use. + +--output-directory command-line option +-output-directory=directory +Write files in the directory directory. It must already exist. + +--shell-escape command-line option +--no-shell-escape command-line option +--enable-write18 command-line option +--disable-write18 command-line option +shell-escape +no-shell-escape +enable-write18 +disable-write18 +Enable or disable \write18{shell command}. The first two +options are for with &tex; Live or Mac&tex; while the second two are +for MiK&tex;. + +package, sagetex +sagetex package + +Sometimes you want to run external system commands from inside a +&latex; file. For instance the package sagetex allows you to +have the mathematics software system Sage do calculations or draw +graphs and then incorporate that output in your document. For this +&tex; provides the \write18 command. + +But with this functionality enabled, security issues could happen if you +compiled a &latex; file from the Internet. By default \write18 +is disabled. (More precisely, by default &tex; Live, Mac&tex;, and +MiK&tex; only allow the execution of a limited number of &tex;-related +programs, which they distribute.) + +If you invoke &latex; with the option no-shell-escape, and in +your document you call \write18{ls -l}, then you do not get an +error but the log file says ‘runsystem(ls -l)...disabled’. + +--halt-on-error command-line option +-halt-on-error +Stop processing at the first error. + +--file-line-error command-line option +--no-file-line-error command-line option +-file-line-error +-no-file-line-error +Enable or disable filename:lineno:error-style +error messages. These are only available with &tex; Live or Mac&tex;. + + + + +Command line input + +input, on command line + +As part of the command line invocation pdflatex options +argument you can specify arbitrary &latex; input by starting +argument with a backslash. This allows you to do some special +effects. + +package, hyperref +hyperref package + +For example, this file (which uses the hyperref package for +hyperlinks) can produce two kinds of output, one for paper and one for a +PDF. + +\ifdefined\paperversion % in preamble +\newcommand{\urlcolor}{black} +\else +\newcommand{\urlcolor}{blue} +\fi +\usepackage[colorlinks=true,urlcolor=\urlcolor]{hyperref} + ... +\href{https://www.ctan.org}{CTAN} % in body + ... + +Compiling this document book.tex with the command line +pdflatex test will give the ‘CTAN’ link in blue. But +compiling it with pdflatex "\def\paperversion{}\input test.tex" +has the link in black. (Note the use of double quotes to prevent +interpretation of the symbols by the command line shell; your system may +do this differently.) + +In a similar way, from the single file main.tex you can compile +two different versions. + + +pdflatex -jobname=students "\def\student{}\input{main}" +pdflatex -jobname=teachers "\def\teachers{}\input{main}" + +The jobname option is there because otherwise both files would be +called main.pdf and the second would overwrite the first. + +A final example. This loads the package graphicx with the option +draft + + +pdflatex -jobname=aa "\RequirePackage[draft]{graphicx}\input{aa.tex}" + +so the graphic files are read for their size information but not +incorporated into the PDF. (The jobname option is needed because +otherwise the output file would be graphicx.pdf, as +\RequirePackage does an \input of its own.) + + + + +Recovering from errors + +If &latex; finds an error in your document then it gives you an error +message and prompts you with a question mark, ?. For instance, +running &latex; on this file + +\newcommand{\NP}{\ensuremath{\textbf{NP}}} +The \PN{} problem is a million dollar one. + +causes it show this, and wait for input. + +! Undefined control sequence. +l.5 The \PN + {} problem is a million dollar one. +? + +The simplest thing is to enter ‘x’ and <return> and fix the +typo. You could instead enter ‘?’ and <return> to see other +options. *’ prompt prompt, ‘* \stop -If &latex; stops in the middle of the document and gives you a -‘*’ prompt, it is waiting for input. You can type \stop -(and return) and it will prematurely end the document. +There are two other error scenarios. The first is that you forgot to +include the \end{document} or misspelled it. In this case +&latex; gives you a ‘*’ prompt. You can get back to the command +line by typing \stop and <return>. + +The last scenario is that you mistyped the file name. For instance, +instead of pdflatex test you might type pdflatex tste. -See &tex; engines, for other system commands invoking &latex;. +! I can't find file `tste'. +<*> tste + +(Press Enter to retry, or Control-D to exit) +Please type another input file name: + +The simplest thing is to enter <Contol> and ‘d’ (holding +them down at the same time), and just fix the command line. + Document templates @@ -12074,11 +16815,38 @@ array of features, but here is a basic template: - + +<literal>article</literal> template + +template, article + +\documentclass{article} +\title{Article Class Template} +\author{Alex Author} + +\begin{document} +\maketitle + +\section{First section} +Some text. + +\subsection{First section, first subsection} +Additional text. + +\section{Second section} +Some more text. +\end{document} + + + + <literal>book</literal> template template, book +This is a straightforward template for a book. See See Larger book +template for a more elaborate one. + \documentclass{book} \title{Book Class Template} \author{Alex Author} @@ -12098,7 +16866,62 @@ The end. - + +Larger <literal>book</literal> template + +template, book + +This is a more elaborate template for a book. It has +\frontmatter, \mainmatter, and \backmatter to +control the typography of the three main areas of a book +(see \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter). The book has a +bibliography and an index. + +Notable is that it uses \include and \includeonly +(see Splitting the input). While you are working on a chapter you +can comment out all the other chapter entries from the argument to +\includeonly. That will speed up compilation without losing any +information such as cross-references. (Material that does not need to +come on a new page is brought in with \input instead of +\include. You don’t get the cross-reference benefit this way.) + +\documentclass[titlepage]{book} +\usepackage{makeidx}\makeindex + +\title{Book Class Template} +\author{Alex Author} + +\includeonly{% + frontcover, + preface, + chap1, + ... + } +\begin{document} +\frontmatter +\include{frontcover} + % maybe comment out while drafting: +\maketitle \input{dedication} \input{copyright} +\tableofcontents +\include{preface} +\mainmatter +\include{chap1} +... +\appendix +\include{appena} +... +\backmatter +\bibliographystyle{apalike} +\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Bibliography} +\bibliography +\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Index} +\printindex +\include{backcover} +\end{document} + + + + <literal>tugboat</literal> template template, TUGboat @@ -12191,17 +17014,12 @@ Email \verb|tugboat@tug.org| if problems or questions. - -Concept Index + +Index + + - - - -Command Index - - -
    diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.html b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.html index 149b8b35ac7..9b0efda6d50 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.html +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.html @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ -LaTeX2e unofficial reference manual (March 2018) +LaTeX2e unofficial reference manual (July 2018) - - + + - +